Home

ansaldo_dc suruculer_donanim&yazilim_el_kitabi

image

Contents

1. 6 8 9S v t c O 4 SPA LLL ART ATL RTL DS LES Pd D 2 PA LAT NND _ d m DAD ez 1 Q PAM WOU od IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D A Technical features LO LO a I N AU Fo aA COTS 7 L ZL BL Y Ip
2. 6 7 8 9 1 N N co cO N N 1 027 A Technical features A Technical features SILCOPAC D T 5 PSS NONE EAP J PN NENT NA agit l1 PANNA AL _____ _ 107 _ ig gy _ o 4 a 1 o l o OA Bn 4 lC C C Z ll ___ 1 AAA __ CN Tp Is
3. O IMSPD027I 69 A Technical features SILCOPAC D 2 5 Bik SSSR IK TRAN F SS Og SS 21514 e A NET a __ 44 7 X i Ip Inom Ipo Inom 70 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D A Technical features n
4. O O 74 SILCOPAC D A Technical features i 2 SANA CU SN 5555555555 555555555555 2 4 __ RS _ M E 19 ___ gt __________ L HEELHHHHHHHHHHHHHAHHIE gt ga A sA AN 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 1
5. uu l l 2 2 LA TI SS 1 15 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 0 62 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D A Technical features QN 1 6 5 1 4 y 5 NU NACL Ud S PS EMI 5 5 _ Bo AGS L TILL l al sssi 6 4 ie 1 NS O 2 IMSPD027I 63 A Technical features SILCOPAC D Ip Inom loo 4 N cO Y
6. 01 23 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D Ip Inom o Inom a NEN AE lea l in as XUL aZ LLL Lee LO X Te CN T 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 IMSPD027I A Technical features A Technical features Ip 58 un N SN
7. po Inom IMSPD027I 38 3 A Technical features SILCOPAC D Ip Inom Ipo Inom cO PSC N N N A A qo RAY AL ___ LUNN _ gt C 2 iu 2214 lt IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D A Technical features LO LO N AA PUS N A N ___ ____ M j AAA Ho N ee AL
8. PPRCRC e XM11 1 11 E T X9F 4 In Bi RIS 16 11 2 X9F 40 Enable 273 R24 cvi gt CV1 Close the thermal protection circuit i 1 9 37 R28 R29 CV2 CV4 11 3 la monitor Y XM11 4 a PPRCRA BOARD OUTPUT TERMINALS TERMINAL DESCRIPTION XM11 1 N O contact of the 4A 240V ac relay open contact protection triggered 1 1 11 2 N O contact ofthe 4 240 relay open contact protection triggered XM11 3 la monitor positive output XM11 4 la monitor earth The maximum distance between the SPDM and RTT modules in the board is set by the length of the flat cable used for the IMSPD027I 279 APPENDIX E Parallel of Bridges SILCOPAC D CONNECTING THE BOARDS 4 the shield SPDM MODULE BOARD P PPRCRD BOARD C MODULE RTT MODULE RTT FLAT CABLE cod 220881 BOARD P The load distribution between the two bridges depends on the electrical specifications of the line circuit line inductance motor armature The current regulator Is located in the SP DM converter that receives the signal
9. 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 1 Inom 66 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D A Technical features Sr N SEE 5 ______ ANAL jit tiga PSA _____ _____ 1142 Sa O IMSPD027I 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 1 Tp Ts SILCOPAC D lI
10. iii ip tt ARAN A He A 20 2 4 4 e o ___ eer SR LO co ai Ts 0 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 Inom IMSPD027I 71 A Technical features SILCOPAC D LO i 5 EUG S NA AO EN AN AN SAN PAE O MON 222220202 S 004
11. a i x m A O C C 2 V I Iw gt N EE C gt lt 1 ES s lt x 2 d lt 4 T lt 5 n r 1 gt a co fu gt gt x nn tas 5 Du T 2 EE E x N lt I 2 lt 2 C LO SO gt d LO gt gt gt lt gt lt na ej Lr A er 5 Pe 2 2 N gt lt gt 4 lt l S iO 1 N lt Y 7 r gt gt ip lt a xS 2 so F2 F4 i D 1 2 1 2 1 gt 221 C J R2 LO LO Ww 2 r 2 QU gt lt lt gt gt LIS e c poo aa ue K4
12. 6 8 1 9 v O J I L 1 TUN a Mz 53 NP P N DATA TEN NAY DA EU A B iG e A As X wou di WOU od IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D A Technical features IMSPD027I 6 1 9 8 vt 0 i QI a a 111177117 111141111111 we 4 111111111141
13. 0 si IMSPD027I 75 A Technical features SILCOPAC D Ip Ipo cO cO St cN EXACT PSS NN MCN IN A Sit 9 ____ M __ ____ _ Uie LII ____ ___ _ 1111 ED V lll a X 65 N A 52 e 2 4 7 9 6 5 4 2 1 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D A Technical features S N s T N Ap y A SAA Joist AS tS
14. Legenda BLOCKS PARAMETERS 1 speed reference CBl CBO TCT TCE 107 additional speed ref CB2 TC6 TD6 4 6 8 9 2 TC4 17105 TD4 TD5 1 J 2 CB3 CB5 CB7 CB8 CD5 CBC 1 702 TC9 TD9 4 8 currentreference 1 additional current ref CA3 5 TB5 1 current limitation CA2 CA5 CA9 TA4 TB3 4 1 current feedback 1 current regulator TA1 2 TBl 1 ignition reversing CA7 CA8 1 M F 1 1 M F 1 1 E M F reference CC1 087 089 voltage feedback E M F regulator CCA 161 TG2 1 2 3 5 6 D ee ae 7 protections DCA DCB DCCDCD DCE DCG DCH DCI DCK DCL DCM DCNDCO 1 DC2 ODC3 DC4 065 DC6DC7 21 supply line 22 SILCOPAC D 1 DE2 23 converter bridge 2 DA3 083 24 085 1086087 089 5 6 27 serial port DEA DEB DEC DED DEE DEF DEG DEI DE2 DE3 DFA DFB DFC DFD DFE DFF DFG DFH DFI DFJ DFK DFL DFM DFN DFO DFP DFa DFb DFd DFe DFf DFg DFh DFi DFI DFm DFp 28 inputs DH1 DH2 DH3 DH4 DH5 DH6 Djl DJ2 03 DJ4 D5 DJ6 07 8 DK1 DK3 DK5 DK6 DLA DLC DLD DLE DNA DNB DNC DNE DNF DNG DN1 DN2 DN3 DN5 DN6 DN7 29 outputs DMA DMB DMC DM1 DM2 DM3 DM4 DM5 DM6 DM7 DM8 DM9 DOA DOB DOC DOD DOE DOF DOl 002 004 005 06
15. ELC21242802 121242802 ELC21242803 TT ELC21242804 ELC21242804 ELC21242804 590V ELC21242805 ELC21242806 asss ELC21242806 I ELC21242806 ELC20653301 ELC20653301 ELC20653401 ELC20653401 ELC20653303 ELC20653403 ELC20653403 ELC20653304 ELC20653404 ELC20653404 ELC 20653305 ELC 20653405 ELC 20653405 ELC21242801 ELC21242901 ELC21242901 ELC21242801 ELC21242901 ELC21242901 ELC 21242803 ELP 21242903 ELP 21242903 ELC21242804 ELC 407417 ELC 407417 ELC21242805 ELC 40803804 4 ME Voltage Fuses DC Fuses SPDM600UG 50v SPDM600UH SPDM110UG SPDM110UG SPDM110UH SPDM200UH SPDM350UH _ ELC40803804 ELC40803806 9 cv Adviced quantity 3 Adviced quantity 2 90 IMSPDO027I SILCOPAC D Internal Fuses A Technical features Silcopac D SPDM750 RK 500A 1000V ELC20652702 SPDM850 UD UG RD 550A 690V ELC20648501 SPDM850 UK RH 550A 1000V ELC20652701 SPDM850 RG 550A 1000V ELC20648401 SPDMIKIUD G H RD 700A 690V ELC20648503 SPDMIKI RG H 700A 1000V ELC20648403 SPDMIK2 750A 1000V ELC21981101 SPDMIMOUG 700A 1000V ELC20648403 SPDM1M1 UG UH 750A 1000V ELC21981101 SPDM1M1 RG RH 750A 100
16. sit j NAAN AL iii 111111 pH 4 tg 7 155 __ 2 S a 727721888 sub B T I DEAE 246 X E SILCOPAC D 12345 6 7 8 9 1 Ts 0 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D A Technical features 96 cO N ss 5 NA 24 __ ZA e See ee eee a III 22 Z M a i
17. 2 AR 6R 2 SF Y YELLOW 9 10 CN2 CY gt 5 p p Ly 25 p ue C 2 Q i SER ENOTI AR TUNE RRE MN RR S Ate SF po UU e HP T x a IMSPD027I i e SS SS SS en n e esce s PUNTE REVERSIBILE 4 QUADRANT BRIDGE TAGLIA SIZE 26013901450 IRISTORE THYRISTOR 130 180 189 I EE TE 253 SILCOPAC D Appendix D Bridges Layout 254 Y YELI AJ ON AJ 10 CN CR oF jj G 9 10 OQ
18. Tacho generator voltage JUMPER IN from to suwa 3N 6 The accurate calibration is made through the parameter DJ 1 gain on the analog input Tach Apply the following formula to calculate the value of DJ 1 KKT J1 KKT is a constant depending on the selected jumper as shown in table Tacho gen voltage with N NMax C28 Field current adjustment C2 8 1 Inside exciter SPAE1 Verify the customizing of the exciter board par C2 5 1 and C2 5 2 Connectan ammeter in series to the field terminal block XM4 Setparameter DK2 20 and parameter OFF Close the umper J P 1 of the SPAE1 on INT constant field current Close the umper J P25 of the C board on pins 2 3 N FO Rotate the trimmer P 2 fully counter clockwise to zero the field current reference Power up the SPDM and the exciter and disable the protections DCF and DCN DRIVE PARAMETERS group C PROTECTIONS Rotate the trimmer P2 clockwise until the ammeter shows the desired field current Through the Hardware Status function par C1 3 6 read the If value ratio value at the ANALOG INPUT rotate the trimmer 1 until you read the correct value If at 100 If the motor must operates in field weakening range or you want to enable field save function or you want to set to zero field
19. 23 Di Interna COMIN CLIO INS m 24 IA ers 24 6 25 A6 Power connections diagrams l ado CR AERE RR EDAD 21 39 m 39 Terminal iblocks AMIC Lu ua u u unuy 39 TEZ 40 PAESE ien Is ojo om RUP l uy 40 T AG YOUNG 41 hs Recommended ye a a mu tds tod re _______ __ ______ __ _ _6_ __ 42 TA aaa 43 i gt HTC 44 Sommers 6618 m err 47 Ig c LKA co LX M Ru LL A LI E 51 AG Ovenodd uu 53 A9 in oa 79 79 g
20. n mmnnM R R R A Oe w RS through the Hardware Status function Analog Input par C1 3 6 read the signal on the analog input Tach If Ean1 Eam Ud and No A 0 amp a or using the Offset disconnect the terminals of the analog inputs Self tuning procedure Select Offset Self tuning function C1 3 10 open the main contactor 2 7 2 Personalisation of the mains voltage transducer Set the parameter 081 at the value of the rated voltage applied to the power input of the SP DM for example 400V Gauge with a voltmeter the voltage applied to the power input of the SP DM we call Uon this value Read on INSTRUMENT MODE paragraph 1 3 5 the ratio value of the mains voltage we call Uvo this value Read on the DRIVE PARAMETERS group paragraph C1 3 4 the current value of the parameter DJ 7 we call DJ 7current this value The new value of the parameter DJ 7 shall be calculated according the following formula Ae W N e DJ Jnew DJ 7current UON DB1 100 Uvo
21. 147 Mc 147 tte ier 147 210 Regulator AC ok rk x 148 2 10 1 Currentregulator automatic 148 2 10 2 SpesqTegulator adtematic ad uSTtefTig 148 races SMOD SUMI SRM aqa DIERUM AU 148 2 10 adus temi 148 2 10 9 M aer MEDI 150 211 Parameters DOCK QUU b o Vei Pn u aaa 151 2 2 COMVERGTR CSO 151 PANES i 152 2 05 MEO CANON OT 154 156 2 10 P Doar and 158 ZAF Complement 0 5 160 C3 TONDI SKO OUN Goiain a e 161 PROTECTION A SA 16 NIME E 16 Su m 16
22. 257 TOIDUS ______ 267 267 F2 iO LOGO Cos u 267 F2 1 Writing and reading modes of a field parameter 267 268 2 2 1 Dive Trace and T aC E apna 268 Cd O 269 E2212 y Un PE a 269 F2 2 1 3 Fields meaning Protections Logic 1 0 N amp Drive Trace statuUS lll l p eek rU e 270 F2 2 1 4 Fields meaning T amp S Thyristor Trace Protections be ehh FP 271 F2 3 Negative results of writing and reading URDU 271 s aan umpu au Qa A wa pia asus uku 271 rna arent toned rne hired 213 274 u 214 tT m 274 3 papelpl aa 275 u ua uu 215 Fa omm 275 LAND QUO a man a t
23. 10 ms Cycle time it is the time period between two successive execution of the speed regulation J 5 ms algorithm 3 3 ms AbDel 1 255 Delay between Start input enabling terminal 1 13 and thyristor firing pulses actual enabling see 1 param This delay depends on the network voltage period It is expressed 350B as aa T T 20 ms with network frequency equal to 50 Hz T 16 7 ms with network frequency equal to 60 Hz CD5 Delay on K1 an open TE zero speed is reached expressed in software cycles see par Nz_D 0 250 351B C D3 a 100 10 1 100 Maximum speed feedback variation allowed per software cycle see par d 0 255 rad s Single pending filter on speed feedback d ON OFF Helper aux function enable See function description ON OFF Pope aux function enable See function description CED 3723 ON OFF Mechanical loss compensation aux function See function description CE1 Additional term to be added to the speed reference offset speed 374W 0 20 See Pope and Helper aux functions CE2 376W CE3 Compensation term of the constant mechanical losses i e not dependent on the speed See 378W 0 100 Mechanical Losses Compensation aux function CE4 KN 10 0 100 Compensation term of the mechanical losses which linearly depends on the speed See 380W Mechanical Losses Compensation aux function ay 0 100 Current thresho
24. XM1 Apply the following procedure in order to replace CONDA card with a CONDB card Replace EEPROM component housed on the pre existent card with the one situated on the new card in order to reuse the parameter configuration Remake the gauging of the armature voltage transducer as described in section C par 2 6 2a Remake the gauging of the tachometric voltage transducer if used as described in section C par 2 6 2b Personalize the jumper configuration apart from the jumpers relating to the above mentioned transducers in order to obtain the same functionalities set on the previous card see the description made in section C par 2 8 Insert the extractable terminal boards XM1 lining them up the left side of CONDB card so that the terminal XM1 42 Is free on the right side of it all other contacts are compatible IMSPD027 177 C Maintenance SILCOPAC D 178 IMSPD027I D AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS D1 Helper SYSTEM CONFIGURATION HELPER FEEDBACK No i CURRENT 9 lao I I Com3 M B CURRENT No This function controls the load sharing between two drives when their motors are mechanically coupled MASTER converter Master converter must deliver an analog signal 10V proportional to the armature current reference programming one of the DM1 DM2 or DM3 parameters as lao then one of the three PWM1 PWM2 or PWM3 analog outputs terminals
25. LE OE E E E E 11 Four pole Faston terminals x58 50 X10 Three pole terminal not in use J umper J umper open Resistor 22 umper open 4 Resistor 22 J umper closed xT7 Resistor 22 J umper open The board PPRCRC installed on RTT compares the IAM current delivered from the MASTER SPDM with the current delivered by the SLAVE RTT If the difference between the two currents exceeds the permitted tolerance the comparison relay drops out The protection will not be activated until the current of a bridge reaches its nominal value The circuit of the la monitor of the RTT is present on the PPRCRC board for the SP DM the output XM 1 35 36 is to be used with outlet at the Faston terminals XM 11 3 4 A d c ammeter may be connected to these terminals with 5 mA full scale or a d c voltmeter with 10 V full scale The output can be set with the T1 trimmer Should a voltmeter be used the CV4 jumper must be closed The output from the la monitor can be at a relative value CV2 jumper closed instrument at central zero or at absolute value CV2 open instrument at side zero
26. 192 DLS 192 pu u u Do i 192 DIS DOUDIE setcomplete of Dade Qaqa bna aa aa 193 D 15 BUMDES UNECO Gt 194 l 194 D20 Regenerative braking _ ___ gt 194 D21 LOGGING OF references and COMMaNAS u PUR see rut ___ __ a 194 OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS EO 197 EL positon regulator ERROR RD A 197 E 2 u a 199 E3 Backlash compensation 200 E4 Angular speed as function of the diameter 2222 2 0 059 nnn 201 ES Tension Fegulatofs 5 shasha 201 sicco AA 201 E52 203 203 ESSE Seg ua aa aaa OAO 204 rem 206 208 210 l uu u gt 211 O 214 SPEO ISIN mme 216 zem EC poc rm 216 S l
27. 5 BEB B 2 CE 2 ARBE Asano 990 gt 5 B8 57m m m m Me 1 Close thermal protectors circuit la monitor IMSPD0271 83 A Technical features SILCOPAC D 84 IMSPD027I A10 OPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS 10 1 Interface Silcopac D digital converter is equipped with a device which manages the exchange of information and data with the external world by means ofa serial link It is possible to carry out a point to point connection by means of a RS 232 electric standard device Use the proper serial communication software to link a personal computer by a point to point connection to set parameters and Carry out diagnostic operations specifically concerning the converter start up and troubleshooting This type of connection does not require any additional hardware Fig 10 1 Figure 10 1 IMSPD0271 85 A Catalogo delle caratteristiche tecniche SILCOPAC D A10 2 List of auxiliary functions 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Helper it used to pilot a Silcopac D starter under current keeping the speed regulator in its saturation status Pope it is used to adjust a tangent winder to a fixed and re calibrable current refer
28. shu 106 Group s ANAPOGUINP FU av Rd Qon bp RR REA d ea e 107 eB NAO GIN Pi Bio p P 107 108 M AUI Tm 108 GO DIGITAL OUTPUT anus b rt 109 Group CHA once mre domat don mati Pd 109 C GUIDE TO SETTING UP AND MAINTENANCE LM UAE PM PORA eB 111 111 om EE DS stat dao ukum atas 113 E vt CER LR 113 EZE 114 l a 118 CH 119 La Dye rame aer n 120 121 uuu uso gt 122 PZ SUPREN yu uuu 123 Jo TA OFT y Z m 125 1 295 A 126 teeth Quta en Hr Mesa rae aaa se 128 POES GF 130 12 012 131 IMSPD027I Index SILCOPAC D 2 5ethng 133 2
29. 7 7 77 S I 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 1 Jj e O 72 IMSPD027I A Technical features SILCOPAC D
30. 216 216 0 Taper aasan e er coc UR ER OU 216 Cero SPCC 217 5 8 Ol IN diame tob A 217 t 218 UN 218 E5 9 2 Tafg entia 220 E5 9 3 Maximum acceleration time calculation Axial 220 E5 9 4 Maximum acceleration time calculation Tangential winder l 221 F5 10 Te si n Max Range Winder us a t rum ah 221 222 IV IMSPD027I Index SILCOPAC D ES Parameters uM CU 223 223 t 226 Exemple Or UR FUR eT v 221 APPENDIXES kda daS u u 231 Appendix B Printing menu drive trace and thyristor trace 239 Appendix C Printing menu 241 Append De BRIGGS Ay OUI yu uuu 247 Appendix E EMC Standards and applicable S tandali s ema
31. 235 1 027 SILCOPAC D Appendix Bridges Layout l Wk E E 254404 ZUD IMSPD027I 236 SILCOPAC D Appendix C Configuration Parameters IMSPD027I 237 Appendix Bridges Layout SILCOPAC D gt 7 C 2 D 238 IMSPD027I APPENDIX N STATUS PROTECTIONS 24 REGUL 0000000000000000 23 REGUL 0000000000000000 22 REGUL 0000000000000000 21 REGUL 0000000000000000 20 0000000000000000 19 REGUL 0000000000000000 18 REGUL 0000000000000000 17 REGUL 0000000000000000 16 REGUL 0000000000000000 15 REGUL 0000000000000000 14 REGUL 0000000000000000 13 REGUL 0000000000000000 12 REGUL 0000000000000000 11 REGUL 0000000000000000 10 REGUL 0000000000000000 9 REGUL 0000000000000000 REGUL 0000000000000000 REGUL 0000000000000000 REGUL 0000000000000000 REGUL 0000000000000000 REGUL 0000000000000000 REGUL 0000000000000000 REGUL 0000000000000000 REGUL 0000000000000000 PROTE 0100000000000000 PROTE 0100000000000000 PROTE 0100000000000000 PROTE 0100000000000000 PROTE 0100000000000000 PROTE 0100000000000000 PROTE 010000
32. 9 5 0 CO gt gt mt T9 O O 1 O i iD N T ES C5 7 N gt gt L Le 254 P re el e 4 7 V d V Ji lt M lt _ lt lt i P HIR 2 N lt gt Li x ac ac ac N To O p s N Lf L Lt Lf hs M gt gt gt gt x gt c x ul gt gt gt gt gt 4 oJ L xo O c E oO N CN E LO N cm H O N N N gt 2 gt 2 Z zt Z Z Z O O O C O 5 O O O C gt gt O gt O C O O O O O O O YS SN 25 YN ZN Z Ae oe Q wi j L4 4 5115 1 1177 n m T LT Di T J CAAA AN qa DAN Le DAN DAMA WMA AVADA y gt N Ny LO N M Ae Ae n A EP q E lt
33. 4 lt gt o 55 gt lt 9 Iz M K me 2 3 C NU 2 gt lt lt g x PN T3 5 2 2 5 o gt 2 nv IMSPDO027I SILCOPAC D FRAME 850A 1100A SPDM1K1 Two quadrant A Technical features e e Q V YA ZX X c m LESS ZS E A 7N 7N 4 9 2 _ gt gt gu LN zs gt ONIMOLINON Zy G2 53504 404 lvNOlLdO lt Je bts 2 Y 4 C e gt 37 JINGOW 318 59 3 38 NON ES 4 cz E A UP La n VINX 59131939 0738 I 9v OAVdS i eee lt pmo A e cox 0742 9A 042 A YJO X 19 2 j L gt Q 5 gt 20 F 4 FOX 161 3 mm os 5 WE 4 GSY yyy 3LON 335 SE Ew V 1 2 ta wi e _ O AlddnS t 0 z _ 2506 26e ey T qyyog
34. 9 9 9 roi 2 09 06 j A s P e dS INVMQ A NIW a V FN n 004 G doya J9VLIOA V L1 S N 31010 3HL NO 404 NO GQHdNOISN3 3NII 9133 GslVe lt NOLVSSITVO LVI f pe ONY Nay AINO WddS INVNGvND v 1 AINO 83183ANOO9 931009 039804 Nd gt c 008 lt 53415 404 5 3245 NO 15 4 vsvalin Z V L L N3dO NOdf 4 F IMSPD027I 48 A Technical features Example of SPDM rectifier bridge connection SILCOPAC D IHS p 2 ION J E 3 5 i lt 2 9 O O O 7 7 4 L uw WP e 1 x x
35. BESS _ _ 12222 1 Fe N ee Er tee sj S LO LO LO 4 6 8 9 1 Ipo 0 IMSPD027I 77 A Technical features SILCOPAC D 78 IMSPD027I A9 HARDWARE OPTIONS
36. LAM FIBER LO A LO e 0 4 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 1 aah IMSPD0271 55 A Technical features SILCOPAC D Ip 56 gt 09 ku e ev gt e A N N N E N 5 k N N AL O O N L T G yy Fit a Tt 121 2 7 227 2 ONT eee ln 6225227274 i d N
37. Espansione 1 0 digitali Logic 1 0 Expansion 25908304 12 SPDS1 Seriale RS 485 Serial link RS485 25908306 13 FlatCable SPD D SPRu 2064202 M SPAE0 Raddrizzatore di campo Field rectifier 2980 15 Eccitatrice 1 25908821 Exciter SPAE 12A 25908819 1 SPAEB 12A 25908822 5 __ 8307 OSPAMOSUID 289308 DSPAMOSUID 28730749 Reattore 20065601 Single phase line reactor 20065602 Y Filtro RC RC filter 425440 18 Reattoretifase Threphaselinereactor __ C 220 ATRS 50 Autotrasformatore Sincronismo 1415 440 480 500 380 269 ATRS 22 Synchronism autotransformer 3 220 240 380 200008 Fusibili U R Olato CA Side Q ta Q ty 20653 U F Fuse Olato Side gt 355 Alato Side Q ta Qty 20653 Olato CC DC Side Q ta Qty 200442 Base portafusibile 20655 gt Fuse holder 21430 P524 2 2A Vin 85 265Vac Alimentatore 24Vc c per I O digitali LOGICS 1 0 24 Vd c Power Supply 226084 Manuale User Manual SW S Clitaliano italian O Manuale User Manual SW M OMtaliano ltalan 10 Manuale User Manual SW L Gltaliano Italian CJinglese English M TOTALE TOTAL AMOUNT COMPILATORE EDITOR APPROVAZIONE APPROVED
38. ni Ti gt VN woog 19 Jy 0 LUCES 3 MTS CC ENDS RF reas A NU 3 NOZ vl NI CV lt x Jad 7 Y Z N L m 10 0 1 nm 1 29 lt 52 roy 2 s c Us Sdo SIE m7 e EE T T Ls A 233 UN he lt V de y OSV 9 ESRB 1 4 i 9 20 gt gt WU gt Si GLXOGND m 2 0 E lt m U Ga 0 m Z Co x 2 P amo T LINX 2 v O gt Z 3MOLILM3ANOO m m V e 2 D A il 3 E 1 84 SV V gt S m C 2 2 C 1 O Gi N I gt CO 00 O _ h E vl J 2 Y cp CD H pd ped i o A 22 G UJ s p 3 CJ r lt
39. Le 288 390 5 1 AKS AKO ca D im x ES e N N S N AM KM y 2 FS moi 54 ASN NI 4 AN me E Tes COOLING AN m h 855 1 N ve SIT A dt K V ES V l LU A U 7 ER PR e K K w K lt 2 C OUXO 14 IMSPD027 A Technical features SILCOPAC D 4 j9 jno 24 uo pepi oJd aq 9 lt 0102 uo v CN MO4 IVNOIL C 9 O aA 20 nw i l G6 VON X N x V M 1 O J Y i i 4 ue O l AJ x 1 1 a 2 SZ SoZ 82 _ m zZ 7 36 E N V av Te age ny pa NO gt gt NN 1NOMJ gt gt 2 m 16 m Y P Bil 1 PR CN K B N 1 i s 14501 38 LON 1508
40. we N 1R de e Iy 6 X ou Nie Nod 5522 4 4 ERIS ax S wu X ww NA AK3 AKO AM PONT E VERSIBILE 4 QUADRANT BRIDGE IMSPD027 AN SIZE 30 60 RISTORI THYRISTOR 26 70 251 Appendix Bridges Layout 4R CY AJ lt 2 CN3 AF ONTI TAGLIA KI NET RS s VZ OO SILCOPAC D 5 FY V Z V x N ue Q f 6 gt gt wl gt gt gt 4 QUADR 160 1200 A ERE 20 1105 252 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D Appendix D Bridges Layout
41. E OLX EN GC N lt 4 CN L 9 1 A a tr EZ M b r RA 414 CNAA 39 10A lt 9 VN OVI10A N ne Guy LV 310N TC NY ER Uc 006 gt JOVIIOA N CIO A Technical features FRAME 1500 IMSPDO027I 30 A Technical features SILCOPAC D 4000A U Two quadrant FRAME 2200A 3 VdS 404 94 9311091 09 2 Q C Ne 5 AlddnS 31 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D A Technical features FRAME 30 110 Four quadrant me 2
42. AlddNS s3MOd 06 9 LNO T N SNI NOILVOLJIIN3QI can heed gs ONIMOLINON 53504 7 E IMSPDO027I A Technical features SILCOPAC D 38 IMSPD027I 7 5 7 1 Terminal blocks Note U I means User Interface panel SPDI 1 7 1 1 Terminal blocks 1 board N O contact of relay K1 220 V 2A Closed contact motor running N O contact of relay K2 220 V 2 A Closed contact converter ready the relay normally energized will be de energized at the intervention of any internal protections Encoder power supply If jumper J P26 is in 2 3 position Encoder P ush P ull power supply terminal 5 has 24 V 100 mA output voltage coming from the power supply unit connected to terminals 22 and 23 If jumper J P26 is in 1 2 position Encoder Line Driver power supply terminal 5 is disabled and the encoder must be fed from the outside with 5 24 V voltage U1 signal input from encoder Rin 10 KO maximun frequence 50 KHz U1 signal input from differential encoder otherwise not used Rin 10 K maximun frequence 50KHz U2 signal input from encoder Rin 10 KO maximun frequence 50 KHz U2 signal input from differential encoder otherewise not used Rin 210 maximun frequence 50KHz U3 signal input from encoder turn pulse If used remove jumper 23 Rin 10 maximun frequence 5
43. RE gt I SSS Y JSMJAJdM JSNVML 35 10 GN L 1 C MOS N2 941 5 F Q lt 5 bs 4 P Y N e VA J ZX 4 gt G NS JO 4 gt WAL pots C 2 O ULL gt Vaasa _ gt kc C d gy LH A S EM N r PVA C f 4 v 5 2 4 T Go e GH d 2 lt j e gt A lt m di C A e l o9 O p Sid TT E 2 2 1 gt Ts EPS uc 5 gt m 2 10 12 A lt d NI c 9 4 v y M MH gt 2 L 29 SY 3 Send une 5 NU S r 1 n lt e O Y NX G ZNO Y x e lt 6 amp s 36 5 0738 212 N J 9 gt 03 46 94 99 H ac J 6NJ 2 e U gt 5 gt 8181 xi e e e A E lt gt J Q CNY pe 5 al A ES MNISLV 3H Lt ea 3LON 355 M ZH
44. EMC filter Figure 1 4 connection 1 027 263 APPENDIX E EMC Standards and applicable Standards SILCOPAC D LINE REACTORS Converters cause short duration short circuits their AC inputs called commutation notches The depth of this notches must be reduced if the same transformer shall supply more than one converter In such case line reactors are necessary They must cause about 2 relative voltage drop at rated current and are also necessary if the power of the converter is very low compared with the available power of the transformer or supply line According to the European product standard EN 61800 3 the commutation notches must be kept below 20 of the line voltage in the first environment whereas an upper limit of 40 is specified for the second environment This target can be achieved with the aid of line reactors The inductance of these reactors to be applied in the first environment must have 4 times the value of the network inductance at the converter s connection point point of common coupling Due to the maximum power of public 400 V transformers PMAX 1 2 MVA IMAX 1732 A and due to their relative short circuit voltage VSC of 4 or 6 the maximum AC current which is available for a converter is 520A or 346A IDC lt 633A or 422A With reference to EN 61800 3 the rated power of transformer must be at least 4 times the rated power of the PDS MEDIUM VOLTAGE LINE
45. REF Blocks description SPEED_REG Speed regulator it is saturated by a term summed to the speed reference ic OMEGA CALC The angular speed reference is calculated from the line speed as function of the calculated acquired diameter CURRENT REG Armature current regulator CURRENT FEEDBACK Armature current feedback la TAPER Used when in the winder unwinder applications the tension reference To has to be re calibrated as function of the coil diameter the re calibration can be linear or hyperbolic type When the function is disabled the tension reference is directly passed to the comparison node DIAMETER CALC The diameter is calculated as line speed angular speed ratio or it is acquired as analog signal provided by a proper external transducer TENSION REF It evaluates the term related to the tension reference INERTIA COMP It evaluates the term related to the inertia compensation that is function of speed variation diameter machine acceleration times material density and tape width MECHANIC LOSS It evaluates the term related to the mechanical loss compensation a constant term and a speed related term 208 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D E Optional functions Parameters setting Setting 3 Axial winder control of the current limit CJB 1 Cb CL2 CL3 CL4 CL5 2 CE1 CA2 CK2 IMSPD027I Setto ON to enable the function Set to the value acc
46. eae 8 Interface Board Connector RxD TxD N Transmit data minus DGND Data Ground reference potential for VP The figure 9 5 1 shows Profibus connector and underlines the switch that inserts the termination resistor of the last line slave To guaranty the continuity of the shield put the same on metallic connector See 2 The slave cable connection must be always inserted on the left side of internal screw terminal board in respect of colours sequence IMSPD027 81 A Technical features SILCOPAC D xb qr Tra ra In JE E E Figure 9 4 1 Connector for Profibus board A9 4 3 Board Layout and LED SUPRB Board Code 45248703 Opened Opened Closed on 2 3 Opened Connector for connection to microprocessor board C X6 connector Profibus connector Not used Reserved Not used Not used HL2 Red Profibus communicates normally Data exchange between Master and Slave OFF Profibus communication 5 broken or not started Bus cable broken incorrectly connected Wrong configuration or parametrization data of Master Master is off line or shut down HL4 Fieldbus Module is activated Parameters received and module activated J ellow Module is waiting for messages from the bus OFF LED NI Green No external communication ON K1 Option board not activated WARNING Device DP p
47. lt 1 9 gt 9 9 A M gt 6 9N2 1941 LOX LI L 4 A 9 lt O ave NZ E NN 2 C P CU IN U 9 L _2 49 1 NS 9 c 72 lt A 1449415 414 MEA EN x OQ 6 ZNO 49 24 L4 Y lt i Ps mu 5 gt VA 4l 6 9 9 9 i N OL ZNO lt gt _ lt M C INJ 9 N 1 vx 59 wv 69 vM p S 6 5 5 gt gt el lp J 2 2 P C SSXL 2 T EU ulis gt TI SF amp V av P N 65 ZGX SX gt 7 Als q 5 5 N DEM E 4 P3 A Za e 3 E 4s NO 89X D SX D L 271 S E N E e CH lt A 4 e Su du 3 9 TWF e C ux 099 gt g G gt eV An
48. po A E Q V N3TIOMINO2O3OIN v ols 49 s _ LI T 6X 8X i z gt 91314 6 Le lt ze 5 4 aes o 6 941 LOX Ce 2 C quu 3 P S n v 19 Q9 SEMEN S 7 LV 1440565 1 VNOILdO 47 IMSPD027I Ex C gt S P m 4 Jg J Wel Te A oe LX vax 6X m o N 8 L NO V S S PUES 2 gt gt n NO GGX gt k at EY 66 22 PE 6SXLI 4SX M G PA ad Co TT J elis N 3 G M xs kas gt lt 8l l ocx 2 5 o C ex 01 m wyo ZGX N l J X x REPE T 6SX 8GX LGX 3715 T Zy AS UE L QdVO8 I x gt 42 9 vNO os 5 9 9 S 396 96 4 CY eO CN dle 809 A JSNVMIO V gt
49. ae ee 134 2 2 BOA 134 2 MOS c 134 dub uuu 139 E CE 139 O udo n 140 2 5 Exeter customizing S PAETA u u u von onde pus a Ee Quen ro rv TERRACE 140 2 5 1 Field current transducer configuration titre _________ 140 2 5 2 Configuration of the field current reference source 141 2 0 lt SUING CONS manan pais oS D ERU DERE 142 Bal 143 Aki Mane voltage adus EmMmEN aa 143 2 7 2 Armature voltage transducer adjustement cR 143 2 1 3 Tacho generator voltage transducer adjustement seen nnn nnn nnn nnn 144 2407 Ped CUEN IUS tele sess k boc nb a conn en vi eb 144 291 dema PATE bud D e CUN 144 2 92 EX 144 2 9 Verifying the proper setting of the armature and tacho generator voltage transducer eee 146 ZO steal Fs Mec
50. 5 armature current feedback la arm curr Ud 96 fs V armature voltage Ud arm volt Flu motor flux flux Ifo 96 f5 field current reference field cur rf f fs field current feedback field curr Uvo fs V line voltage Uvo line voltage alfa thyristors firing angle electr Degrees alfa firing angle NOTE the values of list a with the exception of Aux1 Aux2 Aux3 Flu can be modified in real values through the CD2 parameter fs full scale value corresponding to 100 List b DIGIT NUMBERS the variables selected in 1 and 2 are displayed in digits with 0 196 precision NOTE Ifthe DGC parameter is set ON whenever we have POWER ON or after every reset the INSTRUMENT MODE level 2 point A is shown instead of the frame provided by the STATUS function IMSPDO027I 121 C User Interface SILCOPAC D C1 3 6 Hardware status This function displays the digital inputs and outputs status ON or OFF and the analog inputs and outputs value as of the full scale value 1st level using buttons U D SELECT FUNCTION selectthe Hardware Status function HARDWARE STATUS y p using buttons U D select an item of list a 2nd level SELECT STATUS press ENTER to access to the 2nd level press ENTER to confirm the choice using buttons U D the items of list D are displayed press ENTER to return
51. 7 100 with DB7 as base speed 0 Weighing and speed reference recalibration are only performed when the motor reaches base speed considering K start value base speed Is only reached if speed reference is set to 100 On reaching base speed armature current la Nbase is measured and recalibration coefficient K is recalculated as follows 986 with DB6 as nominal current and DB7 as base speed la Nbase is the average current calculated within a time interval set by parameter CF6 expressed in software cycles see parameter CD3 during which speed is kept equal 10 base speed The whole speed recalibration procedure requires twice the time set by CF6 CF3 parameter is used to compensate the friction torque during the lowering it is adjusted so that the lifting and lowering speed of the system with the same load are equal IMSPD027I 183 D Auxiliary functions SILCOPAC D D6 Speed feedback switching SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SPEED CURRENT TACHF UD Parameters CBG ON Speed feedback switching aux function enabled TH7 PI 2 TH8 DCG OFF Tacho loss protection disabled DDA See description Function description This function acts when the condition for the tacho loss protection occurs i e either when armature voltage exceeds by 50 its rated value with no tacho or encoder feedback or if tacho or encoder feedback sign is inverted This function replaces the ta
52. LORS EE LC eV Ip Inom Ipo IMSPD027I 61 A Technical features SILCOPAC D SM T c A 5 N Noa at NC SLNN N N s SP _ _______ gt ___ Of e 4 2 2 TN r l __
53. AK5 XMS i T b k N 5 N iS XM 3 MUN jd o N PIX a y D nS N SN N s R INLET B DS P _ 5 24 e COOLING 2 FANS 2x52 m h P 1 INSTALLATION SUPPORTS ON K gt AKZ AK5 M2 SIZE zum xS 3 e ne as k umma s jh n 265 122 124 18185 22 2 l 10 ZAM A OU IMSPD027I A Technical features SILCOPAC D AIR INLET 5 E S NU ENE J v d i i y lt Y po N UNE 7 D 900 FREE AREAS F YL2 ded SASS O 00 N LO VE L NO cbe Il SENS SS 585 c eeu cen CSS s f q 226 __ T 11 IMSPD027I A Technical features SEN gt lt ibis p 280 PS AKAD l FREE AREAS FOR COC
54. F F F F NM F WY F F F F NM F WH TRACING CAUSE PROTECTION Ext P LOGIC 1 0 ALARMS LEGENDA Start Ramp IntR fl IntR f2 Coml COm2 Com3 COm4 2 Out2 15 LEGENDA TachF Alarm SILCOPAC D IMSPD027I APPENDIX 1 5 9 CBE CB1 CB9 CCA 2 CDA CDE CD7 CFA CFA CFE CF3 CG2 CHA CHE A CURRENT laoS N Reg RateL 100 0 laLim 100 0 B SPEED REG Enable On MpoMem Off NoSel MpotF w Nstop 2 0 M Ref 0 0 C E M F REG Enable On FIDel 10 D MISCELLANEA W Eepr IR12Ds 0ff 0 1 Off Kramer Off LK_N 10 0 NLRic 100 0 F AUX FUNCT 2 G Ric Off Flux_R Off LW Fr 100 ERNAR 10 0 G POSITION REG Enable Off 5 2 0 H P L C Enable Off F1C CS 0ff 1 027 2 6 CBF 2 6 CD8 CEB CE1 CES CE9 CFB CFF CF4 CF8 CGB CG3 CEB CHI e CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS laoLm Fixed IALNM 1000 Enc_f off MpoRes Off NoAdd Off Nhist T 0 3 In Off FecTm 1000 QuickS Off Defau Off NST 6 32 Pope Off NoRic t 10 0 laThr t 10 0 Ir TN 100 0 T_Prf Off FUd C3 Off RmpTm 10 0 ErN_T 10 PosSp Off P reff 0 Fld C Off
55. 2 7 3 Personalisation of the armature voltage transducer The rough personalization of the transducer is made by means of three jumpers P15 P16 and J P17 Close just one of the three jumpers according to the applied armature voltage and the voltage version of the converter G H K W M N Armature voltage Voltage version J umper 03 KKU ii a I D RON C WN C 00 598 0 T Sc 200V 8 88045 H K W JP16 380V 720 72080 BH iMM 1 1 454 M N mE Jl 4xXv 80V 8635 _____ 860V 13467 The precision calibration is made through the parameter DJ 5 gain on the analog input Ud Apply the following formula to calculate the value of DJ 5 KKU Armature voltage in Volt The adjustment of the armature voltage transducer must be verified as explained on the paragraph C2 9 045 IMSPDO027I 143 C Setting up SILCOPAC D 2 7 4 Preliminary adjustment of the tacho generator transducer The rough personalization of the transducer is made by means of 5 jumpers P8 P9 10 P11 and J P 12 One jumper only or no jumpers must be closed according to the max voltage delivered by the tacho generator voltage at motor highest speed A AAA A A A A M
56. ratio of the used encoder DB9 9 0 100 RI drop across the motor as of the DB4 parameter It is the armature voltage when the rotor 540W is locked at armature current 100 so equal to lay IMSPD0271 101 B List of parameters SILCOPAC D Code Default Values Description iv Group C PROTECTIONS This group includes the parameters used to enable the Protections intervention See also the next group D ALARMS that includes the enabling parameters of the alarms intervention the parameters of groups C and D are related each one to other because each intervention can be defined as follows Protection if the intervention is reported and the converter is stopped DCx parameter of group DC PROTECTIONS Alarm ifthe intervention is reported without the stop of the converter DDy parameter of group DD ALARMSJ X y identify the active protection or alarm i e DCA line loss DCx DDy OFF OFF intervento disattivato ON intervento attivato come allarme ON intervento attivato come protezione ON jntervento attivato sia come protez sia come allarme _________ only status 3 is allowable for interventions 0 1 0 3 10 wh status 4 are not allowable for interventions 4 5 11 12 14 DCA MainF OFF 0 Line loss The system forces the converter to the maximum delay followed by pulses 550 0 ain I suppression This hardware protection cannot disabled 1 External protection An ex
57. 5 CM6 AccTo CN3 Fdiam C02 Btime Off t 50 0 Off Wind P CM4 10 0 10 1 CJS 9 CK1 CL4 CM7 CN4 C03 SILCOPAC D ToSel P 4 ToN 20 0 0 TtoNO 10 0 TK 100 Mat P Normal Waths 5 AccTI 100 0 CDThr t 20 B Rmp 10 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D Appendix C Configuration Parameters TUNING PAPAMETERS e A CURRENT REG 32 TA2 Gdl 56 100 0 IABL1 100 0 laOfl 0 0 B ALT CURRENT TBI G_P2 32 2 602 56 TB3 laTL 100 0 TB4 laBL2 100 0 TB5 1 012 t 00 e SPEED REG N 400 TC2 N Gi 50 TC3 0 4 100 0 TC5 1 100 0 6 08 0 0 TC7 InR11 30 0 TC8 InR21 30 0 TC9 Ced 00 D ALT SPEED TD1 N GP2 400 TD2 N Gi 80 TD3 N_Gd2 0 104 NoLA2 100 0 TD5 100 0 106 00 0 0 TD7 InR2 300 TD8 InR22 30 0 TD9 Ced2 0 0 E RAMP TE1 10 0 TdcR 10 0 TarRm 0 0 F ALT RAMP TF1 TacR2 10 0 TF2 TdcR2 10 0 e G E M F REG TG1 E 100 762 16 E GAINS GP 0 TH2 GiKI 0 TH3 Gd 0 TH4 2 0 TH5 Gi K2 0 TH6 Gd 2 0 TH7 TcFGp 0 TH8 TcFGi 0 J POSITION REG TJ1 GpPos 0 T2 Gp PI 400 TJ3 Gi PI 80 Gd PI 0 TJ5 Gp P2 400 T6 80 T7 Gd P2 0 e CELL REG GpT 100 TK2 GiT 100 TK3 TlimT 2 0 TK4 TlimB 2 0 TK5 NoLmT 100 0 TK6 1000 TK7 0 1
58. XM1 8 10 1 9 23 iid Zero pulse 110 O ya K 24V XM1 11 O 0 Exemple Connection of an Encoder with power supply 24 and pulses value 5V Jumper JP26 on External Power supply 5V 100mA min External Power supply 24V Encoder 46 IMSPD027 A Technical features SILCOPAC D A7 6 Suggested diagrams Example of SPDM exciter connection ZEN 133 5 Ie 2 AD Ne L N 2 lt E D 1 t O O r lt Nu 6 7 x Z N A 4 lor A 9 8 Lv 66 vC LVN X O HS SY Aver G NOO oL 4 N EN v V V V Ec 1 Y Y Y y 01 P DA ps 6 L lt ALZ gt L gt n AVEtT TEM gt 8 7 V S
59. enabling the converter Start command the motor accelerates until the max speed protection occurs P B tore the waveform on the scope and measure the time between zero speed and basic speed remember that 10V voltage value at the analog output means maximum speed 100 restore the normal conditions and reset the converter Example Max speed 1000 rpm basic speed 700 rpm max current 30A nominal current 20A DC4 DB7 DB6 700 1000 100 70 20 30 100 66 6 curr ref set in Setup Reference N 100 70 ae 5090 0 55 6 55 1051 Note 1 itis possible to measure the acceleration time at a current reference equal to a fraction of the basic speed multiplying later the time as read on the scope for the same fraction example curr ref 1 2 66 6 33 3 t 13s 1 2 6 5s Note 2 itis possible to measure the acceleration time stopping at a speed which is a fraction of the basic speed multiplying later the time as read on the scope for the inverse of the same fraction example speed 70 1 2 35 3 255 2 1 6 5s IMSPD027I 199 E Optional functions SILCOPAC D E3 BACK LASH COMPENSATION The function 5 used to null the opening effect of the back lash that occurs during the reverse phase of the armature current The compensation is obtained reducing the current value torque on the motor shaft at the end of the bridge reversing s
60. n 1 upa 4534 5 u03 1 493 a im V ne 71 7 agua Lr 9 C MAROJN I m Wd SE 0495 40 3 NOIL23T3S x0v8q334 413355 BINOD IN3MM02 313 32 343 3 43345 24 19M1u 9 5 4 2 1 5100 289 3 64 ae CNV3 MOLV7n93M 1NIYYNI E MEM NOILO3T3S AYIL 3346 231 1 027 SILCOPAC D Appendix Bridges Layout IMSPD027I 232 SILCOPAC D Appendix C Configuration Parameters A M s d Ka lt YO NO Y lt C Q gt C 3 LC CO IMSPD027 233 Appendix Bridges Layout SILCOPAC D 234 7 7 4 7 s qe C L lt POS E CN O D Q Q x my C 4 N Y MN gt gt 5 E gt N q IMSPD027I Appendix C Configuration Parameters SILCOPAC D 12009 AT KAA A V CN U
61. 1 37 38 1 39 41 1 40 41 is set as current reference for the slave converter SLAVE converter Parameters CEA ON Helper aux function enabled CB2 AuxAdd Term to be summed to the speed reference from aux function 1 10 Value of the speed reference summing term CA2 AuxRic Current limit control from aux function OFF 4 program with the value of the time for the motopotentiometer which is used for the load share CB9 program with the value of the load share CBE program with the value ON to store the value of the load share Slave converter receives the armature current reference from the Master converter at the Eanl analog input terminals XM1 29 31 SLAVE converter commands Com3 terminals XM1 19 Helper function enable Coml terminals XM1 17 Ean1 analog input recalibration INCREASE Com2 terminals XM1 18 Ean1 analog input recalibration DECREASE Function description Com3 input is not active the function is disabled the converter is speed regulated and the active current limits are those set by TA3 and TA4 parameters Com3 input is active the function is enabled the speed regulator will be forced to saturate enabling the speed reference summing term defined through the CE1 parameter invitation speed To allow the speed regulator saturation even at the maximum reference program TC4 and TC5 parameters according to the following formula 4 4 CE1 where T
62. GS Y Nx FK XN Li N A Em II II E lt P lt T n 1 5 Lan sasa ss ee l AD u a AK3 AK5 gt A 750 850 1100 TIRISTORE THYRISTOR A 400 1 027 255 Appendix D Bridges Layout SILCOPAC D 256 IMSPD027I APPENDIXE INSTRUCTIONS E 1 EN61800 3 EMC product standard for adjustable speed electrical power drive systems EN 61800 3 2004 Adjustable speed electrical drive systems Part 3 EMC product standard including specific test methods The transition period for the existing EN 61800 3 1996 expires on 1st October 2007 The EN 61800 3 includes the electrical power drive system from the mains connection to the shaft of the motor defines different categories C1 to C4 different environments residential areas industrial areas external ports and internal interfaces It defines assessment criteria for the operational performance in case of interference at the external ports and the internal interfaces according to the environment at the installation site 1 1 INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT Definitions First environ
63. X 400V 3ph 50Hz P X X X SPDM2K5Ux 250 890 LTA _ X jJ X X X X SPDM3KIUx 30 11000 X X X X SPDM3K6Ux 3600 12700 2 X X X X SPDM4KOUx 400 14100 ee D Four quadrants __ 1 E ac __ X j Ezra qn Lo d 1 X X X j j DER __ 2023V1ph X X 1500 50 60Hz X 0 35 n o LX 22599 X XK HILL 0 88 E ILE y e IV 400V 3ph 50Hz 440V 3ph 60Hz 22 400V 3ph 50 2 1 7A V 440V3ph 60Hz For output current greater than 4000A thyristors bridges named RTT are available The RTT are designed with the NOTE same output current and dimensions of the SPDM frames IV and V Paralleling the RTT with equivalent SPDM it is possible to obtain drives with output current up to 8000A See Appendix 6 IMSPDO027I 19 A Technical features SILCOPAC D Notes Two quadrants Four quadrants Vin 1 3x400 V 460 420 510 Vcc 460 Vcc 3x460 V 530 Vcc 480 Vcc 3x500 V 570 Vcc 520 Vcc 1000 Ve A transformer must be used with an other power supply voltage primary delta winding Frequency 45 65 Hz Automatic matching to the frequency value and to the phase cyclic rotation
64. esee ve YS gt Un N 34 Nj 2 gt A IMSPD027I A Technical features SILCOPAC D 35 HS gt A d N Y d 3 DINV 5 v 2 2 MO 5 gt 6 1NO ees V 9 2 z x Ij is x MO A gt Ji q aS y 4 e C ZAG VA d i 6 2 4641 s 2 d GO S 5 gt lt gt d FY Ed c 7 t4 01 os N 1 t
65. 25 field 26 encoder BLOCK 1 speed reference 4 ramp 5 speed feedback 14 reference 16 regulator 31 micro controller PAR DB1 DA1 DA2 DA3 DB3 DB4 DB5 DB6 DB7 DB9 DB2 DB8 PAR CB1 TE1 TE2 CB3 CC1 DB7 CCA CDA Plants DESCRIPTION line voltage avallable atterminals AK1 AK3 AK5 Silcopac D serial number Two quadrant or four quadrant converter Silcopac D current size motor max operating current par C 2 3 armature nominal voltage max motor operating speed motor nominal current motor base speed only for weakened field operation RI drop across the motor current only with the manual adjustment of the current loop motor field nominal current encoder pulse rev ratio if used Converter DESCRIPTION select RIF acceleration time from zero to max speed assign TE1 2 deceleration time from max to zero speed assign TE2 22 select Encod ifan encoder is used default select ifa tacho generator is used field current reference percentage for the field saving function base speed select ON E M F regulator enabled EEPROM write enabled The writing is enabled by default CDA at the end of the parameters setting and the regulators adjustment disable the writing function selecting CDA 2 OFF NOTE itis possible to reset all parameters with the default value using the following procedure close J umper J P19 set parameter CDF ON
66. 260 220 ELC4725M 150 6 280 151 15 gt 30 190 HS D end 350 350 ELC40821101 250 190 115 SPDM450 F 450 30 ELC40821101 250 T 190 115 E SPDM450 F 450 40 9 0 6 130 260 15 21 SPDM600 F 60 48 ELC40821102 9 0 6 930 260 M5 21 SPDM600 F 60 600 ELc4os21107 40 6 30 20 H5 21 SPDM850 F 850 610 ELC40821107 400 30 260 115 21 sm ian m m un SPDMIK6 F 1650 50 100 6 460 300 165 28 SPDM2K1 F 2100 2100 ELc40821105 100 6 50 300 165 34 SPDM2KS F 2500 40 ELC40821105 100 6 50 300 165 34 SPDM3KI F 3100 240 ELCA01105 100 6 1590 300 165 34 SPDM3K1 F 3100 3100 ElC4021006 2500 6 850 385 200 10 SPDM3K6 3600 30 ELc40821106 50 6 50 385 200 10 SPDMAKO F 400 3800 ELc4o821106 2500 6 850 385 200 105 gt RFI filter shall be optimized on the driven motor current 0 821 Mor max where the 0 82 factor take the current ripple into consideration TA 40 C gt With greater operating temperature decrease the rated current by 1 25 per C Table E1 2 DRIVE RFI FILTER 500V 10 50 60Hz 4 Rated current SAP code Rated current Leakage current IF A A NC MN SPF amp
67. After a maintenance procedure the connection from CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4 connectors on P board for 2 quadrant SPDM CN3 and CN4 only and the thyristors gate cathode connectors are not in the proper sequence Restore the proper synchronisms and power connection taking attention to the proper phases sequence Restore the proper connection see Appendix D power circuits layout Failure of the CT load resistors voltage Replace P board If the failure persists replace cr REC the C board 313 3 at Sync Fo Sync Fo ee HWdog gt watchdog protection supervises the proper operation of the digital circuits FAIL HYPOTHESIS CHECKS Sync_L synchronism voltage loss during a Check the supply voltage at the terminal time grater than 100 ms block XM2 synchronism Sync_F synchronism loss due to noise Check if the supply voltage applied to terminal block XM2 synchronism is disturbed On the DRIVE TRACE and on the THYRISTOR TRACE par 1 3 8 and 1 3 9 large firing angle alfa changes can be noted in static current conditions Check that jumper P4 be closed on pins 1 2 par 2 8 If the device is fault the protection occurs as Soon as any parameters IS modified Eeprom device failure or jumper J P4 isn t inserted or this last is inserted pins 2 3 protection intervention selecting the STATUS function par C1 3 1 the display sho
68. Cosol U 0 86 SPDM 2 quadrants typical max 0 78 SPDM 4 quadrants Where Udc Output voltage Uvo No load power suppli voltage Speed static Accuracy with tacho feedback 0 1 AC main voltage 10 with encoder feedback 0 01 load current 0 100 with voltage feedback 2 10 Max current regulator bandwidth 400 rad s Terminals Resolution sign Tacho Dynamo Input XM1 26 10 bit sign 8 bit sign Decrease the nominal current by 1 2 for each C between 40 C and 65 C max Decrease the nominal current by 1 every 100 m between 1000 and 3000 mm Storage temperature 20 0 C Relative humidity without condensate PULSES TRANSFORMER 12V 1A 20 IMSPD027 4 ORDERING INFORMATION 4 1 Identification code The Silcopac D is identifled by the following part number SPDM X X X X X X OPTIONS E enhanced 10 Control back up 24V S accurate speed ratio N10 Frame IV with AL24 internal mounted M spindle 20 Master x RTT con PPRCRC 40 F use trip indicator 50 V with version 2 fan 51 Frame IV CTloose without collector bars 54 Frame IV air outlet on the right side 60 Marine application 61 Frame V marine application AN mounth FL Fuseless ______ POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE G 380 500 V 600 690 V W 750 V M 850 N 950 U 2 quadrant operation R 4 quadrant operation CURRENT nut
69. IMSPD027I 281 APPENDIX E Parallel of Bridges SILCOPAC D Version with trhee current transducers U1 V1 W1 SNUBBER BOARD CN3 P BOARD CT charge resistors PPRCRC PPRCRD BOARD Serial board C J SPDS1 SPDI1 RS485 C J Or PROFIBUS x5 X6 RS232 I O Expansion X1 CONDB BOARD 1 Thermal relay contact P BOARD X10 connector of P board is used to connect the thermal sensor only NC contact 282 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D APPENDIX E Parallel of Bridges Between the control board and the power board P R is placed a board PPRCRC D for connection of three current transducers CT PPRCRD Board Board Y em VE om PPRCRC board PPRCRD IMSPD027 283 APPENDIX E Parallel of Bridges SILCOPAC D 284 1 027 APPENDIX H PARALLEL 12 PULSE Introduction The 12 pulse parallel connection produces the following advantages e Reduction in power converter s effects on the mains supply network reduced harmonics and voltage distorsion e Large output DC currents doubling of the output currents die to parallel connection of two 6 pulse standard power converters to form a 12 pulse circuit e Improved current ripple smaller current ripple higher frequency content smaller torque pulsation Order of H
70. Selection of the operating diameter source Disabling time of the diameter calculation function after the Start command ON enable the mechanical frictions compensation function 0 Constant mechanical frictions compensation value Variable mechanical frictions compensation value Aux Add Term to add to the armature current reference frictions N N N E E E 1 2 3 4 5 6 D 3 4 3 CA Note Since 5 necessary to settension regulator starting diameter material width so to make avallable the analog input Tach terminal 26 we mustuse an encoder as speed transducer 228 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D E Optional functions THE ACCELERATION TIME IS OBTAINED BY THE FOLLOWING FORMULA Jcarico Jt Jmotore Jriduttore l Ma ACCELERATION TORQUE Nm LOAD INERTIA CALCULATION Pap at at a at a a p a p aa a a aa a a a a a a a p a a a aa T Do Do dl 41 4 4 Jn L I yo L II yo L yo Do dl D FULL COIL Jav 1 yl y 4 8 4 8 Jav yl Dm Do L yo Do In our case Supposing sheet working material and iron core we will have Kg J rv 14 44 yo y1 density 7 81 J rp 18344 41 dm ACCELERATION TIME WITH CORE COIL FROM ZERO SPEED TO Nb 1 n 2II Nb 1 ACCELERATION TIME WITH FULL COIL 2 erc mem 17 678 7
71. Silcopac D converter may be equipped with optional boards that are mounted inside the drive on request or sold in kit including the accessories needed to the installation inside the converter and to their customizing A9 1 SPAE 0 Static field rectifier It must be installed inside the converter mounting it on the upper cover by means of the proper accessories as described for the last version of SPAE1 exciter SPAE1A It is connected to the Silcopac D control circuits by a flat cable to X11 connector on P board by which it receives the power supply for its electronics components and to which sends the field current presence signal monitored by the field loss protection Disable the E M F regulator par 2 6 4 section C setting CCA parameter to OFF Set the field loss protection threshold to 50 programming the parameter DC 3 50 Power supply x415V Output voltage lt VAC x0 9 Rated output current Ifyay 10 The field current adjustment must be performed with an external resistor placed in series to the field and according to the following parameters R Q VF where VF field voltage at rated field current P watt 12 9 2 SPAE 1 Semi controlled exciter The SPAE1 exciter is mounted on the Silcopac D fixing it down at the drive top cover using an angle iron that is part of the radiant heat surface At the end of the mounting operations the board 15 in front view It is
72. Time during which the current limits assume with sign the value set by parameter 15250 after the bridge reversing as tenth of milliseconds BR Time of the ramp used by the current limits to go from the value set by CO1 parameter to eee 1 250 their starting value when the time set by CO3 parameter elapses as tenth of ms Group K LOAD CELL REG Note this group includes the parameters for the setting of the tension regulator with load cell Load cell position in respect to the converter CKA LC_F ON OFF OFF the load cell is located before the converter 466 0 ON the load cell is located after the converter Tension regulator insertion mode nis 1 ON OFF ON regulator insertion with zero tension error Mode of calculation of the tension regulator integral gain Fix ON OFF the integral gain is calculated as speed function ON the integral gain 5 fixed and its value is set by TK2parameter CK1 100 Re calibration of the tension regulator output the tension regulator output is divided by the 467B 15255 value set on this parameter Appl NLoop Selection ofthe application mode of the tension regulator with load cell 1688 NLoop Application in correction to the speed regulator ILoop Application in correction to the current regulator saturation of the speed regulator Winder Application in correction to the open loop tension regulator Winder CK3 K Int 20 Sank Re calibration of the integral ga
73. current needed to compensate the mechanical friction at this speed Set parameter according to the following formula lac The term evaluated for the frictions compensation will be summed to the current reference delivered by the speed regulator before the dual slope digital filter In the case of negative speed feedback the mechanical friction compensation gives a negative summing term correction 0 It is possible to display the term evaluated for the mechanical friction compensation by setting one of the parameters 065 066 and 067 with theM Loss value IMSPDO027I 181 D Auxiliary functions SILCOPAC D D4 Torque proof The function is used for the lifting applications The function purpose 15 to reduce or to remove the speed transient that occurs at the brake opening time Before brake opening the motor is controlled by a limited torque torque preset so not to damage the motor brake system and to ensure a quick transient after the brake opening SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Operative current ime Lifting limits 4 Com3 OUTx Open Function description The function is enabled by the parameter ON and digital input COM3 OFF When the system 15 in suppression status STATUS SUPPR the current limits are preset to the range set by parameter The motor at the start will be fed by that current value BRAKE OPENING The brake opening closing command is give
74. formula 2 la 300 DJ8 100 85 7 350 In both cases the parameter that must be modified are the following 350 Current size of the converter DB3 300 New full scale value of the current DB6 100 Motor current in comparison with Example 2 motor overload converter overload The rated current of the motor is lar 700 A and the application needs a current overload of 200 for 5 second every 3 minutes The converter for these application must be able to supply 1400A without overload According to the table of the chapter A3 we select the converter SPDM1K5 rated current of the converter IN 15004 The rated current required is laM 1400 A First solution Load resistors change The table C2 3 shows the CT turns ratio Ns 4000 by the formula 1 it is possible the calculate the load resistors value goo la 1400 this ohmic value can be obtained by connecting in parallel one resistor Ry56 57 8 2 with a second resistor R58 x59 18 Second solution Parameter DJ 8 change Instead off changing the load resistors it is possible to adjust the parameter DJ 8 according the formula 2 100 9 1400 033 1901 la 1500 In both cases parameter that must be modified are the following DA3 1K5 Current size of the converter DB3 1400 New full scale value of the current DB6 50 Motor current in comparison with laM DB6 100 la lay Example
75. gt lt N WDA gt 8 11 gt 1 lt gt 8 N y ue 2527 501vNY 5 2 P lt S S ae a as 1 J J lt AOLT c lt lt lt J 4 u y 2 52 S N NO N J gt 4 iA S HS lt lt gt EN ATA y NZ NO gt ASA SUA y 4 10A gt Va 62 all GJ 65 4 T gt L33HS Ol 49 1 027 SILCOPAC D VNU vu S v 133HS Ol ON q3sn 38 43113 O8 g3ASOJSNVSIO NY Lv dl O4ANSVALOLAV dOMO JOVIIOA 3SVHd V O j A 3190 ALNG 3H q31v10O1v9 Z l noa IN3YNND JHL 903 12 NO Q3NOISN3AIG v MO Li T 27 eR NO OD OO Q3100 C INOX AM 539 3015 1 Technical features D 2 Li L IMSPD027I 50 SILCOPAC D A Technical features 7 7 Field circuit Regulation type Power Inside Outside Voltage Voltage Req
76. 0 conversion coefficient 1 1 conversion coefficient 10 2 conversion coefficient 100 If the parameter reading was successful the P KW part of the message concerning the PPO at master input that is the second word IND will contains the address of the parameter and the third word PWE part will contains the value of the parameter F2 2 Special Commands For the special commands the following commands are coded as e Drive trace parameter request Thyristor Trace parameter request F2 2 1 Drive trace and Thyristor Trace The Traces are structured in records from 0 to 49 for the Drives Trace and from 0 to 15 for the Thyristor trace A generic Drive Trace record is composed by the following fields Field 0 n 4 n 5 n6 n7 n8 n9 n10 n11 n12 Fieldn 13 n 14 n 15 TEE aur Ar Tas is amp Tes Te T Tr To The meanings of the above mentioned field are the follows N amp Status are the record number and the drive status N record number respect to the block instant of the drive record no 0 Status drive status Protections protections status in case they should intervened Logic 1 0 1 0 logic status Auxl Aux2 Aux3 auxiliaries variable contents No speed reference spped feedback lao armature current reference la armature current feedback Ud armature voltage Flu flux Ifo field current reference fie
77. 1 FE 36 A Technical features 37 2200 4000A Four quadrant SILCOPAC D EIC TU WE JSM
78. 10 806400690 2 50 420 26 35 amp cmexs 49 3 H i 9 so s 3 m 40 m With greater operating temperature decrease the rated current by 1 25 per C IMSPDO027I 261 APPENDIX E EMC Standards and applicable Standards SILCOPAC D INSTALLATION SUGGESTIONS MOUNTING PLATE AND PLACEMENT DEVICES The mounting plate must be made from steel with zinc surfaces and without any painting It shall be connected with PE copper bar by several bolts distributed in equal distances along the bar The RFI filter the inputs reactors the fuses the contactors and the drive must be placed on the mounting plate so that the connections can be made as short as possible especially those from the drive via the input reactor to the filter The surface of the components to be mounted to the mounting plate has to be free of coating material Components in the control cabinet noise sources and receivers must be physically separated if necessary through the use of metal partitions or metal enclosures for individual components Contactors relays electromechanical hours counter solenoid valves etc in the cabinet must be provided with quenching elements RC diodes varistors etc This devices must be connected directly at the coil CABLING The cables for digital signals which are longer than 3m and all cables for analogue signals must be screened Each screen must b
79. 10V or 5 mA PWM3 programmable analog output Resolution 8 bits sign Close the load path to terminal 41 Place jumper J 18 on pins 2 3 for a V output 10 full scale Place jumper J P 18 on pins 1 2 mA output 5 mA full scale PWM3 is programmable for motor speed measurement instrument see N monitor description par 2 4 2 section C 0V common terminal of control circuits 10V output 5 mA max Used to supply the reference potentiometer 7 1 2 Terminal blocks XM2 P board Electronic power supply input 380 V three phase voltage 30 VA Note for proper operation of the electronic circuits the voltages applied to terminals U V W must have the same phase correspondence of the voltages applied to power terminals AK1 AK3 AK5 7 1 3 Terminal blocks XM3 blower Single phase Input for blower supply no blower for size see par 3 TECHNICAL DATA notes 2 3 4 and Three phase 7 6 Suggested diagrams 40 IMSPDO027I SILCOPAC D A Technical features A7 2 Ground connections The proper execution of the ground connections allows high immunity to noise and guarantees that 0 V levels be constantly fixed to ground Equipment and cabinet metal parts must be connected Cabinet Carpentry among them and to the ground circuit with good contact 6mm min 6mm min min 6 mm min surfaces to ensure proper high frequency conductivity u C UT Galvanized bottom p
80. CN6 Disabling time of the diameter calculation function after the Start command 218 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D E Optional functions E5 9 Inertia compensation Every time a speed variations is needed the regulator must win the inertia of the load coupled to the motor In all applications with winder or unwinder reel the mass and as consequence the inertia of a winded unwinded coil varies as function of the width of the coil itself the material density and the diameter 5 91 Axial winder For proper calibration of the coil inertia compensation it is needed to set two machine acceleration times the acceleration time can be measured according to the sequence described at par 5 2 1 empty reel acceleration time only the core cylinder without material 2 max reel acceleration time max diameter max coil width max material density When because of practical reasons the machine acceleration time measurement at max reel cannot be made the acceleration time with a convenient coil as near as possible to the max coil can be measured Applying the formula described at par 8 10 3 section E the acceleration time that would be measured in max reel conditions can be calculated Parameters CMA Set to ON to enable the function 1 Set to Var value to enable the calculation of the reel inertia compensation CM2 Set this parameter to select the source of the information related to the material density as percentage of the max val
81. DRIVES Sicopac D Hardware amp Software Manual E r b E LI us L i www answerdnves com SILCOPAC D HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE MANUAL Nov 07 For further information and comment please contact us at www answerdrives com Answer Drives S r l thanks you for choosing a product of the SILCOPAC family and for any useful advice aimed at the improvement of this manual SPDM New FIRMWARE 2 7 Preliminary remarks Today the standard firmware installed in the SPDM is the 2 6 enhanced version with Profibus DP protocol inside the Profibus DP board is delivered as option kit S P P B2 This firmware doesn t support the PC tool program WZSPD than we cannot have PC tool and Profibus DP communication at the same time in one control board The Centronic printers today are not available in the market so it s not possible to print the following data DRIVE TRACE THYRISTOR TRACE CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS To remove the above problems we have developed the new release 2 7 New 2 7 firmware release allows A PC Tooland Profibus DP communication atthe same time B Data print by PC C New functions New functions 1 Emergency ramp It will be possible to define a ramp with settable time on the emergency stop TH3 TacRF TH4 T dcRF 2 Bump less function It s possible to restart a motor runnig with the same reference of the a
82. G DIAGNOSTICS H ANALOG INP OFS N DIGITAL INPUTS 0 DIGITAL OUTPUTS MAGNET CHAR Q PASSWORD 120 IMSPD027 SILCOPAC D C User Interface C1 3 5 Instrument mode This function allows the use of the display as a measurement instrument to display continuously two variables List a shows the variables that can be displayed 1st level SELECT FUNCTION INSTRUMENT MODE 2nd level using buttons U D select the Instrument Mode function press ENTER to access to the 2nd level the display shows two Items of list a A press ENTER if the items are not those wanted 2nd level through buttons U D select an item of list c pressing ENTER the variable 1 is confirmed using buttons U D select another item of list pressing ENTER the variable 2 is confirmed through buttons U D select an item of list b pressing ENTER the displaying mode is confirmed pressing ENTER again the choices made are displayed with the possibility to repeat the selection cycle otherwise return to the 1st level pressing MODE A see par 1 2 7 List a List c Aux1 Ist aux variable Aux1 Aux var 1 ios 2nd aux variable Aux2 Aux var 2 3 3rd aux variable Aux3 Aux 3 No fs speed reference rpm speed ref N fs speed feedback N speed lao 96 f5 armature current reference 40 arm curr ref
83. SPDM600 5 750 SPDM850 SPDM1M0 HILL SPDM1M1 HILL SPDMIK5 IV SPDM1K6 IV SPDMIK7 IV SPDM2K1 IV SPDM2K2 V SPDM2K5 V SPDM3K1 V SPDM3K6 V SPDM4K0 V NOTE RX56 X57 Q W 150 0 5 120 0 5 100 0 5 3910 5 27105 22 0 5 18 0 5 12 1 12 1 10 1 12 1 12 1 10 1 15 1 12 1 8211 8211 6 8 2 47 2 6 8 2 10 2 8212 3912 3912 RX58 X59 Q W 1200 0 5 150 0 5 100 0 5 560 0 5 330 0 5 220 0 5 100 0 5 220 0 5 3310 5 39 0 5 15 0 5 100 0 5 150 0 5 18 0 5 18 0 5 15 0 5 12 0 5 15 0 5 18 0 5 39 0 5 10 2 8 2 2 39 0 5 18 0 5 Ns 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 6400 6400 6400 6400 6400 The recalibration of the maximum armature current normally executed by replacing R X56 X57 Rx58 x59 with other of different values Shall be now executed also by software through the parameter DJ 8 the resistors replacement in this case is not needed The following block diagram shows the DJ 8 parameter effect IMSPD027 135 C Setting up SILCOPAC D The parameter value 15 048 100 56 57 R s8 x59 Current regulator Current Thyristors reference io firing Bridge reversing N B As in the case of recalibrating the laM by replacing the CT load resistors when you make the recalibration of the armature current by
84. Warning intervention disabled intervention enabled as alarm intervention enabled as protection intervention enabled as both protection and alarm only status 3 is allowable for intervention 0 1 2 3 10 status 2 and status 4 are not allowable for interventions 4 5 11 12 14 using U D buttons selectthe Protes amp Alarms function press ENTER to access to the 2nd level using U D buttons select in sequence the item of list a to examine in b a status of list b is reported ifin D ALARM ON is displayed itis possible to execute the reset pressing ENTER the display shows press ENTER to resetthe alarm the Reset occurs only if the alarm origin was removed in this case the display shows press MODE to return to the 2nd level List a List b loss ALARM_ON Ext P external protection PROTE ON max Instantaneous current OFF WDog watchdog intervention DISABLED Ud F max armature voltage If F motor field loss TachF tacho generator loss Fan F blowing loss MotOh motor over temperature ConOh converter over temperature Ser F serial communication loss NMax max motor speed UvOut line voltage beyond tolerance Stale motor stale Leg F failure IMSPD027 1st level SELECT FUNCTION PROTES amp ALARMS U D 2nd level PROTES amp ALARMS a a ALARM ON RESET ALARM E PROTES amp ALARMS a OFF active alarm active prote
85. be obtained too with practice method showed at paragraph 5 of this section IMSPD027I 229 E Optional functions SILCOPAC D AXIAL WINDER LINEAR SPEED REGULATION Program function is enabled closing COM3 XM1 19 terminjal Start equipment preparing and or tail end of the material winding COM3 must be opened C 1 1 e The starting diameter is acquired at the rising edge of COM2 CB2 AuxAdd TENSION E TG Speed Regulator Linear speed Enable Reference 230 IMSPD027I LL L OIL3NOVN O Xni 901911534 APPENDIX A 0195 2 39343 34 IN3NMhO PT on SLAN 1 345009 j34 i 3 34 SLAN 033 420 OlJxny 180493 195 791903 VLIOOT3A 5
86. reset the control the control goes to TEST EEPROM FAILED status 5 when the 7 segment led on board side goes off and terminal SP DI1 SP DI2 goes on reset the control the control goes to TEST ENTER PAR DAI status actually the DA1 parameter has the value 0 by default set with the series number on the label reset the control the control is now ready to be reset insert the parameters related to factory pre calibrations as shown in the parameter printouts enclosed with the control the parameters bearing an asterisk have a different value than the default ones 142 5 027 SILCOPAC D C Setting up C2 7 Field current adjustment The first step of the set up procedure is the tuning of the transducers that are the measurement instruments used by the converter by means of which the electrical variables to be controlled can be read Only the proper adjustment of the mains voltage of the armature voltage and of the tacho generator if used transducers assures the best performance of the SPDM Before beginning the adjustments verify that the parameter CD2 is on 96 The reading of variables as the field current feedback the armature voltage the speed feedback and the reading of the signals for the reference speed current etc are made by means of the analog inputs terminal XM1 26 28 29 30 32 33 34 see jumper J P25 too C2 7 1 Offset self tuning To acquire an accurate reading of the signals applied to t
87. u 171 L oae 171 A UN 171 3 3 Jntennatfuses Ch m UP OR UP eH Nr OR aeu te eroe OE ER qaqa 175 A4 BIO WEF FED u uu ena 176 45 gt XU uis deed mer 176 D AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS pL Q o 179 DI Hepper 179 PED UOI 180 Mechanical compen atO FL orci Hc 181 DX Tro Te nT ren AES RUD 182 DS um 183 DG Speed TECADACK SWITCHING ____________________ _ ___________ 184 MORBIS IG erento apes 185 0067 DD uu 186 D9 Changeable u u UN 187 188 190 D12 cee 190 DIF COMMS Speed TSUDA CK e tuae ea pele aan 191 DIS Dig a DAP kis
88. unscrew and remove the bolts to take out the stack groups a T bolts pee bolts Ifon the stack to remove is placed the thermostat disconnect the two connecting cables Atthis point the stack groups can be removed frontally making them slide on their proper slide bars Bench work unscrew alternatively the two closure clamp screws and replace the thyristor disk cell take attention to the two small centring pivots located between the cell and the heat sink Remove the grease and the dirty on the touching surface apply on the heat sink new layer of conductive grease EJ C2 or similar types and place the cell on the heat sink itself by the two small centring pivots Close the clamp screwing alternatively the two screw up to the unlock of the control ring located into the central adjustment dynamometer spring bolt Allow to the ring a free but clutched rotation Tongue Reinstall the stacks Tighten all opposite fastening bolts couple of the stacks to the AC power bars section C Tighten all stacks fastening bolts to the fuses Connectall pulses cables to the proper terminals section Install the closure front panels C4 3 Internal fuses replacement Sizes IlIL and IV only have internal fuses located on the Graetz bridge arms For sizes and remove the upper cover to have access to the fuses unscrew the fastening screws and replace the fuses For siz
89. 1 19 Com3 command cannot therefore be used to perform other functions and DN3 parameter must be set to OFF E5 4 1 Setting 1 When Com3 command Is not active the system is speed regulated and the summing term of the speed reference is disabled When Com3 command Is active the system is speed regulated and the regulator output is summed to the speed reference correction E5 4 2 Settings 2 3 4 5 and 6 When Com3 command 5 not active the system is speed regulated the current limits take the values set by and TA4 parameters no term is Summed to the speed reference When Com3 command Is active the tension regulator is enabled one of the current limits is controlled by the tension regulator output the other limit take the value set by the proper TA3 or TA4 parameter the speed regulator is saturated enabling a term summed to the speed reference the summing term value is set by CE1 parameter E5 5 Position of the tension transducer Parameter CKA defines the load cell position in respect to the motorized cylinder as function of the line speed direction Line speed CKA OFF the load cell is located before the converter increasing the tension the tension regulator output decreases to reduce the speed the torque Load cell before converter CKA ON 2 Line speed the load cell is located after the converter increasing the tension the tension regulator outputincreases to increase the speed or the tor
90. 2 0 Jed 3 ma j A 5 6X 9 L 19 ZA C 9 ay 13 val lt s 5 7 3 5 i H 7 3 C Cal ZNA jee gt gt c LGX 2 s Z e 2 7 GX X SX 39 Z ZNO S E o e M e gt SI SX N 5 5 AZUL a S VN I L e 6SX en a A gt IC v NO 5 gt QMvO8 6 K gt JMVOH 3981 5 99 x NJS e gt 08 4386048 6091 x 9000073011 5 10 YINYOJISNYHLOLNY 6 lt ON J lt x A A FOVLION 3 9 7 e 7M 9 4 lt NOlLdldoOS40 FRAME 160A 600A Four quadrant 33 IMSPD0271 A Technical features SILCOPAC D FRAME 750A 850A 1100A SPDM1K1 Four quadrant A z lt l7 a a p D R FIE FI lt 245 O V v4 X S K FIELD 14M
91. 30 diagnostics DGA DGB DG1 DG2 DG3 DG4 DG5 066 067 31 micro controller CDA 0 4 18 alams DD 00600 9 4 152 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D C Setting up C2 14 Location of C board jumpers JP3 JP50 s JP6 JP5 5E 5 JP28 N 14 JP4 JP15 JP16 JP17 JP22 JP19 JP21 JP20 JP1 JP12 JP25 JP11 nce JP9 JP27 JP18 DL1DL2 013 PR2 JP23 i 22 JP13 XM1 RED ON WHEN THE MOTOR IS RUNNING DL2 RED ON WHEN THE CONVERTER IS READY DL3 GREEN ON WHEN THE BORADS ARE SUPPLIED reserved Open JP2 reserved Open Inserted on the pins 1 2 to enable the serial communication 5 232 the optional card SPDS when it 5 present must be removed Inserted on the pins 2 3 to enable the serial communication RS 485 the optional card SPDS when it is not present must be installed 4 Inserted the pins 1 2 to allow the writing memory Inserted on the pins 2 3 to prevent the writing on EEP ROM memory JP5 reserved Op
92. 85 4 SEDENT 1100 1 420 100 n SPDMQU v 56 58 SPDM2K5Ux 50 85 59 s _ a ____ 58 168 SPDMX6UX v 50 8750 ____ SPDMKUx ____ 50 J 85 SC Four quadrants EE SPDMO30Rx I 20 168 5 _ PDM110Rx SPDM260Rx mn 230 4200 200 25 __ w _ 230 570 262 eoma x j a 230 SPONSOR 8s 8 SPDMIMUIMIRX WLL 2 85 3 58 SPDM1K6Rx SPDMIK7Rx SPDM2KIRx 1100 212 1100 212 1100 212 a dm um SPDM2K2Rx p60 875 300 Lm _ 18 IMSPDO027I A3 TECHNICAL DATA Silcopac D Power supply j Cuet G H K W M Two quadrants X __ X SPDM110Ux_ E ILE y e Es 160 200 500 630 230V M SPDM350Ux 350 1100 0 3A X X SPDMAS0Ux X X cnma 500 1500 50 60Hz X E __600 180 0 35 L X aux ge p n d X Jj X Somo xXx x S PDMIMID WILL 0 88A __ _ IV 400V 3ph 50Hz X X X X SPDM1K6Ux 160 5900 440V3ph60Hz X SPDMIK7Ux 1700 600 22 SPDM2K1Ux 200 2
93. 990 0913 35 8101 331 V gv EN QVLIOA NIVW 303 09708 ONIHIJ ANY ATdanS NIVW ONIH ONY V SAN AY 45 8 35706 gt lt Y 195 4d i Q8 v Od V 28 A Technical features SILCOPAC D on ANY Aldd As FRAME 1000A 1100A SPDM1M0 1M1 Two quadrant AN xU FN NOIL 29 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D DE 54504 NO x v ZX Qu n VIX 9 CN CH 2 G Y Y 7 2 u gt v 0016 0094 4 15 EE y GEN V 815 d NON tA al e Q e H 9 9 E sv J zv ON N A O LM L CS C CM 25 L LM N e HS _ N 2 ui RC esf 00
94. A H3ANOO lt UE E M 9 O O 1 m NOILV 141835 91 0 9 1 K b Ee 10038 IL Ree 1934 N 3 4 i MAD SA x ej 1 348 J Uh AN gt Mda 43385 1921901 SA O ACT A E ul E A 3 MA Py JN c ASS ANS LVLS SIN Gld Q CINY A C I z i Y 3 iN iN 7 Ad 7 A CNN C V N 31 n LAV SA ECC O O O C O T 5 pos Iw V m d 414 5 LOA Z L gt PEE NE uD OC lt 7 2 E ES N c X N v lt lt 1 7 3 2 2 A zoo mA m D c 8754 ce CS 4 86 m p E 7y 5 S S S NO yoo 9c q 2 T T D dj es s illi HS NU f OL Cv LJ A lt D I 5 4 gt m W gt EN LV 4 U D 2 2 EE PN 2 1 N ele j A e l N 14 O A e e e 47 IMSPDO027I SILCOPAC D A Technical features
95. AccT1 Density Width TENSION To TAPER REF C LOAD CELL REG T LOAD CELL FEEDBACK Blocks description SPEED REG Speed regulator it is saturated by a term summed to the speed reference NoR ic OMEGA CALC The angular speed reference is calculated from the line speed as function of the calculated acquired diameter CURRENT REG Armature current regulator CURRENT FEEDBACK Armature current feedback la TAPER Used when in the winder unwinder applications the tension reference To has to be re calibrated as function of the coil diameter the re calibration can be linear or hyperbolic type When the function is disabled the tension reference is directly passed to the comparison node DIAMETER CALC The diameter is calculated as line speed angular speed ratio or it is acquired as analog signal provided by a proper external transducer TENSION REF It evaluates the term related to the tension reference INERTIA COMP It evaluates the term related to the inertia compensation that is function of speed variation diameter machine acceleration times material density and tape width MECHANIC LOSS It evaluates the term related to the mechanical loss compensation a constant term and a speed related term LOAD CELL Transducer of the tension feedback T e g load cell or dandy roll The value is acquired as analog signal LOAD CELL REG Tension regulator it receives the tension er
96. ContD 5 0 CA3 CA7 CBC CBG CB3 CB7 CCC 4 CDC CD9 CEC CE2 CE6 CFC CF1 CF5 CGC CG4 CHC laoAd Off NMDel 0 Int 0 Off TacFUd Off CBH N Se Encod ErNLm 10 FldO P LXnn 100 0 Diesel 0ff CD5 Nz 010 5 0 Step Off S Thr 10 0 N Thr 10 0 0ff 10 0 Tf D 0 PosFbk Off P refB 0 H OpC Off CA4 laoWo InThr CBD Rmp B Wo Ref CB4 Mtime CB8 Enc CC1 Fecon CDD EncAbs CD6 N MxV CED Mloss CE3 LossK CE7 K Gn CFD FTR CF2 TP T CF6 LW Tm CG1 POS CGS P CHD PwC CS On Off 10 0 100 0 t 100 0 Off t 100 0 Off t 10 0 Off 100 50 100 Off 241 Appendix C Configuration Parameters 2 CJ6 CKA CK2 CL5 CMA CM4 CM8 CN1 CN5 COA 242 CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS J TENSION REG T_En 0ff Sel Serial TapTy Lin K LOAD CELL REG Off Appl L WINDER REG Type Axial ToRic 100 0 N INERTIA COMP Enable Off Dens 100 0 AccT2 100 0 N DIAMETER CALC D Min 100 Wtime 600 O BACKLASH COMP Enable 0ff CJB 7 CL2 95 CN2 CN6 01 En ToNOS TapDo TErr 0 K_Int W Fit Type Width dimS DiamS B Val 0ff ToNOOf 10 0 Off 20 0 20 Const 100 0 P Off 1 0 Taper 4 ToRef 8 Tap V CKC Gi Fix Sel 2
97. FR I BOARD FI60A 380V 500V 1000000455 BOARD FI60B 380V 500V ELC262347 BOARD FI75A 600V 750V 1000000456 FR II IILL BOARD 75 600V 750V ELC28510601 SNUBBER T IV 690V ELC22110401 RESISTOR 33 ohm ELC 20545904 CAPACITOR luF 1200V ELC206308 220V 50 60HZ 0 1 220 A114 Options Type Description PDIO Digitals Expansion Keypad PDI2 Keypad Without Cables PDS1 Serial Link RS485 PPB Profibus Board PPRCRA Parallel Bridge Board PPRCRB Parallel Bridge Board AL24 External Power Supply SPAEO 10A Internal Field Bridge SPAE1 10 Internal Field Regulator ATRS22 ELC206698 Synchronism Autotransformer ATRS50 ELC204699 It is offered the fan without the holder See page 17 IMSPD027 89 A Technical features SILCOPAC D A11 5 U F fuses External Fuses Mains Fuses ELC 20653301 ELC 20653301 FII III III sas ELC20653301 Ee ELC20653302 ELC20653303 ELC20653303 ELC20653303 ELC20653304 ELC 20653306 bean ELC20653306 III III III Issa ELC20653306 ELC21242801 ELC21242802
98. SILCOPAC D APPENDIX F Twelve Pulse CALCULATION OF THE INTER PHASE REACTORS DODECAPHASE DRIVE 142 lg Ip la la ti Ven V eff effective value of the line voltage 12 effective value of the twelveth harmonic of the current la leff effective value ofthe line current Vg effective value of the sixth harmonic of the rectified voltage mot armature current of the motor Xt Shortcircuit reactance first secondary side la current of a converter Imot 2 Xp Shortcircuit reactance second secondary side 16 effective value of the sixth harmonic of the current la _ _ Normali 100 ae 1g Circuit equivalent to the effects of the harmonics The circuit sourrounded by the short dashes line drawn in a simpler way on the right is to be taken into account in order to calculate the inter phase reactors IE 2 AT CT The 12th harmonic is neglected The reactor Xf must limit the sixth harmonic current Ig D 2 la Vg 0 24 Vdo 0 24 3 2 M where Xt is the total reactance at the line frequency lg EX 55 Bl From the previous relations the following formula is obtained y _ 0 24 i2 vef _ ef 2 p p 2 mot 2 Total reactance at line frequency X 2 gt X 2X From 1 and 2 the following formula is obtained X 0 54 pd 100 Lus Inductance of the
99. TP6 8 IMSPD027I Synchronizing signal Synchronizing signal m dd Vuv p T power supply period ms Signal proportional to the armature voltage not filtered Varm 100 24 E V 5 V 15 V 15 V 0 V 155 C Setting up SILCOPAC D TP9 10 TRII TP12 TP13 TP14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 TP22 TP23 TP24 TP25 26 27 156 Disabling EEP ROM writing at power up See parameter CDA and jumper 5 Enable writing Disable writing Signal U1 of the encoder 24 V square wave Signal U3 of the encoder 24 V pulse Signal U2 of the encoder 24 V square wave 0 V encoder isolated from TP 8 Pulses for V1 thyristor switching on Forward Reverse 1 6 P gt pulses 20us 40 us OFF 15V NEM 1 ms T2power supply period ms lt 0 V serial isolated 5 V serial isolated Signal proportional to the armature current on load resistors R 193 R194 of CT Y Y Y Y Y Y Y T power supply current ms Analog input If terminals XM1 28 31 10V Analog input Ean1 terminal XM 1 29 10V Analog input Ean2 terminal XM 1 30 10V Signal proportional to the armature voltage filtered 10V See terminal XM 1 32 external voltage transducer Analog input Rif terminals XM1 33 34 10V 5 ynchronism composition lt gt Analog output PWM1 term
100. The serial failure protection cannot be disabled If the serial link is interrupted the Profibus interface board detects the lack of query from the master and informs about the event through the Ram Dual Portin the SPDM drive The drive makes the protection intervene and checks if the logic commands have been enabled from Profibus to be in and with the physical commands on the terminals parameter DEB 5 ON 1 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 in this case it checks whether the parameter DEC S_ComD is ON and only in this case disables the logic commands coming from Profibus by setting automatically the DEB S_Com OFF This allows to use the emergency manual commands without being in and with those coming from the Profibus 4 2 Drive off If a drive is off the Profibus interface board which is supplied by the drive since it s interfaced by means of a drive connector is off too In this situation the Profibus Master detects the slaves which are not communicating and performs the diagnostic according to the DIN 19245 standard part 3 which contain the information about the type and which slaves are not working properly 24 3 Profibus board broken The SPDM drive always controls the exchange activities with the Dual Port Ram the end of these activities it issues a serial failure event and behaves as required F5 Changes on this release The modifications of this release will be reported to the next SPDM drive without profib
101. U6 component there is a label with a printed code verify that the code of the EPROM installed on the new spare board and the code of the EPROM installed on the faulty board are equal If the two codes are not equal then lift and pull the EPROM of the two boards out using the same previous cautions reinstall then the EPROM pulled out from the faulty board on the new spare board pay attention to damage the component pins and check that they are completely inserted into their slots Check that the jumper configuration of the spare board is equal to that of the faulty board otherwise customize correctly the spare board Reinstall the new C board and insert the proper connectors Reinstall if present the SPDS1 and SPDI1 options and insert the proper connectors Reinstall the closure front panel Reinstall the components pulled out from the new board on the bad board and send it to Ansaldo for repairing tis necessary to repeatthe sequence described atthe par 2 4 1 to calibrate the la Monitor Itis also necessary to repeat the offset self tuning on analogic inputs as described at par 2 4 3 176 IMSPDO27I SILCOPAC D C Maintenance O RS485 expansion support turrets e 2 EPROM uC e C X9 X8 DLI PR2 OOO
102. associated to the following digital inputs COMB terminals XM1 19 22 connector X1 13 SPDIO COM7 connector 1 14 SP DIO Jor ner ON acive ow nput OFF acive nigh ipu cms fore _ on comas forr Resenes uses erabe Ist set to 2nd set parameters change Jom forr Reena ma coms fore xii Group O DIGITAL OUTPUTS 6 digital programmable outputs are available 2 open collector on the control board and 6 relay outputs on the SPDIO optional board 00 3 6 91011 OUT4XM6 121314 00 5 6 151617 OUT6XM 6 181920 2 fixed E are also available DRIVE OK No minimum speed AAAA Ae e e 6 6 A AA OUTI terminals XM 1 24 connector X1 1 SPDIO Note This group includes the parameters associated to the terminals XM1 25 connector X1 2 SPDIO are digital outputs connector 1 3 SPDIO connector X1 4 5 010 ow or per pum ON active low output 108 IMSPD027 SILCOPAC D B List of parameters Code Name Default Values Description 00 1 digital output 0UT2 digital output 0UT3 digital output Outs se 00 4 digital output 005 085 OUT5 di
103. each new diameter value will be compared to the last previously acquired calculated value and if greater it will be ignored IMSPDO027I 217 E Optional functions SILCOPAC D Minimum speed When the diameter is calculated par CN6 Calc the machine is needed to be running at a minimum speed so that a reliable calculation can be made The minimum angular speed before which the diameter will not be calculated the last valid value is active must be set by CN4 parameter Commands The application of filters diameter ramp and increasing decreasing sequence may cause some errors on the diameter information this may occur e g when in a winder application arrived at the max diameter the coil is replaced and the working cycle restarts from a diameter lower than the last calculated acquired one erroneous information due to the increasing sequence another case is when in a winder application having set the min diameter the working cycle restarts from a greater diameter erroneous information due to the diameter ramp 1 and Com2 logic commands allow to acquire or to set bypassing the filters the proper diameter value starting from which the application of the filters themselves assure a coherent data value Com1 command At the rising edge of Com1 command terminal XM1 17 transition from inactive to active command if the angular speed of the winder is lower than 2096 the acquired calculated diameter in that moment become t
104. motor field loss tacho loss blowing loss 8 motor thermal protection converter thermal protection 0 serial communication failure 1 motor max speed 2 3 line beyond tolerance motor stall leg failure Every protection is described on the paragraph 1 3 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 8 9 1 1 1 1 14 Z Z Z Z Z g g CZ gt CO MJ m nd IMSPD027I 111 C User Interface SILCOPAC D SUPPRESSION pulse suppression condition of the converter every test good no active flashing protection The digit alternating to the letter is the hexadecimal code of the stop origin I terminal XM1 19 disabled H 0 terminal XM1 13 disabled 1 stop by the serial comm port 2 stop by an optional function 3 stop by the internal P L C H 4 converter zero speed regulation FORWARD SPEED converter in forward speed regulation REVERSE SPEED converter reverse speed regulation When the supply is removed from the converter voluntarily or by a line loss the first occurred protection is stored When the supply is restored the system verifies if any protections are stored in this case the converter goes in protection conditions displaying the stored protection Pressin
105. 10096 Mode par C1 3 5 doesn t reach 100 of its full scale device If the failure persists replace C board value The converter is in current converter in current limit status is shown by the Status Check the proper setting of the current limits limit conditions function par C1 3 1 near to the item of list a the Check for the proper setting by CA2 message is shown See also the Drive Parameters of parameter of the current limits origin group O DIGITAL OUTPUT Decrease if possible the motor over load The excitation current is The field current value If read through the Instrument Check and if fault replace the exciter higher than the motor plate Mode par C 1 3 5 is higher than its reference Ifo Execute the SPAE1 exciter customizing par value butthe conditions for C2 5 Execute the field current tuning par the If F protection 2 9 intervention don t occur The supply voltage is too low Check the supply voltage atthe power bars Restore the supply line IMSPDO027I 167 C Troubles shooting SILCOPAC D FAIL HYPOTHESIS CHECKS ACTIONS Under excited motor butthe The field current value If read through the Instrument Check and if fault replace the exciter conditions for the If F Mode function par C1 3 5 is lower than its reference Execute the SPAE1 exciter customizing par protection intervention don t C2 5 Execute the field current adjustment occur par C2
106. 13 4351521 5 204 23 a 254 350 1 c rz gt qe gt KM aS A T 2 INSTALLATION SUPPORIS ON K 2 M2 U od RS 48 M ZR 1 027 13 A Technical features SILCOPAC D WILL SPDMTMO LAE CRAN 288 EP AIR OUTLET s i 2 22 7 Z 2 p 2 c 7 2 Z Z NS 2 7 M6 SCREWS Y CN b lt 7 lt l q F F F F N Fuses Ql HEATSINK LO LO LO F F 2 LS w 2 A A LO EN Al 55 L A 4 HIN 25485 S 65232 SERIA JY g AKT e 2 b 2 A M 1 E 44 AK5 2 7 3 n lt ANI K V 5 e 1 i e KM S 2 Es n qun VI e AK pn Si i 7 R j x j t Z 222 gt VPLS LAD LE M6 SCREWS lt 5 u c T
107. 15 V held supply voltage test point 24 V supply voltage test point 24 V filtered supply voltage test point IMSPD027 157 C Setting up C Board SILCOPAC D Terminals and Parameters All the analog outputs excluded the output of the la monitor see paragraph C2 4 1 are programmable and their resolution is 8 bit sign Analog output PWM1 SELECTOR OFFSET Analog output PWM2 SELECTOR OFFSET N x See ee LOC RC EE d CE 3 Analog output PWM3 SELECTOR OFFSET 158 ABS TP24 JPar GAIN 000 125 pui PPS gt 1 37 100 15000 125 1 38 5 25 123 GAIN 125 DM8 1 39 100 15000 tere XM1 38 ABS TP26 uis DMC 123 GAIN 000 125 DM9 1 40 100 15000 125 1 41 I IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D C Setting up 2 17 Speed self tuning complements Speed Self tuning has been developed to correctly set the speed regulator in most cases However in some applications it can give incorrect results the cause is always due to mechanical problems gears oscillations backlashes Standard Speed Self tuning procedure calculates Speed Regulator gains and the double pole filter bandwidth between the speed and the Current regulators measuring experimentally the machine acceleration time The acceleration time is the time in seconds that is necessary to the machine to sta
108. 180 180 248 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D V W P 2 2 gt gt lt 2 he Gl S at 2 a C y I 77 Y N KON er V 1 ZL AK1 LE IMSPD027 Appendix D Bridges Layout O J 4 i 77 WE Y gt c 500 2101250 249 SILCOPAC D Appendix Bridges Layout 10 9 ES IMSPD027I 250 SILCOPAC D v y 2 4R 197 VW 84 gt gt T D N S 1 gt 1 2 gt gt 22 CN 1 gt Appendix D Bridges Layout T 1 0 gt gt SR 2 ve Qu 4 gt y gt Y vw gt
109. 2 parameter allows the control software to bear wider variations of the converter power supply voltage periods Disable of the function substitution of the Start command IntRfl or IntRf2 command Tm IR12Ds OFF ON OFF OFF IntRfl and IntRf2 command terminals XM1 15 and 16 substitutes the Start command enabling the converter ON IntRf1 and IntRf2 terminals 1 16 and 16 doesn t substitutes the Start command and when they are activate the converter isn t enabled Parameters programming with default values CDF ON OFF To enable the parameters re programming function with default values close jumper J P19 346 5 program the CDF param with the value ON and reset the drive The converter goes in T 5 status the 7 segm led on board shows the Test status when the 7 segm led on board is turned off and the 7 segm led on SPDIT SPDI2 terminal begins to light reset another time the drive the converter goes in T 4 status program the DA1 parameter with the drive serial number see the drive label and reset another time the drive is now ready for a new programming 96 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D B List of parameters Code Name Default Values Description CDl Runn Run 1 3478 un 1 Start input Run Enabling the input the motor will start the command gives the set speed reference and SPDM R enables the pulses to the converter and the digital regulation Disabling the input the motor will stop with line recovery br
110. 20 ic 35 2 09 06 Qe 516 99 2 Y v U o A0 O gt gt gt 9 9 oo piv Lv 4 3LON 335 deer LM 19 Co CM CM 19 q 2 zH09 0G n v 3 Us e lt 4315 N y gt 05 M arate IIA NIG V 3 TIOMLNOOO8OIN NISL V 3l 9 723 LJ 6x gx ZHL 1HI 79 a i ZINX 19 6 ENO M 5 2 7 2 39 J OLEND I E 09X L LV 5 x S lt lt 9 Wunde y 6 9 GHI Cd 4 LA 5 9 0 G 7 ry d N p gt lt m m 21 A T lt 91 VA AA YN L 2100A Two quadrant g LM ES 69 ZY 69 LO LA L NO TES gt gt lt Ce 2 C 1 N N gt 4 2 7 C 2 C s N J lt 6 5 dy gt L 66 c H e lt lt N i lt 5 E 3 C y 5 iX 96X N eN LZ 4 amp
111. 20V lt Vt lt Rin 8 70V lt lt Rin 139KO 132V lt Vt lt Rin 251KQ Enter through U I the max speed value see parameter 085 IMSPD0271 39 A Technical features SILCOPAC D Terminal 27 OV control common terminal 28 10V If analog input Rin 50 Resolution 9 bits sign It is used as input of the motor excitation current when external exciter is used Place jumper 25 on pins 1 2 If the internal exciter SPAE1 5 used terminal 28 should be disconnected and jumper 25 should be placed on pins 2 3 so the internal circuit is used to measure the motor excitation current 10V Ean 1 programmable analog input Rin 50 K Resolution 9 bits sign 10V Ean 2 programmable analog input Rin 50 K Resolution 9 bits sign common terminal of control circuits 10 Varm analog input Rin 250 KO Resolution 9 bits sign reserved to the armature voltage signal provided by external transducer ichiede place jumper 7 on pins 1 2 Normally the signal is provided by internal high impedance transducer in this case insert jumper 7 between pins 2 3 Terminal 32 should be disconnected Also insert the jumper according to the nominal armature voltage jumper 15 if 160V lt Va 300V 16 300V lt Va lt 570 17 570V lt Va 900V Enter through U I the nominal voltage value 10V RIF programmable differential analog input differential Rin 100 Resolution 10 bits sign If the input signal
112. 3 motor overload converter overload The rated current la of the motor is lar 700 A and the application needs a duty cycle according the following diagram of figure C2 3 5 second with a current overload of 150 and than 1minut with a current load of 3004 The suitable SPDM for this application must be able to supply the maximum current requested by the duty cycle laM 1050 A According to the table of the chapter we select the converter SP DM850 rated current of the converter IN 850A The selection must verified according the overload curve of the converter see chapter Figure C2 3 Duty cycle IMSPD027 137 C Setting up SILCOPAC D 2 2 0 35 Ip 2 Age t I HI UM 2 SsssSsEEsEESESESEESE 18 NN 1114111 INI i I I gw c 1 5 S HEH var 22111111 1 Z0 2345678 9 1 0 08 Tp Ts According to the overload diagram and to the duty cycle of figure C2 3 the converter SPDM850 can supply a maximum current Ip 1 45 IN 1 5 850 1275 A This current value is greater than the maximum current of the duty cycle of figure C2 3 1050 A so the
113. 32 6 31 8 32 6 31 6 la 1 7 1 7 17 17 7 1 7 1 7 T1 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 6 18 17 1 7 13 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 T4 1 7 T0 t 0 0 t 0 0 t 0 0 t 0 0 t 0 0 t 0 0 t 0 0 t 0 0 t 0 0 t 0 0 t 0 0 t 0 0 t 0 0 t 0 0 t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RECORDING TIME Ud Flu 33 7 100 0 33 7 100 0 33 7 100 0 33 7 100 0 33 7 100 0 33 7 100 0 33 7 100 0 33 7 100 0 33 7 100 0 33 7 100 0 33 7 100 0 33 7 100 0 33 7 100 0 33 7 100 0 33 7 100 0 33 7 100 0 33 7 100 0 33 7 100 0 33 7 100 0 33 7 100 0 33 7 100 0 33 7 100 0 33 7 100 0 33 7 100 0 33 7 100 0 33 4 100 0 33 4 100 0 33 1 100 0 33 4 100 0 33 1 100 0 33 1 100 0 33 1 100 0 32 9 100 0 32 9 100 0 32 9 100 0 32 6 100 0 32 6 100 0 32 6 100 0 32 6 100 0 32 4 100 0 32 4 100 0 32 1 100 0 32 1 100 0 32 1 100 0 32 1 100 0 31 8 100 0 31 8 100 0 31 6 100 0 31 6 100 0 31 6 100 0 Ifo If 100 0 115 8 100 0 115 9 100 0 115 9 100 0 115 9 100 0 115 9 100 0 115 9 100 0 115 9 100 0 115 9 100 0 115 9 100 0 115 9 100 0 115 9 100 0 115 9 100 0 115 9 100 0 115 9 100 0 115 9 100 0 115 8 100 0 115 8 100 0 115 8 100 0 115 8 1
114. 33 34 The COM3 Reference speed reference sign depends on the status acquired in zero speed 0 conditions of the logic input COM3 as in the following table 1 dif From the differential analog Rif input terminals 1 1 Reference 33 34 The sign of the speed referencedependson 00000 0 the status ofthe logic inputs and COM2 asin 0 10 7 ihe following table ee ER S MPoRif Reference exchange by logic input COM4 OFF from motopotentiometer 4 ON from analog input Rif Reference exchange by logic input COM4 OFF from serial link ON from analog input Rif Selection of an additional term origin term to be added to the speed reference 2 NoAdd Off j 2908 Off ____ Disabled selection EN From Ean2 analog input with sign If terminal XM1 19 is disabled the additional term is not added If terminal 1 19 is enabled from Ean2 analog input with sign Form 6 param 1st set or from TD6 param 2nd set the switching between 1st and 2nd set occurs enabling terminal XM1 19 if param DN3 otherwise the 1st set is always enabled IntR ef From TC7 param 1st set or from TD6 param 2nd set enabling the INTRF1 input terminal XM 1 15 From TC8 param 1st set or from TD8 param 2nd set enabling the INTRF2 input terminal XM 1 16 The switching betw
115. 8 P oor ventilation Check the proper direction of the motor Check ifthe Restore the proper ventilation ventilation intakes aren t obstructed Too warm ambient f Restore the ambient Improper commutation ee TE the wear status of the motor brushes and if needed replace ROES 5 Converter in current limit The converter in current limit status is shown by the Check the proper setting of the current limits conditions Status function par 1 3 1 near to the items oflist a Check for the pro per setting by the message is shown See also the Drive Parameters parameter of the current limits origin of group O DIGITAL OUTPUT Decrease if possible the motor over load Tuning of current and speed Do the current and speed regulator tuning regulator according par C 2 10 FAIL HYPOTHESIS CHECKS ACTIONS Poor mechanical coupling from Check the coupling and the alignment Restore the proper coupling the motor to the Encoder or to the Tacho generator Wear of the tacho e the tacho generator brushes e Speed loop instability A s increase could have Un aumento del carico Restore the proper load conditions or execute an potrebbe aver portato il regolatore in una zona di automatic adjustment of the speed loop through the SPEED SELFTUNING function par 2 10 2 FAIL FALLHYPOTHESS ______ ACHONNS Load eccentricity At constant s
116. BY DATA DATE IMSPD027I 7 A Technical features SILCOPAC D 8 IMSPD027I A2 MOUNTING 2 1 Outline dimensions mounting safety clearance Frame SPDM030 060 080 110 N 205500006 FREE AREAS FOR COOLING 7 K 8B I III IHIIIIIOII LO XM4 z 50 160 l 320 lt TY 7 4 22 JO IU 4 U i 220 IMSPD027I AM Ap CA BARS BARS U V W INDIA F ARIAN D lt Tes FTN x gt CO MN SCREWS E R V VIO HOLES i 3 S A TSINK L A mesa POO Wo P LA ML A Technical features CLP IL IU UH FRAME p 2 2 FOR 2 7 5 gt HEATSINK A2 A1 SILCOPAC D KM SE AM 0 4
117. Cow 1 L jl gt 2 A wee 4 N n A HOLES M10 ee a eo ey Sy l A SD 17 9 Y i 1 1 l TER E gt gt gt 4 Ses se Sa 50 60 18 gt 5 LL d 84 86 60 86 16 71 e AIR SECTION 75 50 46 L ix A A lt s R 562 tack 563 _ El E es Wo XE ON 260 d ON VIN 140 40 40 33 15 ON sE Bi R Nf A Z v 1 5 5 Cu 96x20mm ALUN 150 12 ALUMINIUM ZONAS ZONA 5 N A Z ONIGN idt 15 S DENN A lt 9UUA 16 M f YL OC 229 gt gt C SE 468 EYEBO O84 46 IMSPDO027I SILCOPAC D A Technical features NOTES Frame IV SPDM 1K5 1K6 1K7 2K0 Two versions are available Standard version With current transducer installed on the SPDM and collector bars AC DC installed Optional versio
118. D Om S Starting diameter for TAPER funcion 7 Passage ofthe material R REDUCER 12 1 20 30Kgm M MOTOR Pn 46KW Mn 578Nm Nb 760 RPM Nm23100RPM 0 65 gt lt E ENCODER 24V 1000 I giro xs TENSION 50 500Kg STARTING DIAMETER WIDTH 0 5 1 5m LINEAR SPEED 20 200m min IMSPD027 227 E Optional functions SILCOPAC D PARAMETER CONFIGURATION Parametero Value Function cB J enable the indirect tension regulator function rr 2 es pos CB2 add a value CE1 to the speed reference so to saturate the speed regulator 10 2 Current limits impoosed by tension regulator oac 04 enable thefunetion 00 0 as __________ INERTIA COMPENSATION enable the function Inertia compensation calculated as a function of diametro M 1 4 Material density in this case we suppose that that material is always the same ii Tach Material width 10V 2maximum width 100 See 2 1 1 100 Default Acceleration time with core coil Acceleration time with full coil ii A 2 3 4 5 M6 M7 M8 Default Notused axial winder 3 Acquisition of the zero speed tension reference 04 Zero speed tension value N Do Dm 100 N N Source of the starting diameter setted the user Threshold speed under that the diameter is not calculated
119. EARTHED STAR POINT VSC 4 oR 6 XPCC Earthed public 400 V line IMAX 1 7 KA with neutral conductor VSC 4 gt 5 40 gt 17 2 uH For VSC 6 gt 8 12 LP CC gt 25 8 uH NOTCHES lt 20 FOR VSC 4 Xreactor gt 4 21 6 mO EXAMPLE LREACTOR gt 68 8 VSC 2696 gt 6 32 48 MQ Xoco 207 PCC gt 103 2 WH X pce X REACTOR gt 4 Xpcc Required minimum line reactor impedance for installation of converter in first environment Often the maximum current is not limited by the transformer but by the power cable to the industry region Therefore it is necessary to ask the energy supply company concerning the line impedance and the current which is available at the desired point of common coupling 264 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D APPENDIX E EMC Standards and applicable Standards FIRST CONNECTION EXAMPLE ACCORDANCE WITH PE 11 4 L3 _ AK1 AK3 AK5 SPDM Mounting plate IMSPD027I Earth earthing for safety Ground grounding for EMC connection with mass or housing with low inductance Remarks Internal ground connections Additionally to the PE connections good HF connections to the ground must be realized with the aid of a mounting plate which has a well conducting surface sheet metal fro
120. G NO 4181 e H3 HOJSNY 2 EM cue NT 5 ji 9 LLI gt JOVLIOA 9 uel MM d gt CXV LXV 31ON NE lt NOLLdI9S30 Q4VO8 O4 45 3511 LL IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D 2100A Four quadrant IMSPD027I A Technical features FRAM
121. HB po Er 16 na on en Tee 162 SM M LN 163 MEME S E 163 ac Ec ccc c 164 SRI E EU LI 165 D waqanqa E 165 165 SEM IU cr 165 S T AP Boer mats 166 SINISTRE E 166 166 S NIIS geal DD 166 3 27 dos Ilu uuu uyu uu EA HERD CHI EA OUR uyu us t UL 167 33 The motor doesn t reach the nominal 168 Soog6haa e __________________________ 168 168 202 22 akush 169 MOUE 169 ce A 169 39 The motor sinks PRORA 169 20 NOISE On mechaliicalkeompoOnaenlsu uapa qhaquna 169 Dial Changes aaa anu nnw aa 170 170 e uu u qM 170 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D Index
122. IN motor rated current 0 82xV3x2xafxL I F power suppli frequency S U UN ratef voltage power supply L reactor inductance THREE PHASE REACTORS Rated Current Phase Losses Code Dimensions Weight 0 i P H _______ Kg mam mp w 1 39 04 100 5 20 319 9 15 55 0 170 50 203 10 15 15 7 5 20 10 2238000 202 152 12 5 30 60 45 22386211 30 20 399 36 60 110 223805 92 27 40 6 0 22 90 2928 360 205 450 96 400 29 190 24492 40 202 190 20 8 1790 238024 40 3600 50 20 With temperature higher than 40 C decrease rated current by 0 8 for C The reactors in the table are suitable for 380 690V power supply The percentage voltage drop is function of the power supply voltage We suggest to use an individual transformer if the converters power supply is greater than 690V or the drive rated current is greater than 2000A Note See Appendix E IMSPD027 43 A Technical features SILCOPAC D 7 5 Selection Silcopac D converter 5 able to acquire the speed feedback using the signals coming from an Encoder installed motor shaft It is possible to use a large range of Encoder types available on the market selecting between Encoders with the following characteristics Electronic output stage P ush P ull Line Driver Power supply voltage 24 V 5224 V On the XM1 terminal block te
123. IP gAS UR 4I IE 4E 4I IE SI gE gE A SS S GN N SR gUETZ S HIIS S S IIR S S IS I RIZ IS II 4IR GS IZ IIR GS II IR IIR II 4I A 4E 4E A II gE SR S SGyZ IN s SS G Gi 2T GR GI R IN S GS I S SR GS IZ IIR S IZ IIR GS IZ UR GI GG IZ IE GR 4I 4E IG gH 4i IR 4E 4E SR S S 4i IR s sig rcs sias is sis icsamsmirscsssimsenssimgn sen rere sral Verify that load resistors R193 X56 X57 and R194 X58 X59 have the values showed by the paragraph C2 3 and related to the Silcopac D converter type e the resistors are well soldered e connection between control terminals 2 and power terminals U V AK3 W AK5 and between SPAE1 exciter terminals XM4 and control terminals XM2 U U W W e the sense of rotation of the three phase fan of frames IV and V and eventually to exchange two phases WARNING e The input power terminals of frame IV are not in sequence they are installed as following 1 5 AK3 2 3 Load resistors The are two load resistors for current transducer CT that are mounted on card terminals 56 57 X58 X59 The value of these parallel connected resistors set the Silcopac D maximum delivered current laM the voltage between positive terminal X57 or X59 and negative terminal X56 or X58 is proportional to the current 2Vrms corresponds to the maximum converter current 134 P board XM2 Terminal board IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D C Setting up In orde
124. OFF Reading of speed reference OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF FF ON OFF Reading of the auxiliary variable Aux3 e DIRAul OFF1 ON OFF Reading of the auxiliary variable Auxl D2Rlao OFF ON OFF Reading of the armature current reference D2R la om ON OFF Reading of the armature current feedback d D2R Ud or ON OFF Reading of the armature voltage 3 D2RF lu ON OFF Reading of motor flux a 4 D2RIfo OFF ON OFF Reading of the field current reference DF L M D2R_If ON OFF Reading of the field current feedback 0 D2RUvo ON OFF Reading of the power supply voltage OFF DFP 5057 02 _ ON OFF Reading of the alfa command electr degree 01 1 ON OFF Over writing Profibus of the analog input Ean1 D1WEn2 ON OFF Over writing via Profibus of the analog input Ean2 ate D1WAul ON OFF Writing via Profibus of the variable P rofib see 065 parameter DGA TStop 606 0 viii Group G DIAGNOSTICS Stop and Trace storage ore Li ON at the status change Regulation to Suppression P rotection OFF at the status change to Protection Stop and Trace storage when the SETUP REFERENCE function is enabled M her ON at the acquisition of the new reference value pressing ENTER button 606 1 OFF Stop disabled Display following power up or reset e c URS SUE ON INSTRUMENT MODE window is displayed OFF STATUS window is displayed DGD Traces sto
125. PARAMETERS U D press ENTER before accessing to the 2nd level the password is requested at step 1 this is mandatory only if one wants to modify the value of a parameter in P E 2 the password value is 12 Password 1 U D E M press ENTER to access to the 2nd level M through buttons U D select an item of the list gnd leve rough buttons U D select an item of the list U D press ENTER to access to the 3rd level 3rd level using buttons U D select a parameter of the list b press ENTER to confirm the selected parameter T through buttons U D enter the desired value in 2 param 2 U D press ENTER to confirm the value and to return to 3rd level the new value will be store in the EEPROM 4 if the password entered 1 is not correct pressing ENTER in 3 the display shows INVALID PASSWORD PRESS ENTER press ENTER to return to 3rd level if the system is regulating and the parameter is protected pressing SISTEM RUNNING ENTER in 3 the display shows PRESS ENTER m E E M press ENTER to return to 3rd level if the system cannot accept the value entered in 2 pressing ENTER CONSISTENCY ERROR 4 the display shows PRESS ENTER press ENTER to return to 3rd level A DRIVE IDENTIF see appendix F B DRIVE 1 0 C PROTECTIONS J ANALOG INP see appendix F K ANALOG INP FLT L ANALOG INP ABS D ALARMS M ANALOG OUTPUTS E SERIAL LINK F SERIAL DATA
126. SINIO LING N MZ M Te SSS N S T S SS D sl 26 gt RS 12 2 0 NK EATS EzI CUULING AIR INLE x Ul FAN 250 u d 1 gt or 2 Ne 9 A ION ERS ON IS AU EN x Z C 40 65232 SERIAL ELD N SI SILCOPAC D IMSPD027 SILCOPAC D A Technical features EN 5 FREE AREAS FOR COOLING um Re ae E 00 2 SER F ai a elc E fx N BE ENA _ C F F F F xem 2 I T 88 1 1 RSA as 4 I 1 2 A C lt DN 2 232 S ee pen NS dda WE XM1 S Yt ZV MI 28 E o mn 2 x Z Ze 2 M2 XMI _ 7 97 7 7 N Z 2 L gt Z 2222 Z 0
127. Tension loop with load cell correction of the speed reference lt Load cell Dandy roll itis a closed loop tension regulator the tension feedback signal is provided by a transducer e g load cell or dandy roll the regulator output is used to correct the speed reference N SPEED CURRENT CURRENT FEEDBACK To LOAD CELL T DIAMETER LOAD CELL CALC FEEDBACK Blocks description SPEED REG Speed regulator CURRENT REG Armature current regulator CURRENT FEEDBACK Armature current feedback la TAPER Used when in the winder unwinder applications the tension reference To has to be re calibrated as function of the coil diameter the re calibration can be linear or hyperbolic type When the function is disabled the tension reference is directly passed to the comparison node DIAMETER CALC The diameter is acquired as analog signal provided by a proper external transducer LOAD CELL Transducer of the tension feedback T e g load cell or dandy roll The value is acquired as analog signal LOAD CELL REG Tension regulator it receives the tension error from the node of comparison between the tension reference and feedback and generates a term that corrects the speed reference No 204 5 027 SILCOPAC D E Optional functions Parameters setting Setting 1 Tension loop with load cell correction of the speed reference 1 2 CJ
128. XM1 20 External protection instant T1 put COM1 according to the desired set instant T2 reset the converter supply 1 21 Reset for at least 0 2 sec instant T3 upon the release of the reset instant T4 COMI it must remain in the position which was set in 2 for at least 1 sec i e the time necessary for the check to end the procedure of reset At the end of the procedure of reset the converter SPDM assumes the set of parameters corresponding to the position of COM1 1 set ON 2 set 5 bring back to the original status instant T5 6 enable the converter by power supplying the terminal XM1 20 External protection instant T6 W N e XM1 20 Suppression H 1 Protection P 1 Suppression H 1 KP ff Time XM1 21 7 14 2222222 _ 12 13 0 2150 1 17 COM1 E Figure D17 1 tl delay from the instant of passage in protection to the instant of commutation of input gt 05 T2 delay from the commutation of COM1 to the application of the impulse of reset gt 0 s T3 duration of the impulse of reset gt 0 2 6 4 delay from the instant of end of the impulse of reset to the instant of reset of COM1 to its original meaning This delay must be greater than the time employed by the check to end the reset procedure gt 1 5 49 delay from the instant of commutation of 1 to the p
129. a dual slope digital filter can be included the cutoff frequency of which can be set the related parameter filter is enabled assigning to the parameter value greater than 2 and 15 disabled assigning to the parameter value lt 2 O Tacho gen input Tach terminals XM1 26 27 tn 9 0 mur 0 premade ont 0000000 Qus fo 0 255 reals Armature voltage input Varm terminals XM1 32 31 es 000 0 255 rads Ref diff input Rif terminals XM1 33 34 106 IMSPD027 SILCOPAC D B List of parameters Code Default Values Description Group L ANALOG INP ABS Note Each analog input be acquired by the system as absolute value as magnitude plus sign This group includes the parameters for the mode selection Tacho gen input Tach terminals XM1 26 27 Field current input If terminals XM1 28 31 Ref diff input Rif terminals XM1 33 34 Group M ANALOG OUTPUTS 3 analog outputs are available la gt XM1 35 36 1 1 37 38 2 1 39 41 PWM3 XM 1 40 41 PWM1 PWM2 PWM3 are programmable Nota This group includes the three analog outputs relevant parameters PWM1 PWM2 PWM3 dn Pw1Ab ON OFF PWM1 analog output Parameters for the outout mode selection Pw2Ab ON OFF PWM2 analog output ON as absolute value a Pw
130. alarm goes ON the flux reference takes the value 100 the speed reference is limited to the following ratio Speed limit DB7 CBH Wo Ref ON OFF Enable the angular speed evaluation as function of the PET diameter The evaluated 288 7 EE term is substituted to the line speed reference acquired ad programmed by CB1 parameter before of the summing term 94 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D B List of parameters Code Name Default Values Description No Sel Selection of the speed reference origin 2898 _ MPotF w The reference is given by software motopotentiometer in the range 0 to 100 9 parameter stores last set reference value CB4 parameter stores the ramp time input terminal XM1 17 increase COM2 input terminal XM1 18 decrease The reference is given by software motopotentiometer in the range MPotC3 from 0 to 100 if COM3 input terminal XM1 19 is not enabled from 0 to 100 if COM3 input terminal XM1 19 is enabled A change from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0 becomes active only when the speed Is zero 1 input terminal XM1 17 increase the absolute value COM2 input terminal XM1 18 decrease the absolute value CM9 parameter stores last set reference value CB4 parameter stores the ramp time The reference is acquired by the Rif analog input with sign terminals XM1 33 34 From the serial link From the differential analog Rif input terminals XM1
131. at the test points P5 TP5 P15 15 7 are beyond tolerance replace P The 0 V reference is TP8 the intervention threshold are board P5 5 P15 and N15 20 Control board failure The supply voltages are within tolerance values Measure the Replace C board values at the test points 5 5 15 15 TP7 The 0 V reference is TP 8 the intervention threshold are P5 5 P15 and N15 20 C3 1 1 P 4 External protection intervention selecting the STATUS function par C1 3 1 the display shows PROTECTION FAIL HYPOTHESIS CHECKS ACTIONS Logic signal loss at terminal Measure the voltage between terminals 20 22 itmustbe Re enable the logic signal at 20 24 v 24 V 4V The logic input M20 Ext P status read through terminal 1 20 so as 0 the Hardware Status function par C1 3 1 at the item Logic measure 24 V 4 V between Input will be OFF Ifthe voltage at the terminal is zero the terminals 20 22 logic input status is ON and the protection occurs C board failure The voltage measured between terminals 20 22 15 24 Replace C board V the M20 Ext_P logic input status read through the Hardware Status function par C1 3 1 at the item Logic Input is ON C3 1 2 2 instantaneous current protection intervention selecting the STATUS function par C 1 3 1 the display shows PROTECTION IOC The protection is made by a volt
132. cables first disconnect the cables from the converter Do not perform on the components of the SPDM of the test by high potential Pay attention not to damage any part of the SPDM during the movement Protect the converter from atmospheric agents and adverse environmental conditions temperature humidity vibrations collisions etc If you must store temporarily the converter outside take special precautions see paragraph 1 4 section A The SPDM contains components sensitive to the electrostatic charges such components may be CAUTION damaged if handles in a non suitable way During the operations of maintenance or replacement of the electronic cards follow the points indicated here below WARRANTY ANDLIMTS OF LIABILITY e WARRANTY Use a kit of maintenance for the electrostatic charges You must take suitable precautions against the electrostatic discharge ESD e Wear Static belts suitably grounded e Handle the cards from the edges e cards should not enter in contact with highly insulating materials as plastic sheets insulating surfaces parts of synthetic tissues e The cards shall be located on conductive surfaces only e The cards must be packed in conductive sheets before the shipment e Forthe conditions of warranty please refer to the module GENERAL CONDITIONS OF WARRANTY enclosed to the Order Acceptation LIMTS OF LIABILITY e Answer Drives S r l shall not be considered liable for mis
133. convenient coil as near as possible to the max coil can be measured Applying the formula described at par 8 10 4 the acceleration time that would be measured in max reel conditions can be calculated IMSPD027 219 E Optional functions SILCOPAC D Parameters CMA Setto ON to enable the function 1 Set to Var value to enable the calculation of the reel inertia compensation CM2 Set this parameter to select the source of the information related to the material density as percentage of the max value allowed by the machine P 4 density from CM4 parameter Ean2 ensity from Ean2 analog input terminals XM 1 30 31 If density from If analog input terminal XM 1 28 31 CM3 Setthis parameter to select the source of the information related to the coil width as percentage of the max value allowed by the machine P CM5 width from CM5 parameter Ean2 width from Ean2 analog input terminals XM 1 30 31 Tach width from Tach analog input terminals XM 1 26 27 J umpers 8 9 10 11 12 If width from If analog input terminal XM 1 28 31 4 Setto the density value when 2 4 CM5 Set to the coil width value when 3 5 CM6 Set to the machine acceleration time value s measured with the motorized cylinder CM7 Set to the machine acceleration time value s measured in empty reel conditions CM8 Set to the machine acceleration time value s measured in max reel conditions E5 9 3 Maximum acceleration time calcu
134. current must be calculated so as to obtain for each of the two drives a max current hexaphase corresponding to the half of the max rated current of the motor dodecaphase The Master drive sends also to the Slave drive the current reference through the analog output P wm It is necessary to connect the output PWM1 of the Master drive to the two analog inputs Ean1 either of the Master Drive or the Slave drive and the analog OV of the Master drive to the analog OV of the Slave drive only 1 027 285 APPENDIX F Twelve Pulse SILCOPAC D SPDM Master SPDM Slave C Board C Board X SPDM Shield bar Programming All the first programming phase apart from the regulator calibration can be performed for both converters considered one by one according to the standard modalities described in chapter 8 The programming be made through interface to a personal computer or by using the user interface SPDI1 or SPDI2 Master converter programming PWM1 output meaning selection DM1 armature current reference FEEL Y 7 CURRENT Armature current reference origin REGULATOR REGULATOR CA1 laoSl Eanl from analog input Ean1 CURRENT FEEDBACK terminal XM1 29 laoLm PWM1 lao Slave converter programming Armature current reference origin CA1 laoSl Eanl from analog input Ean1 terminal 1 29 FEEDBACK SPEED CURRENT O gt REGULA
135. ends when there are at the same time the following three conditions 1 the current of field If has the same sign of the reference 2 there has been an end to the conditions of intervention of the protection lack of field and transducer of armature voltage malfunctioning See description of the parameters DCF DC3 and 3 The difference between the reference If0 of the current of field and the reaction If is lower than 50 At the end of the procedure of inversion the activation of the current regulator may be delayed if you wish to allow to the current of field to reach its new operating value 188 IMSPDO027I SILCOPAC D D Auxiliary functions The parameter 2 allows to obtain such delay in terms of software cycles The corresponding time may be calculated with the formula time of delay CC2 CD3 s where CD3 is a parameter which may be 10 5 or 3 3 ms For example if CD3 10 ms and 2 20 then the delay time is worth CD3 CC2 200ms During the field inversion the current regulator of the SP DM remains disabled this involves that at the moment of unlock of the regulator the speed of the motor and the reference of speed can be very different and as a consequence you may have a high request of current made by the speed regulator with possible negative consequences on the mechanics The function field inversion if used with the ramp enabled terminal XM1 14 allows to obtain a soft transaction bumpless at the m
136. has reached a firing angle lower than 50 el degrees WATCHDOG alfa lt 50 protection the display yshows INVALID SELFTUN PRESS MaxS the tuning procedure failed too long Verify parameters and press MODE to return to the Ist level and repeat the sequence IMSPD027 129 C User Interface SILCOPAC D List CURRENT SELFTUN self tuning of the armature current regulator the following parameters will be evaluated and placed in active status 1 proportional gain of the regulator TA2 derivative gain of the regulator DB9 RI drop across the motor armature Note before enabling the function the following steps are mandatory 1 verify the proper value of the CT load resistors see par C2 3 2 verify the proper adjustment of the voltage transducer see par C2 7 2 terminal XM1 32 3 verify the proper set up of the DB1 083 DB4 parameters 4 remove the motor field physically opening the circuit set the DCF parameter to OFF to disable the protection field loss 5 mechanically lock the motor rotor 6 verify that TA3 100 and TA4 100 SPEED SELFTUNING selftuning of the motor speed regulator during procedure the motor speed goes to its basic value The following parameters will be evaluated and placed in active status TC1 proportional gain of the regulator TC2 integral gain of the regulator Note before enabling the function the following steps are mandatory 1 remo
137. inter phase reactor Ly EIE microHenry AT 1 027 287 APPENDIX F Twelve Pulse SILCOPAC D 288 1 027 QA174 Rev 02 Wawa nswer DRIVES MONTEBELLO VICENTINO ITALY DECLARATION OF CE CONFORMITY 07 Issued according to the H Form complete Quality Assurance of the CE conformity evaluation procedure Directive 93 465 Manufacturer Answer Drives S r l Head Office Viale Sarca 336 20126 Milano Italy Manufacturer s Address Operation Site 5 5 11 Sordis 4 36054 Montebello Vicentino VI Italy DECLARES its own exclusive responsibility that the products Product Product Family Silcopac D SPDM Product Description AC DC Converters with currents from 30 to 4000 according to the verifications performed comply with the requirements of the European Community Directive 2006 95 EC called Low Voltage Directive The products have been manufactured according to the harmonized Technical Standard CENELEC EN 60146 1 1 edition 1991 corresponding to Standard CEI 22 7 CENELEC EN 60146 2 corresponding to Standard 22 21 Moreover they comply according to the tests performed with the requirements of the European Community Directive 89 336 modified by modified 93 68 EEC called EMC Directive since they comply with the harmonized Technical Standard CENELEC EN 61800 3 corresponding
138. intervention threshold See parameter 20 1 50 Tolerance field current feedback signal If the difference between the reference and SGGW the field current feedback 15 absolute value greater than DC9 parameter during more than 2 55 the system goes in If F protection status Group D ALARMS Note This group includes the of the alarms intervention See the note at the previous Group C PROTECTIONS because the parameters of groups C and D are related each one to other E ON OFF Tacho signal loss See DCG parameter too E ON OFF Ventilation loss See DCH parameter too MotOh ON OFF Motor thermal protection See parameter too E ON OFF Converter thermal protection See parameter too E ON OFF Serial link loss See DCK parameter too jn ON OFF Motor in stall conditions See DCN parameter too ResAl Active alarms silence no disable Setting this parameter to 1 all the active alarms will be m silenced at the same time immediately after the parameter automatically will be set back to 0 The DD1 parameter set up is possible by the serial link too DD2 Armature voltage threshold above that the Tacho signal loss protection is enabled Note By the PROTES amp ALARMS function it s possible to silence each active alarm one ata time through the SP DI1 SPDI2 keypad Group E SERIAL LINK This group includes the parameters of the serial link function S
139. is 0 20mA current type insert jumper 13 the differential Rin will be decreased to 5000 Terminal 34 inverting input terminal 33 non inverting input 35 Analog output for armature current measurements instrument Place jumper J P14 on pins 1 2 if the used instrument is a millilamperometer 5 mA max output current Place jumper J P14 on pins 2 3 if the used instrument is a voltmeter 10V max output voltage Place jumper J P22 on pins 2 3 if the instrument is central zero type value and sign measurements Place jumper J P22 if the instrument is lateral zero type absolute value measurements Close the load path to terminal XM1 36 The output is adjustable with PR2 trimmer see paragr C 2 9 See la monitor description par 2 4 1 section C 0V common terminal of control circuits 10V or5 mA PWM1 programmable analog output Resolution 8 bits sign Close the load path to terminal 38 Place jumper J P27 on pins 2 3 for a V output 10 full scale Place jumper J P27 on pins 1 2 for a mA output 5 mA full scale 0V common terminal of control circuits 10 or 5 mA PWM2 programmable analog output Resolution 8 bits sign Close the load path to terminal 41 Place jumper J P24 on pins 2 3 for a V output 10 full scale Place jumper J 24 on pins 1 2 for a mA output 5 mA full scale With extemal exciter weakened field operation the output is reserved to the reference signal of the motor excitation current
140. losses compensation function Setthe parameters related to the enable of the diameter calculation acquisition function par 8 9 213 E Optional functions SILCOPAC D E5 3 6 Setting 6 Tangential winder tension loop with load cell control of the current limit Diameter Diameter 9d Silcopac D In this case both regulators are active this setting is used for winder or unwinder systems the motorized cylinder transmits the rotation to the winder cylinder The axial winder function evaluates the terms related to the tension reference to the inertia compensation and to mechanical losses compensation the tension loop function with load cell compares the reference to the tension feedback and generates through a proportional integral regulator a term which corrects the tension inaccuracies the terms calculated by the axial winder and tension loop functions are summed by a summing node whose output controls the current limit the speed regulator is saturated by a term summed to the reference The diameter value is acquired by an external transducer NoRic Current Limits OMEGA No Y SPEED U N DIAMETER N CALC N MECHANIC LossK LOSS gt N AccTo INERTIA AccT1 COMP Density 2 Width REF LOAD CELL REG T LOAD CELL FEEDBACK Blocks description SPEED REG Speed regulator itis saturated by a term summed to the speed reference OMEGA CALC The angular speed refe
141. minimum value CN1 parameter At 10V value the diameter has the maximum value 100 Remember that it is possible to perform the proper recalibrations of the voltage value at the analog input setting the parameters DH3 DJ 3 DJ 4 DK3 DK4 DLC DLD The diameter variations are limited by a ramp which duration can be set by CN5 parameter If CL3 parameter is set to Wind the diameter can take only increasing values diameter values lower than the last acquired one will be ignored If CL3 parameter is set to Unwind the diameter can take only decreasing values diameter values greater than the last acquired one will be ignored Setting one of the logic output DO1 to 006 parameters to DiamErr value if the error between the new diameter value and the last acquired one is greater than 20 a diameter error warning will occur the logic output changes to its active status E4 4 1 Logic commands Coml Terminal XM1 17 The rising edge of this input transition from inactive to active command starts a sequence that acquires through 105 ramp at angular speed lower than 20 the measured diameter value bypassing the filter set parameter and the ramp set by CN5 parameter Com2 Terminal XM1 18 The rising edge of this input transition from inactive to active command starts the instantaneous acquisition of the initial diameter which provenience depends on CN2 setting If CN2 15 set Eanl 2 the analog signal indica
142. normally furnished apart are accompanied by the accessories and by the installation and setting up instructions Check that no damages occurred to the equipment verifying the carpentry and the front panel appearance check for the good status of the inside connections and for the integrity of the electronic boards A1 4 Storage If the converter will not be immediately installed store it in a clean and dry place in its primary packing If these conditions cannot be satisfied protect the equipment with waterproof sheets The storage temperature value shall be within 20 C and 70 C range 6 IMSPD027 SILCOPAC D A Technical features sd SCHEDA PRODOTTO PRODUCT SHEET MOD TYPE 25 9 order conf Consegna richiesta delivery time Cliente Customer Ordine Cliente P O 1 Quantita Quantity Convertitore Converter For d c motor A Rete di alimentazione P ower supply 3PH Manuale ist C1 Italiano Italian C Inglese English OUTPUT User manual 8 Francese French Cl Tedesco German VOLTAG 1 1 Mandrino S pindle Scorr preciso Electr shaft DUTY Em lt 8 Tastiera con connettore CENTRONICS Keypad with CENTRONICS connector 9 5205 7 Kitdiremotaggio SPDI1 SPDI1 remote 10 SPRI Kit remotaggio connettore SP DI1 2 SP DI1 2 connector remote kit 28730753 M
143. parameter too At power up the time is set to 10 minutes This protection is active only if the serial interface is enabled See note WARNING Disabling of the serial link loss protection requires a particular care should the converter receive current or speed references from the serial link In this case when the serial link loss occurs the converter continues to work according to the last reference received therefore the user must carry out the operations and use as reference the signals sent by one of the logic outputs configured as Alarm see Drive parameters description groups D and O 11 The intervention threshold can be tuned through the DC4 parameter 12 The minimum intervention threshold can be adjusted by the DC1 parameter the maximum one through the DC2 parameter 13 The intervention happens if the stall time in motor current limit conditions exceeds the value set by the DC6 parameter The protection will not be active if the current limit is lower than 25 of lay The lay value can be set by the DB6 parameter 14 This protection is operated when at least two phases feeding the bridge missing fuses damaged or open contactors More precisely the protection will be active when the following condition will be true armature current la 0 armature voltage 0 phase shift angle alfa lt 80 For proper operation the DA2 parameter has to be programmed When the serial link with a Personal Computer R
144. programmable analog inputs Tach If 0 Obit sign One auxilary analog input Varm 0 10V Obit sign One output 10V 5mA short cicuit protection Three programmable analog outputs PWM1 2 3 0 10V 8bit sign Load weighting lifting applications torque current motor voltage speed power etc Relay outputs 10 DRIVE OK Two programmable digital outputs 24V dc active alarm minimum speed Step attained frequency speed current threshold etc Nine optoisolated digital 24V dc inputs 3 programmable 2n with quid crystal spay SPDI2 Keypad with printer connector 2 line x16 characters 10 keys Motor stall prevention P 24 2 2A Logics 1 0 24 power supply Vin 85 265V ac Serial link loss External protection S Accurated speed ratio Ward leonard field regulator 52 IMSPD027I 8 OVERLOAD CURVES The overload curves according to IEC 1136 1 Standard are evaluated on a periodic cycle as shown by Fig 1 at 40 C ambient temperature In the lv 0 particular case the load cycle appears as shown by Fig 2 TAS i Figure 2 lv converter current before the overload Current during the overload at the end of each Tp period the thyristor temperature reaches the maximum allowed value current during the overload in the lv 0 particular case Ts cycle period Tp overload duration A curve family is related to each converter represented by a diagram Fi
145. sQ 93 PE ID O Cus DS 2 7 22222 2 94 u ee 96 CEAN 96 97 uuu tir need TRA aka 98 12 und a aa 99 COUT AS CURRENER E S uuu done au vn bt n O 99 GO UD RENT m mna da 99 Group SPEED 99 Group 100 COUPE RAMP HEN 100 100 Group E M EUR B u uu 100 Group HA GAINS 100 Di LETT 101 DRIVEIDENT b tre 101 OUD B DRIVE MO dimittat AO R 101 102 COUP DS ALARM cR 103 SERIAL LINK 104 u 104 TICS 105 SEMEN 106 Group Iie NAO Gul NIP TCI
146. the STATUS function using U D buttons U D pushing ENTER button 2nd level the display shows an item of the list a and an item of the list b if the item a is REGUL the item b is selected through DG4 parameter as in 1 114 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D C User Interface list list b TEST locked converter SYNCR PRES synchronism loss cod 0 at least 1 test failure PHASES ERROR phase detector circuit failure cod 1 LINE VOLT ERROR line voltage beyond tolerance cod 2 LINE FREQ ERROR line frequency beyond tolerance cod 3 ENTER PAR 1 converter ident number 0 cod 4 EEPROM FAILED EEPROM failure cod 5 lt gt 0 not null armature current cod 6 RAM FAILED RAM failure 7 locked converter PROTECTION MainF line loss 0 0 4 at least 1 protection PROTECTION Ext P external protection 1 cod 1 active PROTECTION max instantaneous current 2 2 WATCHDOG watchdog active 3 1 3 WATCHDOG Sync_F watchdog active 3 2 cod 3 WATCHDOG F watchdog active 3 3 3 WATCHDOG HwWdog watchdog active 3 4 3 WATCHDOG Reset watchdog active 3 5 3 WATCHDOG ParDJ8 watchdog active 3 6 cod 3 WATCHDOG Eep SP watchdog active 3 7 cod 3 WATCHDOG F watchdog active 3 8 cod 3 WATCHDOG N lt gt 0 watchdog active 3 10 3 WATCHDOG lt 50 watchdog active 3 11 cod 3 WATCHDOG MaxS watchdog active 3 12 cod 3 PROTECT
147. the tension Diameter acquisition Exchange of parameters exchange during the reset of the converter Logic input Com2 terminal XM1 18 Motopotentiometer function R eduction of the speed reference parameter CB1 Motopotentiometer function Reduction of the speed reference with polarity imposed by logic input COM3 parameter 1 Motopotentiometer function Reduction of the speed reference with commutation of the analog input Rif imposed by logic input COM4 parameter CB1 Speed reference polarity if that comes from analog input Rif with digital input parameter CA1 Helper function Reduce the parameter DJ 3 value to do the load sharing Pope function Reduce the memorized current reference value to increase the tension Angular position regulator enabling Starting diameter acquisition Drive trace and thyristor trace stopping Logic input Com3 terminal 1 19 Speed reference polarity with speed reference from the motopotentiometer parameter 1 Speed reference polarity with speed reference from the analog input Rif parameter CB1 Enabling of armature current limit from analog input Ean1 parameter 2 Enabling of the adding term to current reference from analog input Ean2 parameter CA2 Enabling of the adding term to speed reference from analog input Ean2 parameter CB2 Helper function enabling Pope function enabling Torque proof and or Load weighting function enabling Changeable parameter
148. thermal protection 0 1 0 1 0 Converter thermal protection 0 1 0 1 1 Serial failure 0 1 1 0 0 Motor max speed O 1 1 O 1 Network out of tolerance 0 1 1 1 O Motor in stall O 1 1 1 1 General failure Decoding of Suppression status O O 0 0 1 Terminal 1 19 disabled 0 0 0 1 0 Terminal 1 13 disabled 0 0 0 1 1 Disabling generated by serial 0 0 1 0 0 Disabling generated by optional function 0 0 1 0 1 Disabling generated by internal P LC word n 2 speed feedback data 15 expressed in the scale CCCDH 3333H and for the master it s to be meant as an integer signed word and due to the decimal a data between 13107 and 13107 will be read for PP 0 at Master output word n 1 logic commands in and with corresponding physical commands of the terminal board enabled from SP DM keypad It s the least significant byte of the word bit 0 not active command bit 1 active command Bit 0 Start command Corresponds to terminal XM1 13 Bit 1 Ramp command Corresponds to terminal 1 14 Bit 2 Intrfl command Corresponds to terminal XM1 15 Bit 3 Intrf2 command Corresponds to terminal XM 1 16 Bit 4 1 command Corresponds to terminal XM 1 17 Bit 5 Com2 command Corresponds to terminal XM 1 18 Bit 6 Com3 command Corresponds to terminal XM 1 19 word n 2 speed reference or current reference can be chosen in the menu using the SP DM keypad The data is expressed in the scale CCDH 3333H and for the ma
149. ui 4 N Z wm d S Z M V AX jl 69 45 9S 86 y JE 4 O 3 AVC 5 o p O le WOO cL Tos Lg AG O 7 A lt LL _ V V V Ed V V V Ol gt P d g gt 6 NOD AZ LM DRE Aver x gt o Y Oy G 2 A 77 Jl dl OD Nek wee xL ER N 7 T b O xS p V m y Y31907 A d 6 lt T NO O dvi PEE PR 1S3 M Zt AT lt 14534 SLOWS 16 NO VIL A O O7 Y SNOILO3LO amp Md NI es O SNOI 930 1010448 4 lt lt LS HOLV1093M ASA 21 3 3 III COM N YOLV 1 938 1 NOD 7 MOLY INDIAN 03345 mam EN gt ae 21901 8 pp A 3331N 9l 2 NI T B A O A A LJ3MIN N 3 x O 7 2 2 VM U Ya 7 PES O 4 ei V x 2 A Lz Y v lt 0 lt Z 7 Y N P JS AO xi A RI 0 u 10 V lt jl Y Y We T M Y iB 5 091 O s
150. 0 1 e lt S 4 9N LZ r B 4 lt ES lt gt J L 2n n e q Y399NNS 14709 GANS 8 5 SINO d gt gt O M E als lt 08708 NY ATddNS M3 ake 1 9 10 a N lt J S 08 d AlddflS 44 Ad E S dys aC NOILLVOIILN3GOI QNVOE IMSPDO027I 32 A Technical features SILCOPAC D SA 0 0 0 0 JSHJA3M 73 41nd 7 4941 gt 3 o 5 V f ov m 3 LX jit H9 J OL INO 1 e Al ke e Oe m 4 VO 1 6 ZY 2 C 2 2 4 5 lt 1 TENE 3 E erg E gt 2 dv D T 2 5 NO EE V o3 E SA E Ses Su 5 Q 1 i di 4 Heal y 5 Jl Daas NA i 2 y Zy 2
151. 00 0 115 8 100 0 115 9 100 0 115 9 100 0 115 9 100 0 115 9 100 0 115 9 100 0 115 9 100 0 115 9 100 0 116 0 100 0 116 0 100 0 116 0 100 0 115 9 100 0 115 9 100 0 115 8 100 0 115 8 100 0 115 8 100 0 115 8 100 0 115 8 100 0 115 9 100 0 115 9 100 0 116 0 100 0 116 0 100 0 116 1 100 0 116 1 100 0 116 2 100 0 116 2 100 0 116 2 100 0 116 2 100 0 116 2 100 0 116 3 100 0 116 3 10ms Uvo Alfa 98 7 100 98 4 100 98 7 100 98 4 100 98 7 100 98 4 100 98 7 100 98 4 100 98 7 100 98 4 100 98 7 100 98 4 100 98 7 100 98 4 100 98 7 100 98 4 100 98 7 100 98 4 100 98 7 100 98 4 100 98 7 100 98 4 100 98 7 100 98 4 100 98 7 100 98 2 165 98 4 165 97 9 165 97 9 165 97 8 165 97 9 165 97 4 165 97 8 165 97 4 165 97 9 165 97 9 165 97 9365 97 8 165 98 2 165 97 9 165 98 2 165 97 9 165 98 2 165 97 9 165 98 2 165 98 2 165 98 2 165 98 2 165 98 2 165 98 2 165 AUX1 AuxDgn AUX2 Eanl AUX3 Ean2 239 Appendix B 5 PROTECTIONS LEGENDA MainF Ext P W_Dog Ud F If F TachF Fan F Motoh SEE N Max UvOut Stale Leg F AUX n AuxDgn LEGENDA THYRISTOR TRACE NO ERRORS 240 Out 3 Out 4 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
152. 0000000000 PROTE 0100000000000000 PROTE 0100000000000000 PROTE 0100000000000000 PROTE 0100000000000000 PROTE 0100000000000000 PROTE 0100000000000000 PROTE 0100000000000000 PROTE 0100000000000000 PROTE 0100000000000000 PROTE 0100000000000000 PROTE 0100000000000000 PROTE 0100000000000000 PROTE 0100000000000000 PROTE 0100000000000000 PROTE 0100000000000000 PROTE 0100000000000000 PROTE 0100000000000000 PROTE 0100000000000000 PROTE 0100000000000000 OO k O gt e W NF gt RO N gt CO UI 25 ERRORS 1 027 LOGIC 1 0 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 100001000011000 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 1100001000011000
153. 022 b G 15 160V 300V pm x Sony e MEME EE W C FS T MEE 1 38V H K W 16 380V 7201 240 M N P16 450V 860V 18 Personalization of the output N monitor terminal 1 40 Closed on pins 1 2 if the measure of the motor speed has been taken when the current is on through a milliamperemeter 5mA f s connected to the terminals XM 1 40 41 Closed on the pins 2 3 if the measure has been taken live 19 programming at Default values see parameter CDF 20 21 22 Closed the pins 2 3 if the measure of the armature current 5 taken as value and sign instrument at central zero Closed on the pins 1 2 if the measure is taken as absolute value instrument at side zero See J P 14 P23 Personalization of the encoder zero pulse terminal XM 1 10 Closed on the pins 1 2 contact XM1 10 XM1 5 normally open Closed on the pins 2 3 contact XM1 10 XM1 5 normally closed P24 Personalization of the analog output PWM2 terminal XM 1 39 Closed on the pins 1 2 if the output is prearranged to have a milliamperemeter 5mA f s connected to the terminals XM 1 39 38 Closed on the pins 2 3 if the measure has been taken live P25 Exciter inside outside Silcopac D Inserted on the pins 2 3 if the exciter is internal Inserted on the pins 1 2 if the exciter is external Sign
154. 027 243 Appendix C Configuration Parameters DEA DEE DE1 DFA DFI DFH Dfa Dfe Dfi DFm DGA DG6 244 DRIVE PAPAMETERS A DRIVE IDENTIF Snumb 1 B DRIVE 1 0 UvoFs 380 N Fs 2000 RI 00 C PROTECTIONS MainF On Ud F On MotOh On UvOut On UvoMx 115 0 Tstal 5 0 D ALARMS TachF 0ff 0ff E SERIAL LINK Enable 5 0ff BaudR 19 2 F SERIAL DATA D1Labi 0ff D1LAu2 0ff DILNo 0ff D1Liao Off DIL_Ud Off Off D1Luvo Off G DIAGNOSTICS Tstop Off TrcNc 1 Aux2S Eanl DA2 DB2 DB6 DDB DDF DEB DEF DE2 DFB DF DFN DFb DFf DFj DFn DGB DG7 Bridg If Fs lalom Ext P If F ConOh Stale Sncic Fan_F Stale S_Com S_ComD IdNum Sts D1Habi D1HAu2 DIHNo D1Riao D1H Ud D1Hifo DIffU vo Sstop Th Nr Aux3S Unid Off Off Off Off Off Ean2 DA3 DB3 DB7 DCC DCG DCO DC4 DCB DDC 001 DEC DEG DE3 DFC DFK DFO DFc DFg DFk Dfo DGC DG8 Thyr 30 la Fs 30 Nbase 100 0 TachF Ser Leg 115 0 MOH_R 100 0 MotOh Off ResA 0 S_D2 0ff Ser D 0 DILPro DlLaul 0ff D1LAu3 Off DIL N off 1 la off DILF lu off D1L If off Off Inst_M Off StatV N D Ref 10 0 DB4 DB8 DCD DCH DC1 DC5 DC9 DDD DED DEE DFD DFL DFP DFd DFh 061 069 SILCOPAC D Ud Fs 400 E
155. 0KHz U3 signal input from differential encoder otherewise not used Rin 10 KO maximun frequence 50 2 Note the final position signal can come from an external transducer which drives N O or N C contact Connect the N O contact to terminals XM1 10 XM1 5 and place jumper 23 on position 1 2 alternatively connect the N C contact to terminals XM1 10 XM1 12 and place jumper J 23 on position 2 3 0 V encoder common point it is galvanically insulated from the control common terminals 27 31 36 38 41 START logic input it enables the converter when connected to terminal 23 Optocoupled input 8mA current consumption RAMP logic input iit enables the ramp after the speed reference when connected to terminal 23 enter the ramp parameters through the user interface Optocoupled input 8mA current consumption INTRF1 logic input iog when connected to terminal 23 it replaces the external speed reference with the internal reference n 1 if par OFF the INTRF1 acts as START input also if par ON the START is not enabled Enter the reference value through the user interface see parameters TC7 and TD7 Optocupled input 8mA current consumption INTRF2 logic input jog when connected to terminal 23 it replaces the external speed reference with the internal reference n 2 if par OFF the INTRF2 acts as START input also if par CDE ON the START is not enabled Enter the reference value through
156. 0V ELC21981101 SPDMIK5 UK RK 1000A 1000V ELC20534903 SPDMIK5 UW RW 900A 1250V ELC40781601 SPDMIKS N M SPDMIK6 UD UG RD 1100A 690V ELC20652801 SPDMIK6RG 11004 1000V ELC206526 SPDMIK7 UK 1100A 1000V ELC206526 SPDMIK7 RK RW UW 11004 1250V ELC20650001 SPDMIK7 N M SPDM2K1 UD UG RD 1400A 690V ELC20652803 SPDM2K1 RG 1400A 1100V ELC20652402 SPDM2K2N M SPDM2K5 UD RD UG 2x800A 690V ELC22152207 SPDM2K5 UK RG 2x800A 1250V ELC 22073307 SPDM2K5 RK UW RW 2x800A 1250V ELC22007401 SPDM3K1 UD RD UG 2X 1000A 690V ELC22152008 SPDM3KI RG UK RK UW 2X1000A 1250V ELC 22007404 SPDM3K1 RW 2X900A 1250V ELC22007402 SPDM3K1 SPDM3K6 UD RD UG SPDM3K6 RG UK RK UW SPDM3K6 N M ELC22152006 ELC22007403 ELC22007403 ELC22007406 ELC22007406 ELC22007405 2X1250A 690V 2X1100A 1250V 2X1100A 1250V SDM4K0UG 2x1400A 1250V 5 4 2x1400A 1250V SPDM4KOU RW 2x1250A 1250V No more available superseded IMSPD027 91 A Technical features SILCOPAC D A11 6 THYRISTORS Silcopac D Thyristors Adviced quantity SPDM030 0 6 SKKT27 14E ELC 20636002 SPDM030 H SKKT27 18E ELC 20636004 SPDM060 80 D G SKKT72 14E ELC20636006 SPDM060 80 H SKKT72 18E ELC20636012 SPDM110 D G SKKT92 14E ELC 20636010 SPDM110 H SKKT92 18E ELC 20636012 SPDM160 W SKKT105 22E ELC 22083902 SPDM350 450 D G 162 14 01 SPDM350 450H MCC162 18i 01 ELC 20636020 SPDM500 K SKKT210 20E ELC 20636025 SPDM500 W SKKT210 22E ELC 20636026 SPDM
157. 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 1100001000011000 Auxl Aux2 Aux3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TRACING CAUSE PRDTECTION DRIVE No N 33413354 33 5 E394 T3354 1334 1 3954 T3344 3353 135403551 1335401 335 195 5 15 3951 1 92 451 3951 F 33 4 33 5 18344 33 5 19355 3953 15920320 FIEF 35 5 FIAFIA 133 4 4 33 5 PIAF 93 5 ee Le 33 5 17325329 33 4 33 5 35 5 1 33 44 33 5 4 133443321 1333143347 P3934 331 2405 2214 1392073311 T3514 3291 139 1 453294 E331432941 k 33 0 64 1 330 4 32 53 1 390 432 51 32 9 32 6 32 9 32 4 32904 3244 32 8 32 4 32 8 32 4 32 8 32 1 32 32 1 15321432414 12920422214 32 6 31 8
158. 3AJH JSNVHLI 35104 70007 0006 AZIS Ow Mg WYOMOLP 8u ZY ne a gt 5 Ge 4IMOd INVAGVNOD NAJS VOX WA ZX E VA LX ol S AZ z i gt y A 661022 2 9 2 6 MG NOLVOIdIN3Q M3MO18 M pus 91 P 0 Y f N E E Soi SW 4 8 SV gt A T G A e A ej n al Kl KI MM ake 2 94 ETAL ASA 6 54 yp 7 1 NO po CINX 9 gt 1 gt N K y P AG Pi IN nm LAY 197 zo LO Le ill 215 vZ MOOZ zH09 455 9 Vc 08 ZHOC a N N J V A Us G E S NO HL 1 H3MOd FOVIIOA YG Tu YC T MIS Yi enl 1 p _ 9 29 525 k coy 94 99 M gay gt CA pm NEA 5 _ 39 N ISA d D gt i ole COX Quvog x Piy Liv 1 o i YATIONLNOOONDIN MNIS1V3H is 197 791 zy 7379 Sl Ly M N N 4 lL ALON 13S M 5 H LH io A N N el 1 S 6X TE ie AlddnS M3MOd 19 M9 je T TE 5 S Lv 0
159. 3Ab ON OFF PWM3 analog output OFF as magnitude plus sign E Pw1SI vedere 2 Uscita analogica PWMI1 2 Parameters for the output meaning selection soa _ leet puna N speed feedback lao armature current reference la armature current feedback Ud armature voltage Flu motor flux Ifo field current reference If field current feedback supply line voltage DM4 698W PwlOt 100 PWM1 analog output Output offset compensation parameters d Pw20f o 100 PWM2 analog output Ae Pw30f 100 PWM3 analog output DM7 104W 100 200 analog output Parameters for the output recalibration 100 200 PWM2 analog output aii 100 200 PWM3 analog output IMSPDO027I 107 B List of parameters SILCOPAC D Code Default Values Description xi Group N DIGITAL INPUTS 13 digital inputs are available 5 1 13 RAMP XM1 14 INTREF1 XM1 15 INTREF2 XM1 16 1 1 17 0 2 1 18 3 1 19 1 20 5 1 21 on the control board and COM4 XM6 1 2 5 6 3 4 0 6 6 5 6 7 6 7 8 on the SPDIO optional board The 7 parameters in grey are programmable terminals 1 17 22 connector 1 11 5 010 Nota This group includes the parameters COM2 terminals XM1 18 22 COMS connector X1 12 SPDIO
160. 4 EY bM az l gx ZHL LHI aay EE CX _ __ AV 6 NO 392311 L9X LA BE E Lev Z Z L viv t 09X 19 01 NO 09XL 724 LV ev T A 54 C 25 zy uq 59 28 ju i Dc 4541 N AS 6 ZNO S PT E 3l I lt 7 a gt 1 Pu JS O1 ZNO C wei Wet Wor wei x1 N 5 6X A EY V r 01 ae E in 19 2 M Loy 1 2 r de ps AA Me LS nm dy J Z ENO F 55 gt ze 3l 3e 8 16 Lrr voolc 65 5 0 zi 1700 p j z 9 Sz 89 7004 E N N l 08 0591 85 1 9SX J ESX 4 aie a CMM ER Sit 08 0061 OLX wyo P N 7 JZML ej 5 68X 86X GX 9GX 375 Zy KD 3 9 T o 4 gt JOVLIOA NIVW A09 4n 0 MOS uuo u N388nNS 05 2086 n G NO 31891 20718 NOLOJNNOO GLVSOLV NANYOISNVYLOLNY s gt a xe a 2 4 A067 gt 5 M3MOd O O O JOVLIOA q N a 2 1099 gt AlddAS YMOd Y99Nd 8000030161 V 745 1 1005 gt ATddNS
161. 4 CKA CKB CKC CK3 CK1 CK2 2 1 TK2 TK3 TK4 TKS TK6 TK7 Set to ON to enable the function Set to the value according to the proper tension reference source M Pot tension reference from software motopotentiometer 0 100 Com1 command increases the reference value Com2 decreases the reference value terminals XM1 17 XM1 18 Rif tension reference from Rif analog input 0 100 terminals XM1 33 34 Eanl tension reference from Ean1 analog input 0 100 terminals XM1 29 31 P tension reference from 4 parameter 0 100 Set to the value according to the proper tension feedback source Serial tension feedback from hidden parameter Addr 242 default 0 limits 20090 20090 Ean2 tension feedback from Ean2 analog input 0 100 terminals 1 30 31 Tach tension feedback from Tach analog input 0 100 terminals XM1 26 27 jumpers 8 9 10 11 12 Set to the tension reference value if CJ 1 _ 4 Set to OFF if the tension transducer load cell dandy roll etc precedes the converter Set to ON if the tension transducer follows the converter See par 8 6 Set to ON if the bumpless insertion of the tension regulator is desired at the OFF to ON transition of Com3 command the tension reference is equalled to the tension feedback allowing the regulator enable with null error Set to OFF if the integral gain of the tension regulator 1 has to be c
162. 6 Milano Italy Manufacturer s Address Operation Site S S 11 C Sordis 4 36054 Montebello Vicentino VI Italy peni DECLARES on its own exclusive responsibility that the products Product Product Family Silcopac D SPDM Product Description AC DC Converters with currents from 30 A to 4000 A have to installed according to our installation manuals cannot be operated until the machine in which they are incorporated and within which they are considered to be components has been declared complying with the Machinery Directive 98 37 EC Answer Drives S r l Director 5 Montebello Vicentino 2007 September 30 Ambrogio The Quality System of Answer Drives S r l is certified ISO 9001 2000 Certificate issued on 05 October 1994 by RINA wawahswer DRIVES Answer Drives S r l Head Office Viale Sarca 336 20126 Milano Italia Operation Site S S 11 C Sordis 4 36054 Montebello Vicentino VI Italia Ph 39 0444 449268 F 4390444 449276 1000087621 www answerdrives com
163. 6 logic command available with the SPDIO hardware option COM7 The acquisition of the zero speed tension reference occurs atthe rising edge of COM7 logic command available with the SPDIO hardware option d jo 0 100 Tension reference value 0 100 Zero speed tension reference value Selection of the waveform used to apply the function nd Linear Taper function Hyperbolic Taper function P 10 0 1 99 9 Diameter value starting from which the Taper function begins Value of the tension reference when the Taper function is enabled and the diameter reached 0 100 max value 100 9 Tension reference time 464W TTONO 10s 0255 Alltension reference changes and all switching from zero speed tension reference to actual tension reference and vice versa are filtered through this ramp time The value set on CJ 9 actually matches the time expressed in seconds only if CD3 2 10ms Otherwise time can be calculated with the following formula T s 2 CJ 9 CD3 10ms IMSPDO027I 223 E Optional functions SILCOPAC D Code Name Default Values Description Group BACKLASH COMP Note this group includes the parameters for the backlash compensation function 498W Function enable Itis aS absolute value the value assumed by the current limits during the time set by 01 00 parameter after the bridge reversing
164. 600 D G SKKT250 14E ELC 20636028 SPDM600 H SKKT250 18E ELC 20636030 SPDMIK1H SKET400 18E ELC 20648310 SPDM1M1 U RH TT500N 500A 2 ELC21980702 SPDM1K5 1007522 ELC20281403 SPDMIK5 W AT1007524 ELC20281404 SPDM1K5 SPDM1K6 D G AT1004516 ELC20052104 SPDM1K7 K SPDM2K2K 655520 ELC20565501 SPDM1K7 W SPDM2K2W 6555 24 ELC 20565503 SPDM1K7 M N SPDM2K2M N SPDM2K1 D G 636516 ELC20559003 SPDM2K5 G 636514 ELC20559002 SPDM2K5 K AT655X20 ELC22203802 SPDM2K5 W AT655X24 ELC22203803 SPDM2K5 M N SPDM3K1 G 7375 14 ELC22164902 SPDM3K1 K 737520 22164904 SPDM3K1 W 847 24 ELC22109703 SPDM3K6 D G 738514 ELC40803102 SPDM3K6 K 738520 ELC40803104 SPDM3K6 W 84717524 ELC408029 SPDM3K6 M N AT847LTS26X ELC 408030 SPDM4K0 D AT738LTS 14X ELC 408028 SPDMAKOW 73817523 ELC40803503 No more available superseded 92 IMSPD027I B1 PARAMETERS The final set up of the converter is completed by assigning the proper value to every parameter through the user interface however the parameters requiring adjustments by the user are often minimal because many of them normally require the default value Default value means a factory setting value stored in the EPROM memory that the system automatically acquire if the user doesn t insert a different value through the interface Grey shaded areas point out the most important parameters to be set or verified in the simplest applications The new pa
165. 8 joe 5 2 1 49 1 r3 n aie Lv 2 LO LY ply E X a 6 ENO SAX 498 lt 0 ips lt 0 EF 01 9 w 3 4 4 K 09X VA OX 44 LHL A 5 Wri Wei WOv dedu k SIA 6 14 3581 LIX 6x gx wa lt L j CURES J OL ZNO T rake x OLY 4 a A lt a FT SCOT zy ZX 29 Lofy trend SSX c 31 E NN N N M A E 2 x js 397 SP Sx rax Jl dy Mv 4l I N K 00 lt 2 100 _ a 6 vS 0 v00 Z 99 00 GX E vG O VOOZ louva LO Sx x a Q4vOS V 357 a ZA Ly V ci 97 058 gt NIVA 404 3 0 H38HnNS A0S9 009 335 J 2 N 52 A008 JFOVLIOA AML 401 2 YagENNS 006 089 SIHWeIO JS Vel LOLTIV dc 9 LA 51 2 KI JMVOS GSLOSSO SLV OLV JOVIIOA SUL 95510550114 lt 01 NIV n 099 gt FOVLIOA NIV ONY AlddNS N3MOd 9 0000730101 EA 310N Em 2 lt 006 gt NIV
166. 9 LO LM TEN ERE E ez j C ug p ZNO M VIX 84 1 u i NO MS a _ pes _ JG a Jd 2 59 vOL 90 di T oe ilt y 03785 LIM g E c k lt 1 gt G CNO a y CS ES A i i ene R 9 CN2 _ LLX z q JU ZING 83 4 9X dN3143 O0 S ANISLV 3H 7 need hot uae n 5 5 1 3LON 335 19 291 C 9 Loy Lo g 2 s M M M M oO AlddnS YaMOd AO 55 qyuvog Od 831081 NOOOSOIA whale L 49 y9 J J J rus ee v PAX L Z 195 HVONVIS 6X 8 0994159 E 2 LM CNX 3 46 LIX 75 1 er 6 1941 L9X M e 1 1 e Y E sie T 2 ema OND 1 LV BA ebk Alddns 013154 1vNOlLdO E SER 5 lt gt mE 77 9 6 ZNO e e 5 31 o
167. ACE PRINTING MENU SELFTUNING PROTE amp ALARMS 2nd level GROUPS list of the groups corresponding to the 1st level selected function when the desired option appears 3rd level PARAMETERS list of the parame ters corresponding to the 2nd level selected parameter selected group U D U D U D Figure C1 3 NOTE The symbol U D means that it is required to push the button Up or Down to scroll the list upward downward stopping The symbol E means that pushing the ENTER button the selected option is confirmed and the next level will be displayed The symbol M means that pushing the MODE button at any instance the previous menu level will be displayed IMSPD027 113 C User Interface SILCOPAC D A generic operating sequence shown with marked lines in the previous figure 15 the following 1 the display shows a first level function e g STATUS using the buttons U D the list of the first level functions is scrolled stopping on the desired option e g TUNING PARAMETERS 2 pushing ENTER the second level will be entered the display shows the first group of the selected function e g CURRENT REG 3 using the buttons U D the groups list is scrolled stopping on the chosen option e g SPEED REG 4 pushing ENTER button the third level will be entered the display shows the first parameter of the selected group e g TC1N 5 using the buttons U D the parameters list is
168. Accurate speed ratio it provides the hardware software configuration of the Accurate speed ratio dedicated version along with commissioning procedures IMSPD010A Spindle it provides the hardware software configuration of the Spindle dedicated version along with commissioning procedures IMSPD026A Diagnostic interface for SPDM via Personal Computer 1 3 Reception check When the equipment is received the packing must not show damages Opening the packing check that the contents may meet the purchasing order verifying the code chapter 4 on the plate located on the converter side Plate Serial Number Product test date Power suppli Voltage 3PH Line Frequency and Phases OUTPUT Rated output Voltage V VOLTAGE DUTYCL IEC 146 40 c Code Bar Code Check that required options have been included in the packing chapter 9 section Each equipment is accompanied by the following documents Testing report Code 8CP 9998 Dedicated SW Manual if any Parametric sheets Testing configuration Check that the socket mounted components board C and the customizing jumpers are in the same configuration as shown by the Converter control document In the instruction manual you can find a blank copy of the Converter control sheet we recommend to fill this document to have always a copy of the Converter setting after the setting up The options
169. C1 TC2 and respectively 2 TC1 TJ 3 TC2 and TJ 4 2 TC5 198 IMSPDO27I SILCOPAC D E Optional functions 2 INERTIA COMPENSATION The function is normally used in speed regulated systems where the motor drives a very inertial load When a speed variation has to be impressed to these systems the machine inertia must be compensated introducing a summing term to the current reference which depends on the speed variation itself E2 1 Parameters setting Function enable CM1 Const Calculation of the term for the compensation as function of the speed variations CM6 Setto the machine acceleration time value as seconds E2 2 Measure of the machine acceleration time It is defined as machine acceleration time the period which the motor takes to reach the basic speed starting from zero speed when it operates at the nominal armature current It can be measured according to the following sequence SetDM3 parameter to N value to configure the P wm3 logic output as signal proportional to the speed default value par 8 3 2 connecta scope to Pwm3 logic output terminals XM 1 40 41 sSetscope to 2V div seta scope timebase adequate to display the complete phenomena e g 2 5 s div SetDC4 parameter to the value programmed on 087 parameter SETUP REFERENCE function set an armature current reference FIXED equal to the value set the 086 parameter nominal motor current
170. C2 DCN Stil 13 Motor in stall conditions The intervention occurs if the stall time with the motor in 551 5 ii current limit conditions rises beyond the value set by DC6 This protection is not active if the current limit is lower than 25 of lay The lay value is set by 286 See DDF parameter too 102 IMSPD027 SILCOPAC D B List of parameters Code Name Default Values Description 14 Leg failure This protection is enabled when at least two phases fuse failure or open DCO Leg ON OFF contactors are missing during regulation In more details the protection intervention occurs if 5516 ata certain time the following condition is true armature current 0 armature voltage 0 phase shift angle o lt 80 For proper operation the DA2 parameter must be programmed 60 100 Intervention threshold of the line under voltage protection as 90 of the rated line value t 115 100 120 Intervention threshold of the line over voltage protection as of the nominal line value Fld 109 1 50 Intervention threshold of the min excitation protection Td 115 0 124 Intervention threshold of the motor speed protection a 120 100 124 Intervention threshold of the max armature voltage protection DC6 158 5 0 25 Time period after which the stall protection occurs if the motor is in steady and current limit 5628 2 m conditions E 100 0 150 n of the motor thermal protection
171. C4p TC4 parameter previous value 5 5 where TC5p 2 TC5 parameter previous value The upper current limit is acquired at Ean1 analog input that is driven by the Master converter Commands 1 and Com2 act on the DJ 3 parameter which recalibrates the Eanl analog input 1 increase Com2 decrease allowing load share The resulting torque is however a variable percentage of the Master converter torque If the Helper slave converter slips then the speed regulator goes out of its saturation status and avoids the motor exceeding the master speed plus the invitation speed If the speed reference has a negative value the function drives the lower current limit and the term related to the invitation speed will be subtracted Com3 command falling edge the DJ 3 parameter is written in the EEprom memory to store the last imposed load share Note P wm2 analog output is normally reserved to the field current reference IMSPD027I 179 D Auxiliary functions SILCOPAC D D2 Pope SYSTEM FEEDBACK No Com3 Parameters CEB ON Pope aux function enabled CB2 AuxAdd Speed reference summing term from aux function 10 Speed reference summing term CA2 AuxRic Current limit control from aux function DN3 OFF CB4 Program with the value of the ramp time for the motopotentiometer which is used for the load share Commands Com3 terminal XM1 19 P
172. E 1500A 53574 TVNOlLdO x I en 9x07 84 4 O 0 0 ISNVML lt 2906 0 6 29 0 85 V E t AE vOOIZ 0061 3715 lt oio 1 3 Yugu yr T OL LNO Z 045 NER ga VR GN VA LX LA VIX gt v 1 3 1 y 6 tNO ua M ZO 01 7 e 29 1 m NJMOT8 92 3 2 2 CN NGA MCA M E d us 51 d cene TS uy Z LNO ap a 22 AZA 9 Ja G4 JSA n NE uM L CHI 31 C V ZLY M NZ E P gt I c y LAY 19 297 Z y su NES 5 ale N Nu MOON N J EN 5 3 r r j 5 09 __ NM E 1 E 209 08 uS 52 zs 4 9 2 0 JE 8 lt ae MIML ELE m 5 DE HOA ul T ii N lt Ji ka 1 AN JNJ CIX 39A A gt 94 ASA AC 1 Pst C viv LLY M 1 335 15 29 29 LI q 9 zH09 0S M N N M N N M O x lt AlddNS M3MOd 0Z 01 4007 C quy og diN3L83A0 r4 MATIONLNOOONIIN NISL Wc 39 J ig J vem oie Y
173. ELC21242901 ELC21242901 ELC21242802 1000094223 1000094223 ELC21242803 ELP21242903 ELC21242804 ELC40803808 ELC40803808 ELC21242806 ELC 40803804 ELC 40803804 SILCOPAC D DC Fuses ELC20653303 ELC20653403 _ ELC20653405 ELC20653405 ELC407417 _ 2 2 ELC407417 lt ELCA0803804 ELC40803804 ELC21242807 ELC40803806 ELC40803806 2 MC3E1 S FERRAZ 170H0069 BUSSMANN MC3E2 5 FERRAZ 42 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D A Technical features A7 4 Line reactors The three phase supply line of the converter should have in series with any phase an equivalent reactance whose voltage drop at the nominal phase current Ij 0 82 Iy has a value the range 2 4 of the phase voltage this value includes all existing reactances including the line and possible transformer If the equivalent reactance will be insufficient an additional reactance should be provided 1 three phase type or 3 single phase type with value equal to the difference between the shown value and the total existing one Plate current flowing in the additional reactance 0 82 IN where Iy Silcopac D converter nominal current or if known the RMS value of the permanently delivered current NOTE In order for the converter to operate properly an optimum power supply system must be provided for installing suitable protections to prevent operating overvoltages from reaching values which could be dangerous for the converter
174. ENT LOOP Step response verification It is recommended to avoid this test if the static stability verification shows some critical areas According to the same conditions of the previous verification set the parameter DG8 100 and the parameter DG9 0 1s through the SETUP REFERENCE function par C1 3 7 set a square wave current reference SQUARE with center value equal to 0 The waveform displayed on the scope must be as shown in the following figure gt GOOD RESPONSE SLOW RESPONSE RESPONSE OVERSHOOT la la la t t Restore the motor field circuit re enable the If F parameter CDF ON and stale parameter DCN protections SPEED LOOP Static stability verification To display the speed signal it is required that one of the analog outputs terminals 37 38 39 41 XM1 40 41 par 7 1 1 be programmed as N DM1 DM2 DM3 parameter Connect the scope to test points TP24 25 or 26 par C3 9 depending on the analog output programmed as N signal and to test point TP8 ground of board C Set the scope time base to a value higher than 1s div and the vertical scale factor to 1 V div or 2 V div Through the SETUP REFERENCE function par C1 3 7 set a continuous speed reference CONT SPEED REF at each speed change of about 5 verify that the waveform 15 like the following figure The stability over the whole range from 0 to 100 an
175. ERS Active changeable groups Base speed 96 OFF As per par CB3 as per par DB7 IMSPD027I 191 D Auxiliary functions SILCOPAC D 014 Logic Outputs The logic outputs can be customized to signal if the field current is lower than the parameter new parameter IfThr The signalling of current for a field lower than CC4 is obtained by programming the parameters DO1 D06 corresponding to outputs OUT1 OUT6 as If C C4 Ithas also been introduced the hystheresis on the signalling N gt CE 6 The extension of the hysteresis is established by parameter D15 Traces The DRIVE TRACE and the THYRISTOR TRACE can be blocked besides by the intervention of a protection also by the external logic input COM2 The possibility to block the two traces from the outside allows to display the status of the drive in a special moment with no need for a protection to operate The traces after the stop can be printed in any moment provided that power supply to the control is not switched off nor a reset is made The function which allows the stop of the traces from COM2 is enabled with the parameter DGD C2Stop new parameter The traces are frosted in correspondence of the transition low gt high of COM2 the restart of the traces is obtained e by disabling the function DGD or e resetting the converter e passing from the status of protection suppression to the status of regulation indepen
176. ES arranged on the rear of the unit must have the following configuration B 1 2 3 ON 4 ON 2 3 The following picture shows the connection of the SPDI2 Interface to SP DM control board and to the printer Flat cable 20 pin length max 2 m C board Flat cable Centronics SPDI2 only This function allows to copy on a parallel printer connected to the SPDI2 interface the data and the information of the converter resumed in list a here below described The Trace prints are very useful for diagnostics and documentation purposes a Trace is a series of sequential records executed every fixed time intervals of a significant data group these data allow to analyse the converter operation in order to optimise the converter itself and to put in evidence some eventual failures going back to the origin 126 5 027 SILCOPAC D C User Interface 1st level using buttons U D select the Printing Menu function SELECT FUNCTION PRINTING MENU U D press ENTER to access to the 2nd level 2nd level using buttons U D select from list a the desired item PRINTING MENU press ENTER to access to the 3rd level the print of the data associated to the selected item will be enabled the print can be aborted pressing MODE 3rd level the print is terminated by message END OF PRINT PRESS ENTER pressing ENTER
177. Errthe following self assignment is generated Aux3 N Err m 01009 Amplitude of the square wave selected in SETUP REFERENCE E 0 110s Period ofthe square wave selected in SETUP REFERENCE 6 analog inputs are available Rif XM 1 32 34 Ean1 3XM 1 29 Ean2 XM 1 30 Tach XM 1 26 1 28 1 32 Eanl Ean2 Tach If are programmable Group H ANALOG INP OFS Note iThis group includes the parameters for the analog inputs offset compensation as of the full scale value 526W 100 gen input Tach Terminals XM1 26 27 5 100 Field current input If Terminals XM1 28 31 E10fs 100 Programmable input 1 Terminals 1 29 31 a 2015 100 Programmable input Ean2 Terminals XM1 30 31 UdOfs o 100 Armature voltage input Varm Terminals XM1 32 31 ia 100 Ref diff input Rif Terminals XM1 33 34 Group J ANALOG INP This group includes the parameters for the analog inputs gain adjustment the parameters for the transducers recalibration are included too supply line voltage and armature current Gain 100 means 1 fm om paeem wee Programmable input 1 terminals 1 29 31 Programmable input Ean2 terminals XM1 30 31 Armature voltage input Varm terminals XM1 32 31 Ref diff input Rif terminals XM1 33 34 Group ANALOG INP FLT K ANALOG INP FLT each analog input
178. ION Ud F max armature voltage 4 cod 4 PROTECTION If F motor field loss 5 cod 5 PROTECTION TachF tacho loss 6 cod 6 PROTECTION Fan F blowing loss 7 7 PROTECTION MotOh motor over temperature 8 cod 8 PROTECTION ConOh converter over temperature 9 cod 9 PROTECTION Ser F serial comm loss 10 cod A PROTECTION NMax max motor speed 11 cod B PROTECTION UvOut line volt beyond toler 12 cod C PROTECTION Stale motor in stall cond 13 cod D PROTECTION Leg_F leg failure 14 cod E SUPPR pulse suppression Disable HW Com3 terminal XM1 19 disabled 0 4 all tests passed Disable HW M13 terminal XM 1 13 disabled cod 1 no protections active Disable Serial serial generated disabling 2 Disable OptFun opt funct generated disabl cod 3 REGUL converter regulating AUXL ius first aux variable with run consent second aux variable Aux3 third aux variable No messe MS ns speed tolerance rpm N fs speed feedback lao fs armature current reference la 96 f5 armature current feedback Ud 96 fs V armature voltage Flu motor flux Ifo fs field current reference f fs field current feedback Uvo 96 fs V line voltage alfa thyristor firing delay electr degree The values of list b with the exception of 1 Aux2 Aux3 Flu can be m
179. If F protection Instrument Mode function par C1 3 5 is lowerthan the SPAE1 exciter par C2 5 Execute the field Intervention ot occur 15 reference 0 current adjustment par 2 8 FAIL HYPOTHESIS CHECKS ACTIONS Poor mechanical coupling Check the oil levels Restore the proper lubrication conditions Poor mechanical coupling Check the mechanical coupling of the motor to the Restore the proper mechanical work conditions load Current loop instability Check the current loop response par C3 9 Execute the automatic adjustment of the current di through the CURRENT SELFTUN function par C2 10 1 FALL CHECKS ACTIONS Disturbances on the regulation Check for the proper connection of the ground wires Make the proper connection of the ground Signals par 7 2 Check that the reference and speed feed wires par A7 2 Modify the reference and back wires are not placing them far away of the speed feedback wires path placing them far possible near to noise sources Check the efficiency away of the possible noise sources Insert some of the filters placed on the devices wired in the HF filters on the cabinet devices cabinet regulation circuits connections Too slow response of the speed Check the speed loop response par 2 10 4 Execute the automatic adjustment of the speed regulator through the SPEED SELFTUNING function par C2 10 2 margin is available on the convert
180. MP OPERATING SET gt ALT CURRENT D ALT SPEED ALT RAMP The regulation parameters related to the current regulator to the speed regulator and to the ramp handling can be programmed in a double set The change from one set to another occurs by Com3 logic command terminal XM1 19 allowing the use of a converter to drive two motors having different characteristics in the same application The changeable parameters are listed in the TUNING PARAMETERS and subdivided into the following groups Ist SET 2nd SET CURRENT REG B ALT CURRENT C SPEED REG D ALT SPEED RAMP F ALT RAMP DN3 parameter must be programmed as Par When Com3 logic command terminal XM 1 19 is active the 2nd set parameters are enabled when not active the 1st set parameters are enabled IMSPDO027I 187 D Auxiliary functions SILCOPAC D D10 Field reversing The function field inversion is used in the applications in which it is required a bidirectonal regenerative operation from a motor supplied with an unidirectional converter SILCOPAC D in short SP DM Differently from what occurs when using a reversible converter the torque inversion is managed by operating on the field current instead of on the armature current The constant of time of the field circuit is much more greater than that of the armature current of the motor for which the whole phase of inversion may require a relatively long
181. O MEM ME J L INO dy GNX M 2 SEC gt 2 ZIS 1715 4 up J 2 142 x COE 93 Gd lt d M LO 3800 009 ai A 1 EU io 9 9 gt Q 4I NN dA N Mo TZ N M 5 4 I 8 S X 2 N 7 E k GO 69 G v gt 2 ax lt 7 x Y gt lt gt lt S ZNO VINX X M lt 9 4 YC lt j 9 NIM 3 01 99141939 91314 T te lt EC GA YC ime oti A o5 4 O3VdS 2 p Wve FEN A TA gt 4 2 e rd N gt xs 5 2 A 2 lt lt gt LX S 9 LA 9 29 A 2 Esa i u pope 4 io gt 9 0 2 N S mo 5 NZ NZ y ey ti 2 dM 1 3 d V 59 y gt V GO 9 D s E 25 lt 5 Tf A SANA E M M311081NO203OIIA J S L 9 MO J Jo J V 19 49 AZ YaLY3ANOO Gil
182. O 9 O gt gt gt II AF II 1 5 G O II per gt CN3 Bt DK AK1 KMCAM AK3 QO V521 1 SR III 10 H gt II II CN4 gt i Lb mmm AMCKM AK5 PONTE REVERSIBILE 4 QUADRANT BRIDGE TAGLIA SIZE A 500 600 IRISTORE THYRISTOR A 210 50 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D Appendix D Bridges Layout M
183. O9 0G UI UM A O Nae Y ayyog 1 d V FOU E WE m SE m O q KC NOU XT IC 5 Clo SW 4311041 NO2032 9 16 52 Z VEN OO VO L LIX Map E il 6 NO 2981 e 5 A ns lt gt gt ava jg J 01 9 5 C OSXL A 3 U ZNO e n m LV 9 AlddNS 91313 OlLdO 6 ZNO 1641 ide ap 6 NO M 9 CS J vA TERM 5 94112 aes 45 091 NO A INV k A 6 lt 1 6X gx gt JL o 57 13 15 5 79 val gt 9 M 9 p ro 2 x OND 5 e dy J CENO m t e 2 2 SSX O yi gr m ZNA 69X E T L ZNO 4 s 99 5 p Z ZNO ae TIT s 4 e LL IE gt N FUN 1
184. Off 001 Outils Alarm 002 Out2S la Lim D03 0485 Bridge D04 0 45 Enable 005 OutS ErrN O 006 Out6S UdF ail e P MAGNET CHAR DP1 t 49 0 2 MK 5 400 DP6 9 8 14 6 0 4 244 70 0 1 027 245 Appendix C Configuration Parameters SILCOPAC D 246 IMSPD027I APPENDIX D Bridges Layout Nota Codes 61 62 K1 K2 shown in diagram for the gate and catode connections may not be the same on the thyristors depending on the manufacturer Verify the label on the side of the thyristor 5 sS _ E Ss u CN z 2 V 4 V VO LIN NIDIREZILINA QUADRANT BRIDGE AGIA SUE 0 30 60 80 110 160 200 9 26 70 70 90 90 105 5 IMSPD027I 247 Appendix D Bridges Layout SILCOPAC D lt 2 A fo ff A L JP i V N V x7 Y V L PONTE UNIDIREZIONALE 2 QUADRANT BRIDGE TAGLIA SIZE 26013501450 RISTURE THYRISTOR A 130
185. P AX E J gt 2 2 2 2 QNI NV GYVGNVLS 77 52 13100 u 611084 44 Q M E 5 dus 15 IMSPD027I A Technical features SILCOPAC D 240 ZEN 3 1 71 NAE J R OUTPUT ON STAN 16 HOLES i E 560 LO m HICH SPEED 5 V z CABLE CONNECTION P 1 o li ue lt D N n 7 E D Lu n T u C2 CO 4 4 can E S 5 2 8 j _ In 1 dL 3 4 5 6 XM3 D QJ m lt T 15 140 55 15 5 c 4 j i s A 5 EYEBOLTS M12 ae y 5s 5 ER SUPP Be Z bu 7 3 2 PA X M 3 X 1 1 ko ad 2 MS uA N D lt gt P gt 7
186. P13 par C2 15 show the right encoder pulses Encoder feedback data recorded on the DRIVE TRACE par C1 3 9 show that Reverse the connections at the Reversed encoder channels the speed feedback has opposite sign in respectto the encoder terminals Terminal XM 1 6 reference Setting an angle reference on the forward bridge the to XM1 8 and terminal 7 to Set up Reference function par C1 3 7 gives a negative sign of 9 terminal 8 to the speed 6 and terminal 1 9 to 1 7 Tacho feedback Tacho loss data recorded the DRIVE TRACE C1 3 9 show that Check the tacho generator wires the speed is zero while the armature voltage has a value higher integrity and the proper connection than the value of the parameter 002 Setting an angle reference to terminals 26 27 the Set up Reference function par C1 3 7 gives a zero speed Replace the tacho generator and the voltage atterminals 26 27 is zero Tacho feedback Erroneous Check the setting of Tach analog input customizing jumpers 8 Set properly jumpers P9 settting of the Tach analog P9 P10 11 12 10 11 eJ P 12 input terminals XM1 26 27 Tacho feedback The data recorded on the DRIVE TRACE par C1 3 9 showthat Replace C board Failure of the analog input the speed is zero while the armature voltage has a value higher acquisition circuit than the
187. PAM SPDME Exciter SPDME C Board 37 41 SPATE Exciter ENEEEN EE COEUR Terminal board If there is a main contactor on the input terminals of the exciter itis necessary connect a normally open contact NO of the contactor to the SPDM terminals XM1 20 e XM1 23 IMSPD027I C Setting up SILCOPAC D C2 6 3 Verifying the proper setting of the voltage transducer Itis necessary to regulate in angle the forward bridge thyristors paying a particular attention since in this mode of operation current and speed regulators are removed Actas follows 1 10 11 12 NOTE 146 With START command disabled terminal XM1 13 supply control exciter and power the led on the panel will display the suppression status H 1 flashing Select the INSTRUMENT MODE function then select Ud armature voltage and N speed signal Select the SETUP REFERENCE function and then select ANGLE REF FRW press lt enter gt an angle of 165 degrees will be displayed decrease this angle to 105 degrees do not press lt enter gt Connect a dc voltmeter to SPDM terminals KM and AM Enable the START command the led on the panel will display the regulation status with zero speed O or not flashing Press enter the display will automatically show Ud and N If the motor works at a speed higher than 296 of the nominal speed the indication of the led on the panel will change from O to F forward r
188. S 232 is enabled and parameter CA1 Serial and parameter NOTE 1 lt gt Serial the serial link loss protection is not enabled If the conditions for the protection intervention occur the possibility to change the serial link parameters is disabled to re enable it reset the converter When the supply is removed from the converter voluntarily or by a line loss the first occurred protection is stored When the supply is restored the system verifies if any protections are stored in this case the converter goes in protection conditions displaying the stored protection Pressing the reset pushbutton the system will be restored The line loss protection intervention is not stored if the converter is in Suppression or external protection status The external protection intervention is not stored No protection is stored when the parameter CDA OFF and jumper J is inserted on pins 2 3 paragraph C 3 8 IMSPDO027I 117 C User Interface SILCOPAC D C1 3 2 Configuration parameters This function configures the system sets the choices made about the converter structure for example speed feedback from tacho generator or encoder current reference from speed regulator or from external device etc using buttons U D 1st level select the Configuration Parameters function SELECT FUNCTION CONF PARAMETERS U D press ENTER before accessing to the 2nd level the password is requested at step 1 this is mandatory only if one wa
189. S S ES VQ PDN N RR AN SS BU tL Ho aS 224 4 OZAN LC 1 sis _ N E SS Se gt CN CN y w TT IMSPD027I 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 1 SILCOPAC D O lt loo Al A A N CN SISTER EET N N j HEL SANA 00 o o NNNM 1 ___ _ i ____ _ _ ____ 4 11 B T AAAA NP Wu _
190. SPAE1 through a flat cable from X11 connector on C board to X11 connector of the SPAE1 jumper J P25 closed on pins 2 3 par C2 8 1 external exciter through 1 28 terminal jumper J P 25 closed on pins 1 2 par C2 8 2 FAIL HYPOTHESIS Inside Exciter CHECKS The data recorded on the DRIVETRACE par C1 3 9 show Loss of the connection from C board that the field current is practically zeroed The field current to the exciter through the P board Inside Exciter The exciter doesn t receive the field current reference from C board through the P board Inside Exciter The output field current is not correct Outside Exciter The exciter doesn t receive the field current reference from C board Outside Exciter The protection occurs also if the exciter feed the right current Fault Exciter with E M F regulator disabled CCA parameter set to OFF Inside Exciter Fault or not adjusted exciter with E M F regulator disabled CCA parameter set to ON IMSPD027 read through the Hardware Status par C1 3 6 at the Analog Input item is practically zero Check the setting of jumper INT SPD on 5 par 2 5 2 Check that DM2 parameter be programmed as Ifo Check that DM5 and DM8 parameters be properly set par C2 8 Check the setting of jumper INT SPD on 5 1 par C2 5 2 Check the proper adjustement of the trimmer P2 on the SPAEI Check that DM2 parameter be progr
191. SPDM850 is right to the application First solution Load resistors change The table C2 3 shows the CT turns ratio Ns 4000 by the formula 1 it is possible the calculate the load resistors value 5000 7 6 1050 5 N R 2 P this ohmic value can be obtained by connecting in parallel one resistor Ry56 57 10 with second resistor 8 59 33 Second solution Parameter DJ 8 change Instead off changing the load resistors it is possible to adjust the parameter DJ 8 according the formula 2 DJ8 100 lay 123 5 850 In both cases the parameter that must be modified are the following DA3 350 Current size of the converter DB3 300 New full scale value of the current DB6 100 138 ay 5 027 SILCOPAC D C Setting up C2 4 C Board customizing Before applying power to Silcopac D verify the following connections see par C 2 8 JP1 open 2 JP3 jumper pins 1 2 the optional board SP DS must be removed 4 jumper pins 1 2 JP5 open JP6 jumper as 3 JP7 jumper pins 2 3 J P8 9 10 11 12 if the speed feedback transducer is an encoder the position of these jumpers is unimportant while if it is a tacho generator evaluate the max tacho voltage value and insert the related jumper only as described in par C2 7 2 terminal XM 1 26 Example max motor speed 1500 rpm tacho voltage 60V at 1000 rpm max Tach
192. TJ T 8000 Integral gain of the motor speed regulator after the positioning 714 speed regulato lead lag network derivative section after positioning 0255 Filter typical frequencies have the following values filter pole Wp TJ4 20 48 rad s filter zero Wz T 4 102 4 rad s To disable the filter set TJ 4 0 Group K LOAD CELL 1 9999 Proportional gain of the tension regulator 0 8000 Integral gain of the tension regulator 0 100 Positive limit of the tension regulator output m 2 100 0 Negative limit of the tension regulator output TK5 Forward limit of the speed regulator after the tension regulator correction active only when 100 minm the regulator is enabled by command Com3 0N Reverse limit of the speed regulator after the tension regulator correction active only when Stow m 120 0 the regulator is enabled by command 3 x 0 255 lead lag network derivative section on the TENSION regulator feedback Filter typical frequencies have the following values filler pole Wp TK7 20 48 rad s filter zero Wz TK7 102 4 rad s To disable the filter set TK7 0 IMSPD027 225 E Optional functions SILCOPAC D 226 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D E Optional functions APPLICATION EXAMPLES AXIAL WINDER WITH INDIRECT TENSION CONTROL We suppose to program a SP DM that controls a winder with the following characteristics Coil core diameter
193. TOR REGULATOR CURRENT Checks The offsets of the analog inputs must be properly set to zero through the parameters DH3 and that the full scales are correctly calibrated Drives Master and Slave in suppression H 1 Program with the value lao value 0 the parameter DM1 of Master converter by using the function Hardware Status verify the reading on the analog input Ean1 of both drives if the reading is different from zero compensate the offset by programming with the correct value the parameter DH3 for both drives Program with the value 100 the parameter DM4 of Master converters by using the function Hardware Status verify the reading on the analog input Ean1 of both drives if the reading is different from 100 regauge the inputs and program with the correct value the parameters DJ 3 for both drives Calibration of current regulator Carry out the calibration of and by operating only on the Master converter and keeping the rotor locked with Slave converter disabled the values of TA1 and TA2 on the Slave converter With rotor locked by using the function Setup Reference paragraph C 1 3 7 only on the Master enable both the drives set a current reference and check the stability of the current Repeat the same test for different values of current reference and if necessary refine the calibration of the current regulator by operating on the parameters TA1 and TA2 on both the drives 286 IMSPD027I
194. The CT CT1 primary circuit mounted on the phase W of the exciter board is made by two turns that can be connected in parallel or in series depending on the desired field current range 12 6 12 P JP2 To obtain the correct field current range it is necessary to customize the jumper P2 configuration on the exciter SPAE1A as 3A 6A 6A 12A shown by the following diagram 1 6A 3A The customizing is made by closing jumpers on the four turrets located near the CT as shown by the following diagram 1 6A 0 8 The silk screen printing that shows the information to customize the jumper J P2 can be found at the left down side of the board near the XM4 terminal block 140 IMSPDO27I SILCOPAC D C Setting up Jumpers P2 INT SPD P1 Q e Silk screen C2 5 2 Configuration of the field current reference source SPAE1A The jumper J 1 allows selecting two closed on INT field current reference comes from P2 trimmer on 5 1 possible sources of the field curent DOGG reference B closed on SPD field current reference comes from C board by means of X11 connection see E M F Regulator function paragraph C2 9 1 The A configuration of jumper J P1 is used only with motors without field weakening and when the field saving function isn t requested see E M F Regulator function paragraph C2 9 1 The flat cable connection between the X1 connector
195. a maa 215 FA 9 PIOIIDUS u __________ ___ _ 275 275 FO e DOT shuka tti 275 277 Appendix H Printing menu drive trace and thyristor trace erre Oboe rp ccu 285 DECLARATION OF CE CONFORMITY IMSPD027I V SILCOPAC D Index VI IMSPD027I PREFACE This manual provides detailed information and the safety rules concerning the installation and startup use and maintenance of the inverters series SPDM The manual has been written for Specialized operators involved in the installation assembly startup and maintenance of AC DC converter SPDM and it has three different safety typologies indicated by the specific symbols to identify information requiring special attention CAUTION WARNING CAUTION 1 027 Indicates incorrect action which may determine dangerous situations for the operators Furthermore it warns the personnel about possible dangers which may occur during the maintenance operations Dangerous Voltage It signals the presence of high voltages with the subsequent risk of death or electric shock for the operators It indicates the situations which may endanger the safety of people and or damage the equipment It indicates a procedure which should be performed or avoided to perform in a correct way operation
196. able by the par CJ 9 E5 8 Acquisition Calculation of the diameter The diameter information acquired by an external transducer or measured as line speed angular speed ratio is used in many of the applications listed in this chapter it is particularly used by the Taper function and by all settings described for the calculation of the inertia compensation and for the calculation of the term related to the tension reference These are however all applications requiring winding or un winding of a given material It is always possible to acquire the signal proportional to the diameter 0 10V through an analog input Ean1 or Ean2 terminals XM1 29 31 and XM1 30 31 Only in applications where axial winder is used settings 3 and 5 it is possible to obtain the diameter information evaluating the line speed to angular speed ratio The diameter value is always in the range defined by a minimum CN1 parameter and a maximum value 100 The maximum diameter value 10096 must be related to the maximum allowed diameter of the machine The minimum value is related to the core diameter as percent ofthe maximum value Example Max diameter 4m 100 Min diameter 0 5m 12 596 Note The calculated diameter value is not stored if the SPDM converter is switched off Function calibration External diameter transducer Check that the transducer gives OV output voltage minimum diameter minimum spindle without material Check t
197. able the filter set TD3 to 0 NoLA2 100 0 120 Second FWD speed limit 112 100 120 0 Second REV speed limit 012 o 100 Additional term to be added to the speed reference It is selected by the CB2 parameter Second internal reference 1 Its value will be replaced to the speed reference when the Ink 12 100 INTRF1 input is enabled terminal 1 15 Second internal reference no 2 Its value will be replaced to the speed reference when the mem XM INTRF2 input is enabled terminal XM1 16 If both inputs INTRF1 and INTRF2 are enabled mw m priority will be given to INTRF1 0 10 Drooping This parameter causes a motor speed decrease as function of the sink current 098W 5 arranging the speed error according to the following formula Error N Ref N Feedback Ref 1 TD9 Error N 5 error Ref speedreference Feedback speed feedback 96 Ref present current reference from speed regulator Group E Note The parameters group E 1st set is an alternate set of the parameters group F 2nd set the switching from 1stto 2nd set occurs enabling the terminal XM1 19 if parameter DN3 otherwise the 1st set will always enabled First time of the acceleration ramp it is the time period needed by the motor to increase its 114W 0 1 999 95 speed from 0 to 10090 First time of the deceleration ramp it is the tim
198. age supervisor hardware circuit connected to the CT load resistors par C 2 3 FAIL HYPOTHESIS CHECKS ACTIONS Current loop is unstable or the Check the current loop response par C2 10 4 Execute the automatic adjustment response is too slow of the current loop through the CURRENT SELFTUN function converter bars to the motor converter bars to the motor connection A thyristor is short circuited Referring to Appendix D bridge layout check the electrical check the electrical characteristics of the thyristors par 3 12 A thyristor is short circuited Referring to Appendix D bridge layout check the electrical check the electrical characteristics of the thyristors par 3 12 Supply line drop when the motoris Check the supply line voltage if the drop occurs on the in recovery condition reversible synchronism too the eventis frozen on the DRIVE TRACE converters only par C2 3 3 par C2 10 1 IMSPD0271 161 C Troubles shooting SILCOPAC D FAIL HYPOTHESIS CHECKS ACTIONS After a maintenance procedure the connections of the synchronisms supply line and of the power circuits are not phased according to XM2 U AK1 XM2 V AK3 XM2 W AK5 Verify that the connections at terminal block XM2 and at the bars AK1 AK3 AK5 are made as described at par 7 1 Over voltage on the motor armature Check the E M F regulator tuning during deceleration with field weakening paragraphs 2 9 1 C2 10 3
199. age the system re start after a power failure Speed error it informs that the system is not controlling the motor speed Tacho loss allows to set the threshold of armature voltage above which the intervention of the tachometer loss protection TachF is enabled races The DRIVE TRACE and the THYRISTOR TRACE can be blocked also by the external logic input 2 Diagnostic variables The auxiliary variables Aux1 Aux2 and Aux3 can be customized to display the power provided by the axis of the motor in compared to the rated power Double set complete of parameters The function allows to store in memory two complete set of parameters as in the typical case of a winder whose configuration must be changed according to the material wound up Personal Password The user can use a personal password Toggling of the references and commands allows to toggle either the speed reference from Motopotentiometer to terminal board input Ref XM1 33 XM1 34 and the contrary or from Serial line to input Rif through the logic input terminal XM6 1 XM6 2 1 0 expansion board SP DIO A10 3 List of enhanced functions Angular positioning regulator it is used to position the drive shaft Inertia compensation it used to compensate the load inertias constant or variable inertias as in the case of winders unwinders Mechanical backlash compensation it is used to reduce the opening effect of mechanical backlash of the cin
200. ain 600 690 V main 700 850 V main 950 V 4 Charge resistors Serial Interface SPDS1 RS485 or PROFIBUS Expansion X1 C Board 1 25 A Technical features SILCOPAC D 26 IMSPD027I CN 14 7 V NISI V 3H O Qr Zo LJ O 01x QuvOH H38BhNS 4388f1NS d 29 39V 10A Aldd 10121 5 DIAGRAMS 30A 600A Two quadrant 27 c x O ne y NA _ Y 41 o5 L gt fu C 0 19 gt A A lt ve 2 AE 19 3 gt 7 e d 9 M deal y gt
201. aking the speed reference falls to zero with ramp if installed when the zero speed will be reached the firing pulse will be forced to the max delay the armature current falls to zero the pulses will be suppressed the Suppression status will be stored If the motor is dragged the digital control doesn t react to the movement Run 2 Start input Run Enabling the input the motor will start the command gives the set speed reference and SPDM R enables the pulses to the converter and the digital regulation Disabling the input the motor will stop with line recovery braking the speed reference falls to zero with ramp if installed when the zero speed will be reached the firing pulse will be forced to the max delay the armature current falls to zero the pulses will be suppressed but the Suppression status will not be stored If the motor is dragged the digital control reacts to the movement Enable Start input enable Enabling the input the motor will start the command gives the set speed reference and SPDM U enables the pulses to the converter and the digital regulation Disabling the input the motor will stop y inertia the pulses will be suppressed the armature current falls to zero the suppression status will be stored If the motor is dragged the digital control doesn t react to the movement r3 magnitude plus sign r3 x
202. al If connected to the terminal XM 1 28 P26 Personalization of the encoder feed terminal XM 1 5 Closed on the pins 2 3 when the encoder is fed by the external power supply 24V connected to the terminals XM 1 22 23 Closed on the pins 1 2 when the encoder is fed by a second external power supply whose voltages range from V to 241 J P27 Personalization of the analog output PWM1 terminal XM1 37 Closed on the pins 1 2 if the output is prearranged to have a milliamperemeter 5mA f s connected to the terminals XM1 37 41 Closed on the pins 2 3 if the measure has been taken live J P28 reserved Closed on the pins 1 2 16 Mhz quartz J P50 Profibus expansion board Closed on the pins 1 2 when the expansion board which allows the serial connection with PROFIBUS protocol Is used Closed on the pins 2 3 if otherwise PR2 Trimmer for the la Monitor setting 154 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D 215 C Board test points C Setting up TP15 O TP16 O 27 5 uC 9 7 2 2 TP10 O 170 2 TP11 TP13 O TP6 O TP4 TP22 TP14 O TP210 00 O 1 24 012 013 2 TP18 Lo XM1 TP20 TP19 TP1 Signal 0 10V terminals 1 26 27 Tach 2 4 TP5
203. alculated as function of the speed Set to ON if the integral gain of the tension regulator is desired to take a constant value set by TK2 parameter Set to a value which re calibrates the integral gain of the tension regulator when this 15 calculated as function of the speed par CKC OFF Set to a value which re calibrates the tension regulator output The tension regulator output is divided by the value set by this parameter lower the value greater will be the tension regulator effect in the correction of the speed reference Set to NLoop value the tension regulator corrects the speed reference Set to AuxAdd value the speed reference summing term 15 provided by the tension regulator The tension regulator calibration is performed assigning the values of the proportional gain and if CKC ON the values of the integral gain of the regulator itself Set to the proportional gain value of the tension regulator Set to the integral gain value of the tension regulator if CKC ON The tension regulator output will be limited by parameters TK3 positive limit and TK4 negative limit Set to the positive limit value of the tension regulator output Set to the negative limit value of the tension regulator output Set to the forward limit value of the speed reference after the correction node of the tension regulator with load cell it is enabled only if Com3 0N Set to the reverse limit value of the speed reference after the correction
204. ally acquired and not stored in the EEprom Set CDA parameter to OFF The occurrence of this protection automatically sets the CDA parameter to OFF N lt gt 0 the protection is active during Check that motor field has been opened and Open the motor field circuit If needed the CURRENT SELFTUN only that the rotor has been mechanically locked mechanically lock the motor rotor protection is active during the The voltage at the analog inputs must be OFFSET SELFTUN only lower than 0 78V The voltage read on the analog inputs through the Hardware Status function the Hardware Status function the item Analog Inputs par C 1 3 6 must be lower than 7 896 the CURRENT SELFTUN only MaxS the protection is active during the CURRENT SELFTUN only CURRENT SELFTUNING has not been completed in 60 seconds Check that the value of the parameter TA1 TA2 TA3 and TA4 is the default value 162 Null the signals connected to the analog inputs terminals par A7 1 1 Or disconnect the signals themselves If the protection occurs in a systematic way and it is not related to the connected signals replace C board The manual current loop adjustment is needed par C2 10 5 Repeat the self tuning setting TA1 and TA2 at value different from default If the failure persists do the manual tuning of the current regulator par C2 10 5 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D C Troubles shooting C3 1 4 4 Max
205. ammed as Check that DM5 and DM8 parameters be properly set par C2 8 Check the connection between the SPDM and the exciter par C2 8 1 2 Check that DJ 2 parameter be programmed to read the field current using Hardware Status function par C1 3 6 al the item Analog Input equal to 10096 The data recorded on the DRIVE RACE par C1 3 9 show that the field current falls under the threshold value set by DC3 parameter The field current read through the Hardware Status par C1 3 6 the Analog input item has a value lower than the threshold set by DC3 parameter The data recorded on the DRIVE TRACE show that the field current falls under the threshold value set by DC3 parameter or that the error between field current reference Ifo and feedback If is higher than 20 The field current read through the Hardware Status function par C1 3 6 at the Analog input item has a value lower than the threshold set by DC3 parameter or the error between this last one and the field current reference read through to the Instrument Mode par C1 3 5 function visualizing item IF 0 is higher than 2096 ACTIONS Set properly jumper JP25 par C2 8 Check the connection from the exciter to C board through the P board Execute the SPAE1 exciter customizing par C2 5 Execute the field current adjustment par C2 8 Execute the SPAE1 exciter customizing par C2 5 Execute the field current adjustment par C2 8 Rep
206. and CB6 parameters the tension reference selected by CJ 1 parameter is replaced by the value set by CJ 5 parameter The acquisition of the new value C 5 is filtered by a ramp programmable by the par CJ 9 When the system leaves the zero speed status the operating tension reference is restored to the value set by CJ 1 parameter The acquisition of the new value selected by CJ 1 is filtered by a ramp programmable by the par CJ 9 3 6 When logic input available on the SPDIO optional board goes to its active status the tension reference selected by CJ 1 parameter is replaced by the value set by CJ 5 parameter The acquisition of the new value CJ 5 is filtered a ramp programmable by the par CJ 9 When logic input leaves its active status the operating tension reference 15 restored to the value set by CJ 1 parameter The acquisition of the new value selected by 1 is filtered by a ramp programmable by the par CJ 9 3 7 When Com logic input available on the SPDIO optional board goes to its active status the tension reference selected by CJ 1 parameter is replaced by the value set by CJ 5 parameter The acquisition of the new value CJ 5 is filtered a ramp programmable by the par CJ 9 When Com7 logic input leaves its active status the operating tension reference is restored to the value set by CJ 1 parameter The acquisition of the new value selected by CJ 1 is filtered by a ramp programm
207. and disabling the converter the relay K2 converter ready doesn t fall The intervention is not internally stored so the converter will be re enabled when the protection loss closes again the terminal XM1 20 This hardware protection cannot be disabled 2 The intervention of this protection occurs when the voltage drop on the CT load resistor rises beyond 6 3 V see par C3 1 3 This hardware protection cannot be disabled 3 The Watchdog protection operation depends on the following causes 3 1 Synchronism loss during a time greater than 100 ms This hardware protection cannot be disabled 3 2 Synchronism loss due to an interference This hardware protection cannot be disabled 3 3 EEPROM failure or the jumper 4 is not in place is it not possible to store the parameters This hardware protection cannot be disabled 3 4 Micro controller supervision intervention This hardware protection cannot be disabled 3 5 Reset due to an interference This hardware protection cannot be disabled 3 6 A current sample value was higher than 100 Decrease the DJ 8 parameter value see par C3 3 This hardware protection cannot be disabled 3 7 EEPROM self protection against a writing overflow failure This hardware protection cannot be disabled 3 8 Too large offset value at one or more analog channels C board likely failure 3 10 The motor is running during the self tuning procedure the excitation current is not zero 3 11 The alfa firing
208. angle value evaluated during the current loop self tuning is lower than 50 electrical degrees see par C2 10 1 SELF TUNING 3 12 During the CURRENT SELFTUNING procedure the intervention did not succeed in carrying out the calibration of the current loop do it manually 4 The maximum threshold value can be adjusted through the DC5 parameter The intervention may also depend on the transducer failure in this case the protection becomes active if the motor speed parameter DB7 while the transducer signals a voltage lower than 50 of the nominal value 5 The intervention also may depend on the exciter failure The minimum threshold value can be adjusted through the DC3 parameter 6 The protection will be active if the armature voltage exceeds 50 of the nominal value at null tacho voltage The protection will be active also if the tacho voltage has reversed polarity 7 It warns the intervention of the converter heat sink thermostat 8 For proper operation of this protection the DB6 parameter has to be programmed DB6 100 lay lay nominal armature current max armature current see par C2 3 9 For proper operation of this protection the following parameters have to be programmed DA3 converter size DB3 lt 116 5 027 SILCOPAC D C User Interface 10 The protection become active if the serial communication is lost during a time higher than the value set through the DC 7 parameter see
209. armature voltage protection intervention selecting the STATUS function par C1 3 1 the display shows PROTECTION Ud FAIL HYPOTHESIS CHECKS ACTIONS The armature voltage exceeds the threshold value set by parameter DC5 The excitation current is too high The speed 15 too high Motor is weakened with a too short ramp time Armature voltage transducer failure or jumper J P7 isn t properly set C3 15 P 5 If F This protection supervises the signal level acquired at the If analog input The connection from the exciter to C board is made according to the following configurations The data recorded on the DRIVE TRACE par C1 3 9 show that the armature voltage has exceeded the value set by DC5 parameter The relationship with the field current value and with the speed can be examined The data recorded on the DRIVE TRACE par C1 3 9 show that the armature voltage has no coherent values Set a firing angle reference through the Setup Reference function par 1 3 7 the armature voltage shown by the display has coherent values par C2 2 7 point A Restore the exciter so that does not supply a field current too large Avoid that motor can be dragged Increase the ramp time Set properly the jumper 7 2 8 Replace P board If the failure persists replace C Board Field loss protection intervention selecting the STATUS function par 1 3 1 the display shows PROTECTION inside exciter
210. armonic current as apercentage of Line RMS Note In practice there are some other harmonic currents due principally to the dissymmetry in the network upstream the non linear load loads and to the tracking errors of the pulses of thyristor gates The non characteristic harmonics have values lower than characteristic harmonics so they can be ignored The 12 pulse parallel connection is a classical master slave configuration with a speed controlled 6 pulse master converter and a current controlled 6 pulse slave converter Feeding the slave with a mains supply offset by 30 degrees compared to the master and joining the power converter outputs on one side over an interphase reactor obtain the 12 pulse parallel connection The benefit with this arrangement is that in the supply side some of the harmonics are in opposite phase and thus eliminated In theory the harmonic component with the lowest frequency seen atthe primary of the transformer is the 11th The Twelve P ulses solution is usually used in the applications for the cable transport cableways ski lifts teleferages etc but also when its peculiar characteristics are needed After a few parameters have been set the two power converters will work in the usual way The Parallel Dodecaphase control for SPDM is obtained in the following Way The connection between the Master Drive and the Slave Drive is made by means of the analog inputs and outputs The Master Drive se
211. assage to suppression 1 must regain the original function before the return to the status of suppression It is possibile to know the active parameters set by proper programming a logic output WARNING If the function is enabled in order to avoid dangerous situations it advisable to verify the active parameters set before to start the equipment 1 027 193 D Auxiliary functions SILCOPAC D As an example we indicate in figure D1 14 2 a possible diagram of connection ofinput 24 V 1 21 24 V 1 20 SPDM Figure 017 2 The switch 51 preselects the set of parameters to enable upon reset 51 open set 1 1 closed set 2 On instant T2 the selector 52 switch the input Com1 on the signal coming from 51 and on the instant T5 it restores the original function of input Com1 for example for motopotentiometer During the change of the parameters from the keyboard it is possible to recognize the set in which you are operating thanks to the indication 1 or 2 which appears near the message SELECT GROUP It is also possible to display the current selection through one of the logic outputs for example OUT1 XM1 24 configuring it with the value ParSet new Itis also possible to read through the serial interface the current selection at the address 246 At the first power up or reset with COM1 ON the software initializes the parameters of the second set as if it recogniz
212. ateL 100 0 100 262W IMSPD027I Rate limit on the armature current reference value The parameter shows the max permitted variation of the current reference for each time interval T 6 where T is the network voltage period Example if T 20 ms and CA5 10 referred to 083 the max permitted variation of the current reference is 10 every 3 3 ms 93 B List of parameters SILCOPAC D Code Name Default Values Description Linear re calibration of the armature current limits against the motor speed change in the M laLNM 100 0 1 100 range from the speed indicated by parameter 087 to its max value as shown in following figure Current limits 3 6 9 Ispeed to disable the re calibration 100 E NMD 0 244 Number of max delay to be executed during the armature current reversing procedure after E the zero current signal normally CA7 0 If Silcopac D is used as exciter then 7 20 recommended value CA8 InTh 2 0 509 Intervention threshold value of the armature current reversing procedure If the current 268w reference on sign change drops below this threshold the reversing procedure will be enabled Otherwise the current reference will be zeroed without the reversing procedure 2 Fixed current limits Upper limit positive limit fixed by the CA9 parameter 100 0 100 Lower limit negative limit fixed by the CA9 paramete
213. aving which reduces the intensity of the field to the value pre established with the parameter CC1 After the stop of the motor furthermore the reduction of the field might be delayed for a time which can be set from 1 to 9999 software cycles through the parameter CC3 The corresponding delay expressed in seconds 15 time of delay CC3 CD3 5 If during the of inversion of the field the speed regulator requires further inversion it is immediately operated with need to await that the first inversion is achieved The field current feedback is acquired on the dedicated analog input If terminal XM1 28 mass on XM1 41 10V J P25 closed on pin 1 and 2 The inversed tachometer protection is not activated when it is enabled the function of field inversion D10 3 Signalings and diagnostic For the signalling purposes two of the six logic outputs available in the SPDM can be configured to indicate the direction of the field and the Status of the converter concerning the phase of the field inversion The two logic outputs chosen amp OUTy must be respectively configured as and Fldin through the parameters DOx and The table D10 1 shows the status of the two logic outputs according to the status of the converter OUT xDOx Fldins OUT y DOy Fldin oOo 01 Converter notin phase of field inversion The field has positive direction 1 _________ Converternot in phase of field in
214. ay with the parameter CC3 from the instant of passage from the status of REGULATION to the status of SUPPRESSION PROTECTION Intervention time of of the field saving function expressed in software cycles The corresponding delay in seconds is worth CC3 CD3 Delay time of the enabling of the impulses to the thyristors at the end of the field inversion expressed in software cycles The corresponding delay expressed in seconds is worth CC2 CD3 SPDM U SPDME R The figure D10 1 shows the configuration with single motor made of an unidirectional SPDM and a reversible exciter SPDME Terminal board XM1 Terminal board XM1 The reference and the feedback of field current If are exchanged between SPDM and SP DME through ________ the available analog inputs and outputs on terminal board 1 Figure D10 1 Configuration with single motor D10 2 Functions description In figure 010 2 itis represented the simplified diagram for the regulation of the motor speed The procedure of field inversion starts as soon as the reference of current coming from the speed regulator or another source which can be established with the parameter CA1 change Its sign and exceeds in absolute value the threshold which was set with the parameter CA8 During the whole inversion the firing pulses of the thyristors of the armature bridge are generated with limit delay 165 and the regulator of Current remains disabled The procedure
215. be reused during the restarting The function is enabled by setting the parameter CDB QuickS ON More precisely the function is referred to the following definitions e Line loss itis a Supply voltage terminal block XM2 drop under a fixed threshold equal to 50 of the main voltage of at least 5ms duration e Line Drop it is a falling of the supply voltage terminal block XM2 under a programmable threshold UvoMin with duration greater then 20ms The threshold value equals the 60 of the nominal line voltage if the armature voltage is in the range 0 to 50 of the nominal voltage if the armature voltage is higher than 50 the threshold value can be determined by to the following formula UVo Line drop threshold Ud 50 1 6096 U in 60 VoMin 50 50 100 Ud where UVomin is the threshold operating value for the line drop intervention percentage value of the nominal supply voltage DB1 parameter DC1 is the minimum threshold parameter for the line beyond tolerance protection intervention Ud is the armature voltage as percentage of the nominal voltage DB4 parameter When the function is enabled if a line loss or a line drop occur the system will begin the following sequence ltgoes into protection status displaying this condition on the user interface and doesn t execute the storage procedure of the first occurred protection items 1 1 and 1 2 Section C of this Manual When the
216. cal Relays contactors and magnetic valves must be equipped with spark suppressors This is also necessary when these parts are mounted outside the frequency converter cubicle 258 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D APPENDIX E EMC Standards and applicable Standards RFI filter a earthed line TN or TT Network L1 The filters are suitable for earthed lines only for example in public European 400 V lines According to EN 61800 3 filters are not compatible in insulated industrial lines with own supply transformers due to their safety risks in such floating lines IT networks Earth fault detection Filters with internal discharging resistors cables the converter and the motor have 12 together considerable to ground which cause increased leakage 13 earth current gt 30mA The tripping threshold of an earth fault detector that measures this current must be adapted to this higher value Ground Connections For personnel safety proper operation and to reduce electromagnetic emission pickup the drive and the motor must be grounded at the installation site A star ground system is acceptable although it is not the preferred method e Conductors must be adequately sized as required by safety regulations e Power cable shields must be connected to the drive PE terminal in order to meet safety regulations e Power cable shields are suitable for use as equipment grounding conductors only when the shield co
217. ce C board C1 3 6 is OFF M14 Ramp OFF The speed reference is The speed reference read through the Instrument Mode Check forthe proper setting by 1 missing par C1 3 5 with the converter enabled is set zero parameter of the speed reference origin 0 Check for proper operation of the speed reference generator devices The current reference is The current reference read through the Instrument Mode Check for the proper setting by CA1 missing par 1 3 5 with the converter enabled is set to zero parameter of the current reference origin lao 0 When the speed regulator is enabled CA1 parameter must be set to Reg CA1 laoS N_ Reg Erroneous current limits The current reference read through the Instrument Mode Check for the proper setting of the current function par C1 3 5 is limited to a value insufficient to limits Check for the proper setting by CA2 overcome the mechanical friction The converter goes in parameter of the current limit origin current limit conditions see NOTE par C1 3 1 Armature open circuit Check that the armature contactor be properly closed Restore the armature circuit Check the integrity of the armature fuses Check the connection of the armature wires Check the status of the motor brushes C3 3 THE MOTOR DOESN T REACH THE RATED SPEED The speed reference doesn t The speed reference value read through the Instrument Restore the speed reference generator reach
218. cho encoder speed feedback value with the value calculated depending on armature voltage CB3 parameter will be automatically set to F Ud Flux reference is assumed equal to the value set by CC4 parameter The speed regulator gains are replaced with those set by TH7 and TH8 parameters proportional and integral only The system signals tacho loss alarm status DDA parameter is automatically set to ON In this case tacho loss alarm can not be reset it can be sent to any logic outputs by setting one of DO1 006 to Alarm When the system is restored the original configuration is resumed by a reset sequence 184 IMSPDO027I SILCOPAC D D Auxiliary functions D7 Motopotentiometer SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 100 1 2 software motopotentiometer be used as speed reference source to generate the speed reference when 1 parameter is set to MPotFw or MPotC3 The function 15 handled through the logic commands 2 terminals XM1 17 XM1 18 XM1 19 respectively See Section A of this Manual par 7 1 1 CB1 MPotFw forward motopotentiometer It is possible to set a 0 to 100 reference 1 active command increases the reference value Com2 active command decreases the reference value const 0 1 decrease min 0 h 1 motopotentiometer with sign from Com3 It is possible to set a 100 t
219. closed on SPD from P 1 trimmer jumper INT SPD closed on INT IMSPDO027I 165 C Troubles shooting SILCOPAC D ACTIONS Motor in stall conditions protection intervention selecting the STATUS function par 1 3 1 the display FAL HYPOTHESIS CHECKS __ _ ___ ACTIONS Mechanical motor lock The data recorded on the DRIVE TRACE par C1 3 9 showthat Unlock the motor the motor is standing and in current limit conditions during a time longer than the value set by DC6 parameter The supply line had a change The data recorded on the DRIVE TRACE par C1 3 9 show that Restore the supply line out of the range defined by the supply line has values out of the allowed range DC1 and DC2 parameters Field loss 1 6 31 14 1 the display shows FAIL HYPOTHESIS CHECKS ACTIONS Fuses failure Find the causes that produced the fuses intervention par C3 8 After having restored the system replace the fault fuses Main contactor open Check the commands sequence for the contactor closing according Correct the commands sequence for to the following logic the contactor closing contactor closing converter enable converter disable reached suppression status contactor opening Power supply line loss Check the supply line voltage at the power bars Restore the supply line Thyristor failure One or more thyristors are fault par C3 12 It is possible to Replace the fault thyristo
220. commands from serial line if DEB 2 ON commands from terminal board 194 IMSPDO027I SILCOPAC D SPEED REFERENCE SELECTION 1 17 Q gt 1 18 1 19 1 33 D 1 54 2 1 5700 IMSPD027I 0 D STATUS 2 o REGUL lt T lt COM1 YP 100 MPotFW COM3 MPotC 3 Rif Serial AuxRag RIC 12 MPoRif Reserved SerRif D Auxiliary functions m Speed Raterence 195 D Auxiliary functions SILCOPAC D 196 SERIAL COMMAND Serial link RS232 485 or Profibus Serial Commands Disabled DEB COMMANDS 1 5 L3 i L1 NE wa COML D b J IMSPD027I E ENHANCED FUNCTIONS EO Software release The enhanced functions must be enabled and configured by appropriate parameters grouped by their function in Configuration and Tuning Parameters Some of these functions are incompatible each one to other because they use the same system resources For the same reason the enhanced functions may be incompatible with some of the auxiliary functions Any attempts to contemporary enable the auxiliary and or enhanced functions incompatible each one to other fail and result in the CONSISTENCY ERROR message on the display para
221. connected to the Silcopac D control circuits by a flat cable from K11 connector on the exciter to X11 connector on P board Power supply x 415 V Output voltage lt 0 81 umama Rated output current 10 NB 1 In case of direct power supply from network it requires a decoupling reactor 2 Incase of power supply from transformer it requires RC filter Y SPAE1 R 300 100W C 4uF 450V SPDM Inside For SPAE1 exciter customizing refer to par 2 5 section C IMSPD027I A Technical features SILCOPAC D 9 3 SPDIO Logic expansion board This board provides four additional opto coupled logic inputs 7 total inputs COM1 to COM7 and four additional logic relay outputs 6 total outputs OUT1 to OUT The board is installed inside the converter overlapping it on the lower edge of C board by means of the proper accessories and paying attention to insert the SPDIO connector into the X1 connector 15 pins of C board This board is normally used in applications requiring some optional software functions The meaning of the four relay output OUT3 to OUT6 can be set through DO3 to 006 parameters see section B of this manual The ogic input are opto coupled and their current consumption is 8mA XM6 teminal Description block COMA logic input connecting these two terminals to 24V power supply terminal 2 0 the input will be enabled 3 5 logic inp
222. ction enabled alarm protection but not active disabled alarm protection 131 C User Interface SILCOPAC D 1 3 12 PASSWORD which be modified The software release 2 6 offers to the user the availability to modify the password The password is requested when the user wants to modify one of three main groups of parameters TUNING CONFIGURATION o DRIVE The password is stored in the parameter DQ1 and can assume a value included between 0 and 9999 To keep the safety the parameter DQ1 normally is hidden but in case you forget the password or in case of interventions made by assistance personnel itcan be made visible with the following procedure 1 Reset the converter keeping pressed the key lt gt this action has the effect to make visible the subgroup Q SECURITY of the group DRIVE PARAMETERS Enter the group DRIVE PARAMETERS Upon the request of the password press lt ENTER gt Enter in the subgroup Q SECURITY the parameter DQ1 contains the current value of the password Exit by pressing twice the key lt MODE gt Now you can change the parameters introducing the value read in DQ1 password One of the parameters which can be modified is the password itself OI gt W N After introducing for the first time the correct password it is not required anymore until the following reset or switching off of the converter Place DQ1 0 the request of the password Is disabled The value of defaul
223. ctual speed only with the ramp enable In the previous releases the speed reference started from zero this generated dangerous hard braking torque for 4 quadrant operation SPDM 3 Speed reference adding term now it can be added downstream ramp also CFA NoADVR ON OFF 4 Torque proof the user can manage completely the mechanical brake with a digital output D01 D07 5 Disabling of the regenerative braking the user can disable the regenerative braking when the armature voltage level becomes greater than a programmable threshold CEC Dis ON OFF CE2 Armature voltage threshold level This function is helpful to avoid burning of fuses when is not possible to maintain the right margin between the power Supply voltage and the armature voltage level for example with low Rsc ratio or net with negative voltage variations greater than 10 6 Speed visualisation the user can configure one of the auxiliary variable Aux1 2 3 with parameters DG5 DG6 DG7 as Encod to display the Encoder speed it is possible even if tachometer speed feedback is used A PC tool there is a new parameter to enable the communication with the PC DED Com OFF ON 8 Digital Output configuration the user can configure one of digital outputs parameters 001 006 as ParSet to display the active parameters set 9 TENSION regulators the new parameter CN6 sets the delay of the diameter calculation in relation to the tension regulator sta
224. current if any protection occurs it is necessary to continue with the following points the contrary go on to point 15 CCA ON N O Ul 10 Move the 1 of the SPAE1 on SPD 11 Check that the parameter DM2 is programmed as 110 12 Read on the ammeter the field current amps 13 Set the parameter DM8 according the formula DM8 DMB A where field current red by the ammeter rated field current of the motor DM8p 5 value ofthe parameter DM8 DM8 value must be negative 14 Through the Hardware Status function par C1 3 6 read on the Analog Input item the If value in 96 rotate the trimmer P 1 until to read a field current If equal to 100 15 Power off the SPDM and the 5 and restore the field circuit removing the ammeter and enabling the protections C2 8 2 Outside exciter If the external exciter SPAM SPATE or SPDME is controlled by the SPDM it is necessary 1 to verify that the parameter DM2 is programmed as 2 to set parameter DK2 20 and parameter 3 to close the J umper J P25 of the C board on pins 1 2 4 to do the connection with shielded cable according the figures C3 7 1 C3 7 2 e 3 7 3 e The output PWM2 XM1 39 must be connected to reference input of the exciter e The input IF XM1 28 must be connected to the output of the exciter where is available a voltage signal proportional to the field current e Connect the OV of the SPDM c
225. d as function of the diameter so that the peripheral speed will have a constant value which do not depend on diameter variations A typical application e g is a Speed regulated winder with dancer control Diameter Minimum diameter E Angular speed Linear speed Dancer control E4 1 Required hardware The diameter transducer device must generate a 0 10V analog signal to be connected to Ean1 or Ean2 analog input terminals XM1 29 31 and 1 30 31 a signal equal to 0V means minimum diameter set by CN1 parameter a signal equal to 10V means maximum diameter 100 E4 2 Function calibration The function calibration has to be performed according to the following sequence setCBH parameter to OFF b connect to the coiler uncoiler spindle the minimum diameter coil c check that in these conditions the diameter transducer have null output d connect to the spindle the maximum diameter coil e checkthatin these conditions the diameter transducer have 10V output f remove the maximum diameter coil g set through the Setup Reference Continuous Speed Ref function a 10096 angular speed reference h check that in these conditions minimum diameter and maximum angular speed the linear speed measured on the minimum diameter spindle equal the maximum line speed equivalent to 10096 of the value shown by the Instrument Mode function at the No item i if the a m conditions is not true perform the calib
226. d operator interface or any analog output PWM1 or PWM2 or PWM3 a parameter of the application residing in the P rofibus master only for debugging This type of data will be refreshed by the drive only when the master has set the bit 15 to on in the command word first word of P 20 2 2 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D APPENDIX E Parallel of Bridges F25 DIGITAL OUTPUTS CONTROL BY PROFIBUS The digital output control be done directly by the command words PZD1 word sent to the drive by Profibus The command word is the following Bit 0 Start Command Corrisponde al morsetto XM1 13 Bit 1 Rampa Command Corrisponde al morsetto 1 14 Bit 2 Intrf Command Corrisponde al morsetto XM1 15 Bit 3 Intr2 Command Corrisponde al morsetto XM1 16 Bit 4 Coml Command Corrisponde al morsetto XM1 17 Bit5 Com2 Command Corrisponde al morsetto XM1 18 Bit 6 Com3 Command Corrisponde al morsetto 1 19 Bit 7 Protection Soft reset Bit 8 Digital output OUT1 forging terminal XM1 24 Bit 9 Digital output OUT2 forging terminal XM1 25 Bit 10 Digital output OUT3 forging terminal X1 9 10 11 SPDIO expansion board Bit11 Digital output OUT4 forging terminal X1 12 13 14 SPDIO expansion board Bit 12 Digital output OUT5 forging terminal X1 15 16 17 SPDIO expansion board Bit 13 Digital output OUT6 forging terminal X1 18 19 20 SPDIO expansion board Bit 14 Not used Bit 15 Command enabling The protection soft reset do not act on the 0 2 and P 3 p
227. d safety rules must be taken in account dT Ta Tu PE Attention The example shows the principle structure of a DC drive and its connections It is not binding recommendation and it cannot respect all conditions of a plant Therefore each drive must be considered 266 IMSPD027I Appendix F PROFIBUS DP Fl Introduction The exchange of useful data between a Master and several slave drives is divided into two fields that can be transmitted in each telegram 1 process data field command words drive status reference values reading of particular process variables speed feedbacks armature current armature voltage In any case this type of data is read and refreshed continuously at any refresh cycle of the drive main 2 parameter field these are drive variables which will be stored EEP ROM therefore they are written as a result of a change and after being tested for consistency As far as the reading is concerned the system supplies the value associated to the number of decimal digits if any and if necessary with the sign To optimise the time of Profibus bus cycle and compatibly with the task assigned to the various slaves the user can choose a particular protocol among the five allowed ones since each of these protocols is different according to the number of words exchanged 2 General description of the protocol In the Profibus standard the various types of messages which be exchanged between a Master and th
228. d torque the max diameter DMax 10090 In some applications it is possible to accept short motor overload or to reduce the max tension of the machine modyfing par CL5 as percentage of the motor nominal current Par CL5 is expressed as percentage of motor nominal current at the max diameter DMax 100 when the tension reference is the maximum To 100 la 3 2 las __ no work zone lanom with 10095 and CL5 1 2 d la with To 10096 and CL5 la with To 100 and CL5 0 1 00 With tension reference 100 inthe range between base speed NBase and the max speed N 100 when the diameter decreases the angular speed increases but the tension is constant with a constant armature current with a value less than the nominal one inthe range between minimum speed Nmin and the base speed NBase when the diameter decreases the angular speed increases and the tension is constant while the armature current decreases atthe minimum speed we have the max diameter and the tension is constant while the armature current is maximum the value can be calculated by the formula Diam CL51 aNoi lao 100 IMSPD027I 221 E Optional functions SILCOPAC D E5 11 Diagnostics Most variable used within tension regulators closed loop and open loop regulators are readable programming the variables 1 Aux2 and Aux3 thru the DG5 DG6 and DG7 param
229. d under load conditions has to be verified SPEED LOOP Step response verification It is recommended to avoid this test if the static stability verification shows some critical areas To display the speed signal it is required that one of the analog outputs terminals 37 38 39 41 XM1 40 41 par 7 1 1 be programmed as N DM1 DM2 DM3 parameters Connect the scope to test points TP24 TP25 or TP26 par C3 9 depending on the analog output programmed as N signal and to test point TP8 ground of board C Set the scope time base to a value higher than 1s div and the vertical scale factor to 1 V div or 2 V div Through the SETUP REFERENCE function par C1 3 7 set a speed reference step applied SPEED REFERENCE starting from a value equal to about 5 and by 5 steps increase the value up to 10096 At each step verify the waveform displayed on the scope as shown in the following figure IMSPDO027I 149 C Setting up SILCOPAC D SLOW RESPONSE GOOD RESPONSE RESPONSE WITH OVERSHOOT 2 10 5 Manual adjustment CURRENT LOOP Set and 089 parameters according to the following formulas TA1 145 Vr tap 90 DB9 100 Vr DB6 Tae Vne DB6 Vn where T supply line period in seconds T 20 02 for supply line frequency 50 Hz Vn motor armature rated voltage Vr Rl drop across the motor Volts it is the voltage at the motor terminals when the nominal current flo
230. dently from the status of COM2 To know the status of the traces activated or blocked we must access to the menu STATUS in which a blinking dot indicates if the traces is operating if on the contrary the dot is fixed then the trace is blocked Blinking dot Figure D1 15 With the new parameter DGE the function AUTOPRINT of the traces can be activated also in case of intervention of the external protection DGE OFF the autoprint is not performed in case of external protection DGE ON the autoprint is performed also in case of external protection D16 Diagnostic variables The auxiliary variables Aux1 Aux2 and Aux3 can be customized to display the power provided by the axis of the motor in compared to the rated power the power to the axis is calculated as p pog 14 089 ops 100 100 100 100 The first addendum represents the electric power supplied to the motor the second addendum represents the losses by effect in the motor and the third addendum represents the losses by friction Definition of symbols Ud Armature voltage of the motor la Armature current of the motor DB9 Parameter which expressed the voltage drop on the resistance of the windings of the motor at the rating current of the converter The value is expressed in of the rating voltage of the motor Parameter which contains the value of the power lost due to the constant frictions expressed as of
231. dling components or performing measurements inside the panel e DANGER The SPDM and all the other devices connected MUST BE GROUNDED IN A SUITABLE WAY The voltages on the terminals of output of the SPDM are dangerous be it when the converter is activated be it when the same is not operating Also consider that the motor may turn in any moment as soon as the power supply is connected If the converter is installed in the panel never operate it with the doors of the panel open DANGER RISK OF HRE SERIOUS DAMAGE The converter x 600A has not internal fuses foresee suitable fuses see paragraph 73 section Afor caliper and type immediately upstream the converter Do not use fuses different from those specified wrong fuses may cause fire serious damage to personnel equipment and or parts connected nearby Some units need auxiliary fuses for the separated lines related to the fans and auxiliary circuits Do not apply power to the converter if you presume that inside of the container or of the components humidity has penetrated dust or caustic corrosive chemical agents DANGER RISK OF FIRE SERIOUS DAMAGE IN URIES SPDM are devices of open type and must be installed strictly according to the instructions of this MANUAL and in total agreement with the standards and rules in force Never store flammable material inside over or near the converter e TIS ABSOLUTELY FORBIDDENTO Operate the converter with voltage gr
232. e to access to the fuses remove the cover and if needed unlock the boards holder and move it toward the lower side unscrew the fastening screws and replace the fuses It is necessary to replace the fuses with those of identical type For size V remove the cover of the upper section A the fuses are directly accessible and each is fixed with two fastening screw 174 5 027 SILCOPAC D C Maintenance C4 4 Blower replacement C4 4 1 Size Il HIL and HILL Unscrew the four fixing bolts on both converter sides and pull down the holder blower group On the bench replace the blower by disassembling it from the holder Reinstall the holder blower group and install the four bolts on both converter sides 4 4 2 Size IV and size V The blower is provided detached and assembled on the cabinet by the user When the blower is placed on the converter to replace it unscrew the plate fixing bolts and remove the group pulling toward the upper side FIG 4 Direction Terminals Mounti lat Plate mounting bolts Mounting bolts y blower direction Fan group SIZES IV AND V SIZES HT WIL HIEL IMSPDO027I 175 C Maintenance SILCOPAC D C4 5 C board replacement All the converter control circuits microprocessor etc and the interface circuits thru the field analogic input output commands serial interface and parallel interface for SPDI1 SPDI2 are located on the C Board the C Board re
233. e connected at both ends by metals clamps or comparable means directly on clean metal surfaces if both earthing points belong to the same earth line Otherwise a capacitor 10 nF 2 KV must be connected to earth on one end In the converter cabinet this kind of connection must be made directly on the sheet metal as close as possible to the terminals and if the cable comes from outside also on the PE bar At the other end of the cable the screen must be well connected with the housing of the signal emitter or receiver While grounding the shields of the cables itis necessary to use 360 connection and it is compulsory to avoid a pigtail connection By pigtail Is meant the connection to earth ground of the cable shield by means of an additional wire Use a double shielded twisted pair cable for analogue signals This type of cable is recommended for the pulse encoder signals also Employ one individually shielded pair for each signal Do not use common return for different analogue signals A double shielded cable is the best alternative for low voltage digital signals but single shielded twisted multipair cable is also usable n ume A double shielded twisted pair cable A single shielded twisted multipair cable Run analogue and digital signals in separate shielded cables Relay controlled signals providing their voltage does not exceed 48 V can be run in the same cables as digital input signals It is recommended that the re
234. e field weakening motor is used where the field saving function is required and where winder functions are used paragraph E8 configurations 3 and 4 The regulation needs a controlled exciter see paragraph C 2 8 With inside exciter SPAE1 the control signals are exchanged by the flat cable that connects the connector K1 of the SPAE1 to the connector X11 of the P board jumper J P25 of the C board closed on pins 2 3 With outside exciter The field current reference is available on the terminals XM1 39 41 of the C board analog output P wm2 the field current feedback is acquired by the terminals XM1 28 31 analog input If jumper J P25 of the board closed on pins 1 2 The regulator enable occurs by setting the CCA parameter to ON The regulation is handled by two blocks Feed Feed Forward Forward regulator and proportional integral regulator the sum of the two regulator blocks output is transformed by the magnetization characteristic to D generate the field current reference Ifo MAGN CHAR The Feed Forward regulator evaluates the flux value as function of the present speed if higher than the base speed the proper setting of DB7 parameter is then mandatory The regulation is of the predictive type which allows high level performances The PI regulator corrects the little errors introduced during the magnetization characteristic detection phase The E M F Self tuning function allows the magneti
235. e period needed by the motor to decrease its TacR1 s p 0 1 999 3s speed from 100 to 0 Group F ALT RAMP Note The parameters group 2nd set is an alternate set of the parameters group 1st set the switching from 1st to 2nd set occurs enabling the terminal XM1 19 if parameter DN3 Par otherwise the 1st set will be always enabled TF1 Second time of the acceleration ramp it is the time period needed by the motor to increase 134W 0 1 999 95 its speed from 0 to 100 TF2 Second time of the deceleration ramp it is the time period needed by the motor to decrease 136w 19282 0 1 999 95 speed from 100 to 0 Group G E M F REG This group includes the parameters the Regulator aux function see EG 10 0 9999 Proportional of the motor e m f regulator 156W EG 0 8000 Integral gain of the motor e m f regulator 4 Group H GAINS ADAPT m mes o oam mas 0 100 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D B List of parameters B1 3 Drive parameters Code Default Values Description Group DRIVE IDENTIF Silcopac D serial number DAL 5 0 9999 The zero default value doesn t allow the system to start at Power Up The display shows oa STATUS TEST ENTER PAR DA1 This request tells to the user that all parameters stored in the EEPROM memory have their default value This situation occurs when the EEPROM on the board isn t still programmed e g whe
236. e using an SPDM and anRTT of the same size Three phases gt supply line L1 line reactance s SPDM cii L1 line reactance 2 NNNN NS NNNNNS herminal block located x n the board 77 JN NAYS S I I III IIAIWII NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN DAY The board PPRCRC and PPRCRD use the same printed board and differ from the quantity of the components installed IMSPD027 277 APPENDIX E Parallel of Bridges SILCOPAC D DESCRIPTION OF THE PPRCRC D BOARDS The board 15 fitted onto the SPDM P boards by means of the relevant connectors and spacers likewise the PPRCRC board is fitted onto RTT P board The C board of the SPDM will no longer be connected to the P board but to the PPRCRD board through the connectors which keep the same codes as before The two PPRCRC and PPRCRD boards are connected to each other by a flat cable X8A connectors It is also nece
237. e various slaves are called PPO Parameter Process data Object and they make up the various protocols which can be chosen by the user Each PPO in its general form is divided into two parts PKW and PZD The PKW field is used to transmit and receive the configuration parameters of the Slaves parameter field while PZD contains the process operation data process data field Five types of PPO have been defined PKW PZD PKE IND PWE 201 PZD2 PZD3 204 PZD5 PZD6 PZD7 PZD8 7209 2010 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 word word word word word word word word word word word word word word PO 14 PO 14 04 _ 1 Ll 4 14 PO I 4 1 There is at Master input and at Master output 221 Writing and reading modes of a field parameter For this type of parameters the commands sent by the Master to the slave are coded in the word in the part of message related to PKW in the following way bitlb 014 bitl 00 No operation gt 0 0 Parameter reading operation gt 0 1 Parameter writing operation gt 1 1 Special Commands gt 1 0 The second word IND of the PKW message contains the address of the parameter of the SP DM drive to be changed If the user chooses a writing command parameter the third and the fourth word in the PKW message con
238. eady waiting for the run consent the display shows 2nd level lst OFFSET SELFTUNING 2nd CURRENT SELFTUNING 3rd SPEED SELFTUNING 4th EMF SELFTUNING The self tuning sequence starts and the display shows give the run consent enabling the XM1 13 terminal SELFTUN RUNNING PLEASE WAIT at the end of the sequence the system waits for the run consent removal the display shows CORRECT SELFTUN DISABLE DRIVE disable drive the system goes in watchdog protection disables the interface keyboard and waits for the RESET CORRECT SELFTUN button the display shows press RESET press MODE to return to the 1stlevel if the converter is not disabled pressing ENTER the display shows press MODE to return to the Ist level SYSTEM RUNNING PRESS MODE if during the sequence one of the following events occurs 1 2 3 loss of the run consent protection intervention par C1 3 11 item PROTE of list a the storage of the evaluated parameters cannot take place EEPROM failure WATCHDOG Eep SP protection excessive offset on one or more analog channels probably C board failure WATCHDOG Alnp_F protection a current sample 15 greater than the max value which can be measured WATCHDOG 8 protection the DJ 8 parameter has to be decreased see par C3 1 4 performing the CURRENT SELFTUN the motor runs rotor not locked and field enabled or residual magnetism WATCHDOG lt gt 0 protection the system
239. eater then the 10 of the rated value Apply power to the terminals of output of the SPDM lt gt WARNING Connect SPDM in parallel directly on the terminals in output Connect capacitive loads to the terminals in output of the SP DM IMSPD0271 SILCOPAC D Preface e DANGER RISKOF DEATH OR ELECTRIC 5 ANB RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK AND DEATH MUST DISCONNECT ALL POWER WAIT 3 THREE MNUTES BEFORE SERMCING DRIVE OR CONTACT WTHTERMNALS FOLLOWINSTRUCTIONS IN MANUAL EARTHGROUND REQUIRED Before performing maintenance on the unit strictly follow these safety points Perform the procedure of block exclusion of electric power supply and open the main disconnecting switch of the panel Make sure that all the power supplies which reach the SPDM main and auxiliary power supply are disconnected before performing maintenance on the converter Await at least thre 3 minutes after disconnecting power supply before performing maintenance on the unit Refer to the safety plate existing on all the converters The SPDM is supplied with many automatic functions of reset and restart which can restart automatically the unit Do not activate these functions if there are dangerous situations Do not change the distances of insulation nor remove materials and insulation covers Coordinate the voltage and the rated current of the motor and the converter If you must perform some insulation tests on the motor and on the
240. ee the documentation about this subject 576 0 ON OFF Profibus serial link enable DEB 5 C ore o OFF loworr 1996 command enable via the serial link these command are AND with the relevant physical 582 1 id ONOFF commands terminal XM1 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 DEC ON OFF Logic command disable via the serial link if DEF ON the control with serial link loss 582 2 I disables automatically the parameter DEB keeping active the commands from terminals XM1 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 So itis possible to use the emergency commands The disabling of the parameter DEB Is stored in EEPROM OFF ONOFF ON board reset via Profibus See Appendix F2 5 DE1 Ptcol 583B 4 5 StAdd pe o Converter identification number IMSPD027I 103 Profibus Protocol B List of parameters SILCOPAC D Code Default Values Description vii Group E SERIAL DATA This group includes the parameters to select from diagnostic DATABASE the data no more than 10 to be transmitted via the Serial link as reply to a data request referenced as D1 data The diagnostic DATABASE includes 32 data bytes of the DRIVE TRACE D1RnSt ON OFF Reading number N of the STATUS recordings C 504 1 D1RPro OF ON OFF Reading of the word PROTECTIONS D1RAbI om ON OFF Reading of the word LOGIC 1 0 DFE 504 4 DIRAu2 DFF DFG 504 6 01 ON
241. eeds higher than the base value DB7 value The maximum achieving speed is represented by the formula NMax DBS rom The parameter can t assume percentage values lower than 087 the setting of the parameter at value lower than 087 will be ignored and signalled through the message CONSISTENCY ERROR IMSPD027 147 C Setting up SILCOPAC D C2 10 Regulator adjustment The current speed and E M F regulators adjustment are automatically or manually executed The automatic adjustment is made through the SELFTUNING function par 1 3 10 the converter performs automatically some operating cycles during which the micro controller executes the needed measurements and assigns the proper value to the related parameters The manual adjustment is made by the help of the SET UP REFERENCE function par 1 3 7 The adjustment will be accurate only if it is executed in the following order Ist armature current loop 2nd motor speed loop 3rd motor E M F loop 2 10 1 Current loop automatic calibration SetDJ8 to 100 change CT load resistors on P board if necessary see paragraph 2 3 Check thatthe current limits TA3 e TA4 are respectively 100 and 100 Power off the exciter Disable the field loss protection DCF OFF With the START command enabled supply power and control Select the SELFTUNING function then select CURRENT SELFTUNING and press enter Enable the START command and
242. een 1st and 2nd set occurs enabling terminal XM1 19 if param DN3C Par otherwise the 1st setis always enabled From aux function see description of the relevant function Selection ofthe speed feedback origin M Encod Encod From encoder set the following parameters DB8 param pulses per revolution of the encoder DB5 param max motor speed rpm From tacho generator From serial link hidden param 0 10 Zero speed threshold the threshold hysteresis set CB6 param NHist 03 0 10 Zero speed threshold hysteresis see CB5 param The hysteresis range as absolute value is defined by the following limits upper limit LSup NStop NHist lower limit LInf NStop NHist 2 0 1 IMSPDO027I 95 B List of parameters SILCOPAC D Code Default Values Description Tolerance for the reached speed signalling ErNLm 1 0 10 The signalling occurs when the difference between the speed reference before ramp and speed feedback is lower than the parameter value CB8 Recalibration of the speed feedback from encoder 300w 100 0 200 Feedback sent to the speed regulator feedback from encoder multiplied by CB8 100 i Me fo 0 2009 Lastreference set by software motopotentiometer Group C E M F REG 0 EN ON OFF Enable of the motor e m f regulator see function description ON OFF Enable of the motor field reversing aux function see functio
243. eferences to perform a slow running function J og or however the running with a constant reference set on a parameter Four internal reference values are available corresponding to the four parameters TC7 TC8 TD7 and TD8 The internal references enable is handled through the commands INTRF1 terminal XM 1 15 INTRF2 terminal 1 16 and Com3 terminal XM1 19 Com3 active command if parameter DN3 C Par enable the references programmed by TD7 and TD8 parameters instead of those programmed by TC7 and TC8 parameters INTRF1 command unlocks the converter instead of the START command terminal XM1 13 and forces on the speed reference the value programmed by TC7 or TD7 parameters depending on the Com3 status INTRF2 command unlocks the converter instead of the START command terminal XM1 13 and forces on the speed reference the value programmed by TC8 or TD8 parameters depending on the Com3 status INTRF1 command has a higher priority than the INTRF2 command and the START command INTRF2 command has a higher priority than the START command If CB2 parameter is set with the IntR ef value enabling the terminals XM1 15 and 1 16 the values programmed by TC7 TC8 or TD7 and TD8 parameters are added and not substituted to the present speed reference 186 IMSPDO027I SILCOPAC D D Auxiliary functions D9 Changeable parameters SYSTEM CONFIGURATION XM1 19 DN3 C_ Par A CURRENT SPEED E RA
244. ematic chain connecting the motor for ex reducers couplers etc Angular speed as function of the diameter it is used to re calibrate the angular speed according to the value of the diameter to keep the linear speed constant Tension regulator it is a PID regulator which can adjust the speed reference or impose a current reference It compares the set reference with the reaction coming from the transducer load cell dandy roll etc Winder open loop tension regulators for torque adjusted axial or tangent winders unwinders A10 4 List of dedicated functions 1 2 3 86 Accurate speed ratio for the speed regulation of a small line up to 6 motors with automatic management of sliding devices of each section Spindle for the control of spindle machines Ward Leonard for the control of Ward Leonard machines and digital exciters IMSPDO027I SILCOPAC D A Catalogo delle caratteristiche tecniche 105 RESOURCES USE With the resources term we mean the set of logic inputs analog inputs and available functions for the configuration of drive motor machine system The parameters management supervises the programming of the new values so to avoid that a resource is used for more than one function The control warns the user of the error showing on the user interface the message CONSISTENCY ERROR paragraphs 1 1 B1 2 B1 3 A10 5 1 SUMMARY OF ANALOG INPUTS USE Analog input Rif terminals XM1 33 34 Armature cu
245. en JP6 Like JP7 Inserted on the pins 2 3 if the armature voltage transducer is used inside Silcopac D Inserted on the pins 1 2 if an external voltage transducer is used The transducer must be connected to the terminal XM1 32 0 10V IMSPDO027I 153 C Setting up SILCOPAC D J P8 9 10 11 12 Gauging of the tacho generator voltage Insert only the jumper corresponding to the max value of the tachometric voltage or no jumpers for the highest voltage interval J P12 0 10V 11 19 JP10 20 36 JP9 37 69V 70 131V 132 250 13 Closed pins 2 3 if the access signal to the terminals 1 33 34 has a current of 0 20mA Closed on the pins 1 2 if the access signal to the terminals XM1 33 34 has a voltage of 10V JP14 Personalization of the output la monitor terminal XM1 35 Closed on the pins 1 2 if the measure of the armature current has been taken when the current is on through milliamperemeter 5 f s connected to the terminals XM 1 35 36 Closed on the pins 2 3 if the measure has been taken live See jumper J P 22 too J P15 16 17 Gauging of the armature voltage transducer Insert only the jumper corresponding to the nominal value of the armature voltage Meaningless if the jumper J P7 is closed on the pins 1 2 Armature voltage 2
246. en ete A es 79 gw 80 DE PD 81 96 Sheda e 83 ATO OpBonS and MNCOONS ee ee ee eee DIE 85 BE bp 85 UD UOTIS uu aq aaa GE tU UNUS 86 10 32 spi ARR b _ aa 86 103 CLE CIC ot G in onu u 86 TEC O ce 87 105 SUMMA US 87 10 5 2 SUMMA DUE USC s u u u u ____________ 88 PLUS AROS 89 r ic re M 89 EAD DICENDA 09 fg cr CC T 09 5 RT NM 89 DEUDA nny 90 2 as _ 92 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D Index B LIST OF PAREMETERS SOFTWARE 2 5 BASE VERSION 81 E 93 LL Connguraton R 93 TO dunia Du
247. ence obtained by the speed regulator Mechanical friction compensation it is used to compensate static and dynamic mechanical friction of the cinematic chain which connects the motor Torque Proof itis usually used in lifting system to check the actual application of the traction torque before opening the brake Load weighting it is usually used in lifting systems with de fluxed motor to re calibrate the lifting speed as function of the possibility to overload the motor Gain re calibration as function of the flux function it is used in the applications with speed regulation with defluxed motor to keep the regulator bandwidth constant for the whole speed interval Speed reaction commutation it is used to guarantee the speed regulation of a motor also in case of speed reaction loss encoder or tacho loss switching to the armature voltage regulation only with not defluxed motors Motopotentiometer it is used to generate an internal speed reference which can be changed by means of increase and decrease commands Internal references are used to set fixed internal speed references slow runs etc Changeable parameters this function is used to double the sets of available parameters for the regulators calibration for internal references and for the ramps Field inversion this function is used to manage the reversibility with a one direction starter controlling a reversible energizer Fast re start this function is used to man
248. ension feedback T e g load cell or dandy roll The value is acquired as analog signal LOAD CELL REG Tension regulator it receives the tension error from the node of comparison between the tension reference and feedback and generates a term that controls the current limit 206 5 027 SILCOPAC D E Optional functions Parameters setting Setting 2 Tension loop with load cell control of the current limit 1 2 1 2 2 CE1 CA2 TK1 2 4 1 027 Setto ON to enable the function Set to the value according to the proper tension reference source Pot tension reference from software motopotentiometer 0 100 Com1 command increases the reference value Com2 decreases the reference value terminals XM1 17 XM1 18 Rif t tension reference from Rif analog input 0 100 terminals 1 33 34 Ean1 tension reference from Ean1 analog input 0 100 terminals 1 29 31 P CJ4 tension reference from CJ 4 parameter 0 100906 Setto the value according to the proper tension feedback source Serial tension feedback from hidden parameter Addr 242 default 096 limits 20096 200 Ean2 tension feedback from Ean2 analog input 0 100 terminals 1 30 31 Tach t tension feedback from Tach analog input 0 100 terminals XM1 26 27 jumpers 8 9 10 11 12 Set to the tension re
249. ent limit CJA Setto ON to enable the tension regulator with load cell CJ B Setto ON to enable the winder CI Setto the value according to the proper tension reference source Rif tension reference from Rif analog input 0 100 terminals 1 33 34 Eanl tension reference from Ean1 analog input 0 100956 terminals XM 1 29 31 P CJ4 tension reference from CJ 4 parameter 0 100906 2 Set to the value according to the proper tension feedback source Serial tension feedback from hidden parameter Addr 242 default 0 limits 200 Ean2 tension feedback from Ean2 analog input 0 100 terminals 1 30 31 Tach tension feedback from Tach analog input 0 100 terminals 1 26 27 jumpers 8 9 10 11 12 4 Set to the tension reference value if CJ 1 P CKA Set to OFF if the tension transducer load cell dandy roll etc precedes the converter Set to ON if the tension transducer follows the converter See par 8 6 CKB Set to ON if the bumpless insertion of the tension regulator is desired at the OFF to ON transition of Com3 command the tension reference is equalled to the tension feedback allowing the regulator enable with null error CKC Set to OFF if the integral gain of the tension regulator 1 has to be calculated as function of the speed Set to ON if the integral gain of the tension regulator is desired to take a constant value set by TK2 parameter CK3 Set to a value which re calibrat
250. epends on the rotation direction that the motor had when 2 was enabled When the approaching speed will be reached and kept for 200msec min time the zero pulse acquisition phase will begin The position reference is chosen among the two parameters CG3 and CG4 depending on the motor rotation direction CG3 if forward speed CG4 if reverse speed If the gear ratio of the motor is 1 1 and the same position is required both in forward and reverse speed conditions set CG4 parameter according to the following formula CG4 DB8 CG3 where DB8 Encoder pulses number turn ratio When the position error absolute value is lower than the value set by CG5 parameter the motor is stopped and the positioning ends If CGB parameter is set to ON after the positioning the converter will go in Suppression status on the seven segments display the following symbols will appear H 3 alternatively blinking and using the Status function the display shows the message STATUS SUPPR Disable Opt Fun If CGB parameter is set to OFF at the end of the positioning the converter continues to hold the motor position and the proportional integral and derivative gains set by parameters TJ 2 TJ 3 and TJ 4 respectively will be imposed to the speed regulator When different gains than those set for the normal operating conditions are not requested to be imposed to the speed regulator set parameters TJ 2 3 and TJ 4 to the same values programmed on parameters T
251. equence during a sufficiently long time and at a sufficiently low value to allow the back lash recovery avoiding the rebounds At the end of this phase the current limits are restored to their original values through a ramp which duration can be programmed E3 1 Parameters setting COA Setto ON to enable the function 01 Set to the value at which the current limits have to be reduced each one with its own sign during the time set by CO2 parameter after the reversing phase CO2 Setto the time during which the current limits have to be reduced after the bridge reversing sequence Ramp duration according which the current limits change from the value set by C01 parameter each with its own sign to the Original value at the end of the time period set by C02 parameter Note The values of CO1 CO2 and CO3 must be chosen in an experimental way for the back lash recovery at the end of the current reversing phase so that no rebounds or temporary instability effects on the current and or on the speed take place Upper limit Reversing 8 CO1 lao CO2 gt Lower limit 200 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D E Optional functions E4 ANGULAR SPEED AS FUNCTION OF THE DIAMETER ADP The function is used in those applications where given a linear speed and acquired the diameter as analog signal the motor has to be speed regulated changing the linear speed reference to angular speed reference evaluate
252. er A Technical features Differential two channel Encoder SPDM Jumper 26 2 3 pins 5 6 78 9 10 12 L J 24v U1U1U2 U2 Ov N A N C B Encoder PUSH PULL The zero pulse if necessary may be acquired using a normally open contact selection A or a normally close contact selection B Selection umper J P23 Open See par 7 1 1 Selection B umper J P23 Close See par 7 1 1 Non differential three channel Encoder with zero pulse SPDM Jumper P26 2 3 pins 24 01 U2 U2 Ov PUSH PULL Encoder Encoder controlled from workshop with 1000 p p r Code 20651902 IMSPD0271 Differential three channel Encoder with zero pulse SPDM Jumper J P26 on 2 3 pins 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 92 05 9303 PUSH PULL Encoder 45 A Technical features SILCOPAC D the encoder pulse value is different from power supply value it is necessary to open the jumper J P 26 change the position on 1 2 and to apply on terminal XM1 5 a voltage signal with the same value of pulses The following picture represents the SPDM input circuit for the detection and the squaring of the encoder pulses XM1 22 ATTENTION k Comparator Power supply XM1 23 f S 26 XMLS o 162939 24 Comparator Power supply TP10 O 1 6 CHA 24V 1 7 1 0V Comparator TP 12
253. er revise the load resistor adjustment configuration par C2 3 and execute again the setting up The converter goes in current limit conditions during a load transient FAIL TUTUPE CHECKS ACTIONS Line over voltages If too high voltage is applied to the thyristor it can Restore the proper supply line conditions be short circuited Measuring by a multimeter ifthe Replace the thyristor anode to cathode resistance Is near to zero the is faulty Parameter change not allowed See chapter A10 5 See chapter A10 5 The value of the parameter that we will change is not compatible with other parameters Or it enables some function that needs resources already used and so not available IMSPD027I 169 C4 MAINTENANCE 4 1 Periodic maintenance The converter maintenance consists basically of a periodic inspection of the equipment Take into account that the cleaning and installation in not too hot and vibration less environments are the main precautions to avoid malfunctions during working and they result into a long life of the components A clever attention even to small shortcomings upon the periodic inspections means a long life of the converter and avoids expensive works interruptions C4 1 1 Recommended periodic maintenance operations Once the power supply has been removed clean carefully the inside of the power and control circuits removing dust and dirt A low pressure a
254. erminals XM1 13 22 is 24V 4 V but the the Start logic command status read through the Start command status read through the Hardware Status function at the item Logic Input Hardware Status function at the item Logic par C1 3 6 is M13 Start OFF Input par C1 3 6 is OFF M13 Start OFF replace C board The Enable command If the Enable command is missing Check the enabling chain If the voltage at terminal XM1 19 the voltage between terminals 19 22 is than 20V terminals 1 19 22 241 4 V but parameter Enable Com3 logic command status read through the the Com3 command status read through the Hardware Status function the item Logic Input par Hardware Status function the item Logic C1 3 6 is OFF M19 Com3 OFF Input par C1 3 6 is OFF M19 Com3 OFF replace C board Ramp command is missing If the Ramp command is missing and the parameter CBD Enable the Ramp command If the voltage terminal XM1 14 OFF the speed reference is forced to zero between terminals 14 22 424 V parameter OFF If the Ramp command is missing 4V but the Ramp command status read the voltage between terminals XM1 14 22 is than 20V through the Hardware Status function at the the Ramp logic command status read through the item Logic Input par C1 3 6 is OFF M14 Hardware Status function atthe item Logic Input par Ramp OFF repla
255. es a new EEPROM Test 5 see manual section C par 1 1 D18 BUMPLESS function The Bumpless function is used when the drive must start with a spinning motor The drive first detects the actual motor speed then it resumes control of the motor and accelerates it from the restart speed to the set value of speed reference The previous release the control started from zero speed reference conseguently sharp braking occurred The function is always enabled it does not need any setting but it needs the ramp function D19 Rampa di emergenza In order to avoid sharp braking a ramp with time programmable TH3 TacRF th4 TdcRF 0 999 95 for emergency stop is available Forthe operation see the block diagram Appendix D F 3 D20 Regenaritive braking disable The function effective with four quadrant converters allows to avoid the fuses breaking in some applications in which for different causes excessive reduction of the power supply voltage it has no been possible to keep the proper margin between the power supply voltage and the armature voltage The function disable the regenerative braking if the armature voltage is greater than a programmable threshold value It is possible to enable the function by the parameter CEC Dis Reg ON OFF and to set the threshold by the parameter Output voltage threshold if the armature voltage value is greater than the threshold value the regenerative braking is disabled If
256. es the integral gain of the tension regulator when this is calculated as function of the speed Setto value which re calibrates the tension regulator output The tension regulator output is divided by the value set by this parameter lower the value greater will be the tension regulator effect in the correction of the speed reference CK2 Set to Winder value the tension regulator acts on the current limit speed regulator saturated by a summing term Setto Tang value tangential winder CL2 Setto the cutoff frequency value of the double slope digital filter at the regulator output to disable set CL2 0 CL3 Setto Wind value for winder reel Setto Unwind value for unwinder reel CL4 Set to Normal if the passage of the material on the winder unwinder is that defined for the normal operation Set to Rev if the passage of the material on the winder unwinder is opposite to that defined for the normal operation 0 Normal material top winded Rev material bottom winded or vice versa Set to if the operating condition Normal Rev is defined by the analog input status available on the SPDIO optional board not active Normal operation Com6 active Rev Operation CL5 Set to the current value expressed in percentages depending on the motor rated current needed to apply the desired tension to maximum diameter CB2 Set to AuxAdd value the speed reference summing
257. eters We briefly show here the meaning of those auxiliary variables referring to the schemes described at the par 8 3 1 8 3 2 8 3 3 8 3 4 7 3 5 and 7 3 6 ToRef ToRef Tension reference after function TAPER To T Comp Closed loop tension regulator output load cell dandy roll T CURRENT FEEDBACK DiamMeasured Calculated Diameter 96 To lao To lao Tension Ref block output TAPER i Iner Inertia Comp block output Iner N 1055 Mechanic Loss block output ia M_Logs LK_N 222 IMSPD027 SILCOPAC D E Optional functions PARAMETERS E6 1 Configuration Parameters Code Name Default Values Description Group G POSITION REG AA A A A A A A A4AAAA 4 8 R Note this group includes the parameters of the Angular Position Regulator aux function eme Possp OFF ON OFF Pulses suppression enable after the positioning CGC Enable the display of the rotor position programm 1 or Aux2 or Aux3 with the value 430 2 PosF Dk oF ON OFF RotPos par 065 DG6 and 067 ar o e Re calibrati
258. f the SPDI1 Interface STATUS function see par C1 3 1 The LED shows a letter or a letter and a figure that alternate by blinking decimal point the converter is properly operating otherwise the point is always ON or OFF flashing TEST converter failure least test failed the number alternating to the letter is the flashing hexadecimal code of the running or failed test to restore push RESET button on C board terminal 1 21 another option 15 to push at same time for a time greater than 1 second the three aligned buttons U D on user interface when provided synchronism loss 0 phase detector circuit failure T 1 line voltage beyond tolerance 2 line frequency beyond tolerance T 3 ID converter nr 0 T 4 fallure T 5 armature current not 0 6 RAM failure 7 PROTECTION converter failure at least one protection is active p flashing The digit alternating to the letter P is the hexadecimal code of the active protection The active protection 15 stored with the exception of Ext P to restore push 5 button on C board terminal 1 21 another option is to push at the same time for a time LE greater than 1 second the three aligned buttons U D MODE on user interface when provided line loss external protection max instantaneous current watchdog intervention max armature voltage
259. ference value if CJ 1 P 4 Set to OFF if the tension transducer load cell dandy roll etc precedes the converter Set to ON if the tension transducer follows the converter See par 8 6 Set to ON if the bumpless insertion of the tension regulator is desired at the OFF to ON transition of Com3 command the tension reference is equalled to the tension feedback allowing the regulator enable with null error Set to OFF if the integral gain of the tension regulator 1 has to be calculated as function of the speed Set to ON if the integral gain of the tension regulator is desired to take a constant value set by TK2 parameter Set to a value which re calibrates the integral gain of the tension regulator when this is calculated as function of the speed Set to value which re calibrates the tension regulator output The tension regulator output is divided by the value set by this parameter lower the value greater will be the tension regulator effectin the correction of the speed reference Setto ILoop value the tension regulator acts on the current limit speed regulator saturated by a summing term Setto AuxAdd value the speed reference summing term has the value set by CE1 parameter Set to the value needed by the speed reference summing term to maintain proper saturated the speed regulator offset speed Set to AuxRic value the current limits are controlled by the tension regulator The tension re
260. fety Ground grounding for EMC connection with mass housing with low inductance B AK1 AK3 AK5 Remarks Internal ground connections Additionally to the PE connections good HF connections to the ground must be realized with the aid of a mounting plate which has well conducting surface sheet metal from zinc plated steel for example The RFI filter the inputs reactors and the drive must be pressed directly to the mounting plate by at least four fixing bolts and the seating Surfaces of the housings must be free from non conducting coating The PE bar must be connected with the mounting plate by many bolts which are distributed along whole length with equal distances All devices are connected with the PE bar by the mounting plate and also by the PE conductors and the PE bar is earthed via the PE conductor of the 3 phase power cable Mounting plate SPDM External earth connctions The drive shall be earthed only by the earth conductor of the line cable an additional local earthing especially at the motor raises the level of the RF noise on the line cable Earth connection between motor and driven machine The earth of a grounded driven machine must masa ce be connected to the earth of the driving motor e e 9 in order to avoid floating potential separately and with respect to the special application Additionally the general installation an
261. ful to freeze the system behaviour when the automatic lock is not provided This command can be transmitted to the system via the serial link it is an auxiliary table of the DRIVE TRACE that remembers to the user the meaning of the 16 bits of the PROTECTION group the meaning of the 16 bits of the LOGIC 1 0 group the meaning of the 4 bits ofthe Auxl Aux2 Aux3 variables if programmed as AuxDgn and the meaning of the 8 bits of the ALARMS group Appendix C shows a printout example if the converter is in protection conditions STATUS PROTE pressing ENTER the system will start the printout of THYRISTOR TRACE DRIVE TRACE If the converter isn t locked the system waits for this condition the display shows AUTOPRINT WAITING FOR STOP At the protection intervention the printout will be automatically enabled without pressing ENTER IMSPD027 SILCOPAC D C User Interface C1 3 10 Self tuning This functions allows to automatically tune the converter including the tuning of the current regulator of the speed regulator and of the motor e m f regulator 1st level in disabled converter conditions using U D buttons select the Self tuning function SELECT FUNCTION SELFTUNING U D press ENTER to access to the 2nd level using buttons U D select an item of list a Warning the self tuning will be correct one only if itis executed in the following order press ENTER before pressing see Note 2 in list a The system is r
262. g 4 shows as example the diagram related to Silcopac SPDM 600 converter nominal current 600 The diagram is normally used to evaluate the value starting from the known values of Inom lv Tp and Ts in the following way from the Fig 4 example 600A lv 240 A Ts 50 s Tp 10 s Ts ratio has to be evaluated at point A Ts 210 50 0 2 trace the vertical line from to the intersection with the curve related to the time 10 5 trace the horizontal line from B to the intersection C with the line PQ related to the ratio Iv Inom 0 0 trace the vertical line from C to the intersection D with the curve related to the ratio Iv Iv Inom 240 600 0 4 trace the horizontal line from D to the intersection E with the vertical axis where the value of this ratio can be read 1 32 from which Ip can be evaluated multiplying by Ip 1 32 x 600 792 Note 1 the AB segment value read on the vertical axis gives the Ipo ratio from which Ipo can be evaluated AB 1 47 Ipo 21 47 x 600 882 Note 2 the non repetitive load cycle shown by Fig 3 can be considered a particular case of the cycle shown by Fig 1 where the Ts time becoms infinitely large The diagram shown by Fig 5 is used as just described entering at point A with Tp Ts 0 from A go up to B Tp 10 s from B to point C on line PQ from C go down to poin
263. g the reset pushbutton the system will be restored The line loss protection intervention is not stored if the converter is in suppression or external protection status The external protection interventions is not stored No protection is stored when the parameter CDA OFF Manual IMSPD024K and jumper J 4 is inserted on pins 2 3 par 2 11 CL2 Signalling LEDS In addition to the seven segments led display an other information on the converter status is given by three leds placed in the lower right side of the C board DL1 RED ON when the motor Is running DL2 RED ON when the converter is ready OFF if there is a protection stored except external fault protection P 1 Ext P DL3 GREEN when the boards are supplied DL1 012 013 BOARD as XM1 TERMINAL BOARD 112 5 027 SILCOPAC D C13 Interface The setting up of the digital converter 15 made through an interface consisting of a liquid crystal display a seven segments led and four keys called SP DI1 or SPDI2 this interface can be permanently clamped on the C board and connected to connector X7 of the board via a flat cable or it can be located up to 2m from the board The other possibility is to disconnected and remove the interface at the end of the setting up The basic diagnostics will be available in this case through the 7 segments LED display described at par C1 1 Seven segment LED display Keys to se
264. gital output OUTS digital output Parameters for the output meaning selection active alarm current limit conditions OFF FWD bridge ON REV bridge pulses enable conditions reached speed threshold CB7 isteresys CB6 max armature voltage or armature voltage transducer failure diameter evaluation error WINDER aux function Current threshold exceeded CE5 parameter Speed threshold exceeded CE6 parameter isteresys CB6 Position error less then threshold CG5 parameter Speed error greater then CF5 par in absolute value for a time greater than CF6 par Crane application This group includes the parameters associated to the motor magnetization characteristic acquired 8 points The characteristic 6 linearly approximated from point to point 1 4 Group Q PASSWORD IMSPD027I 109 B List of parameters SILCOPAC D 110 IMSPD027I USER INTERFACE The user can exchange data with the converter through one of the following interfaces a seven segment LED display for basic diagnostics SPDI1 module for extended diagnostics and for the setting up a SPDI2 module similar to the previous one but with the printer output 1 1 Seven segments led display The display is located on C board it shows the basic diagnostics information about the Power up and Reset tests about the eventual intervention of the protections and the operating state of the converter has the same meaning o
265. gulator calibration is performed assigning the values of the proportional gain and if CKC ON the values of the integral gain of the regulator itself Set to the proportional gain value of the tension regulator Set to the integral gain value of the tension regulator if CKC ON The tension regulator output will be limited by parameters TK3 positive limit and TK4 negative limit Set to the positive limit value of the tension regulator output Set to the negative limit value of the tension regulator output Set the parameters related to the enable and setting of the Taper function par 8 7 Set the parameters related to the enable of the zero speed tension function par 8 8 207 E Optional functions SILCOPAC D 5 3 3 Setting 3 Axial winder control of the current limit Diameter Line Line speed speed Angular speed it 15 an open loop tension regulator it used for winder or unwinder systems the terms related to the tension reference to the inertia compensation and to mechanical losses compensation are calculated and summed by a summing node whose output controls the current limit the speed regulator is saturated by a term summed to the reference The information related to the diameter value can be acquired by an external transducer or it can be calculated as line speed angular speed ratio NoRic Current Limits No SPEED N 2 DIAMETER CALC INERTIA Density Width
266. hat the transducer gives a 10V output voltage at the maximum diameter allowed by the machine Diameter calculated as line speed to angular speed ratio In minimum diameter conditions minimum spindle without material and reel function disabled COM3 OFF check that the linear speed measured on the minimum spindle be equal to the maximum line speed when a 100 reference is applied Setup Reference Cont Speed Ref If this is not adjust CB8 parameter if CB3 Encod or DJ 1 parameter if CB3 Tach until the proper linear speed value will be reached Diameter ramp Parameter CN5 must be setto the time value as seconds needed by the system to go from the minimum to the maximum diameter winder or vice versa un winder when the line speed has its maximum value 10090 All the diameter variations greater than those allowed by the set value are filtered Increasing sequence When the machine wind the material the diameter must take increasing values until its maximum value 10096 will be reached at the end of the working cycle In this case CL3 parameter will be set to Wind value each new diameter value will be compared to the last previously acquired calculated value and if lower it will be ignored Decreasing sequence When the machine unwind the material the diameter must take decreasing values until its minimum value CN1 will be reached at the end of the working cycle In this case CL3 parameter will be set to Unwind value
267. he 1st set will be always enabled Dos 0 9999 Second proportional gain of the current regulator 0 255 Second derivative gain of the current regulator Len laTL1 100 100 Second upper current limit as of 032W laBL1 100 100 Second lower current limit as of TB5 100 Additional term to be added to the armature current reference it is selected by the Gruppo C SPEED REG Note The parameters group 1st set is an alternate set of the parameters group D 2nd set the switching from 1stto 2nd set occurs enabling the terminal XM1 19 if parameter DN3 otherwise the 1st set will always enabled EA N_Gp1 0 9999 First proportional gain of the speed regulator d Men 08000 First integral gain of the speed regulator TC3 N Gdl 0 255 First lead lag network derivative section of the speed regulator it is implemented as filter 054W with zero and pole on the feedback The characteristic frequencies of the filter have the following values filter pole Wp 3 20 48 rad s filter zero Wz TC3 102 4 rad s To disable the filter set TC3 to 0 AF 100 0 120 First FWD speed limit NoLIl 1009 120 0 First REV speed limit 011 100 Additional term to be added to the speed reference It is selected by the CB2 parameter HS First internal reference no 1 Its value will be replaced to the speed reference when the INTRF1 Wen 100 input i
268. he analog inputs the offset null on the acquisition circuits is needed SERRE SR ESSERE AREA GS GS GS SES GG GU UG S S US GGG GS GG GN GS GN SE IN IE INS UR IR IET UR IR INTE SS IS S SG TS RS I IS G4 SR GG I S SS GG GG SS GG GS GN IN SG GU UE GUN ES US GUESS SR S SS GN SR SE SG S S GS SR SR SS SS INR IE Y SS IR IR INS GR GS S HE Gs Gs GG Gs Gg s SE S ua ua s su RR na manually carry out the offset tuning r 2 n x n ERROR M P Beers sn a 2
269. he operating diameter the filters made by the diameter ramp 8 9 2 and by the increasing decreasing sequence 8 9 3 8 9 4 will be ignored The transition from last operating diameter before the rising edge of Com 1 to the new diameter occurs through 10s ramp Com1 Operating diameter Acquired calculate d diameter The figure shows the condition with a winder in which the new acquired calculated diameter is lower than the last operating value At the rising edge of Com1 command the diameter goes to the proper value by a 10s ramp Com2 command At the rising edge of Com2 command terminal XM1 17 transition from inactive to active command the starting diameter whose source is set by CN2 parameter is immediately acquired Parameters CN1 Set to the minimum diameter value core as percentage of the maximum diameter CN2 Set this parameter to select the source of the starting diameter P_CN3 starting diameter from CN3 parameter Ean starting diameter from Ean1 analog input terminals XM1 29 31 Ean2 starting diameter from Ean2 analog input terminals XM1 30 31 CN3 Set to the starting diameter value when CN2 P CN3 CN4 Set to the speed threshold before which the diameter is not calculated CN5 Set this parameter to select the diameter source calculated diameter only from Ean1 analog input terminals 1 29 31 Ean2 diameter from Ean2 analog input terminals XM1 30 31
270. hows in 6 an item of list b in connection to the items PROTE or SUPPR of list Trace stop mode conditions can be programmed through the DGA and DGB parameters if the Trace acquisition is not stopped the display shows Notes 1 armature current reference in of lay 3 digits plus sign 2 armature current feedback in of law 3 digits plus sign 3 alfa phase angle of the converter in electrical degrees 3 digits 4 T conducting thyristors pair identified by the following code 1 digit Conducting thyristors Invalid records 5 5 system status identified by the following code 1 digit System status Test Protection zero speed see 5 6 parameters FWD speed Lu REV speed 1 027 125 User Interface SILCOPAC D 1 3 9 Printing menu This function allows to print the traces Thyristors Trace and Drive Trace and all parameters configuration tuning drive parameters the SPDI 2 interface with CENTRONICS connector is required for the parallel printer connection The SPDI 1 interface doesn t provide this connector 1st level using buttons U D select the Printing Menu function pressing ENTER with 1 interface the function will be disabled and the display will show SPDI2 user interface is fully factory set so that it can be connected between a Silcopac D and ON Centronics parallel printer The four DIP SWITCH
271. ic Drive Trace record has to be interpreted as follow N amp Status bit 15 bit8 bit7 bitl 00 Y Y Y Y T Y X X X Status Drive n record The Status Drive decoding is descripted on the paragraph F 2 2 2 0 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D APPENDIX E Parallel of Bridges 2 2 14 Significato campi T amp S Protections del Thyristor Trace The amp S word which coincide with the field no 3 of a generic Thyristorn Trace record has to be interpreted as follow T amp S bit 15 bit 8 bit 7 bit 1 bit 0 Y Y Y Y y Y M X X X Status Drive n thyristor The Status Drive decoding is described on the paragraph 2 2 The Protections word which coincide with the field no 4 of a generic Thyristor Trace record is the same word of the Drive Trace field no described on the paragraph 2 1 1 3 F2 3 Negative results of writing and reading commands As a result of the above commands the user can get error codes identifying the cause of the command failure If bit 2 of the word of PPO in reading is on the command request contains an error The identification code of the error is written in the third word while the word IND will contain the address of the involved parameter The error codes currently implemented are Error code Meaning Parameter out of range The data does not exist 3 Parameter consistency error Data not allowed in profibus exchange The above situation is frozen in the previously mentioned words un
272. ill be connected to earth potential through the EMC filter capacitors of the drive This may cause danger or damage the unit The filter shall not be connected to the drive output motor side Unsymmetrically Grounded Networks Unsymmetrically grounded networks are defined in the following table In such networks the filter internal connection must be disconnected If the grounding configuration of the network is unknown remove RFI filter internal connection Unsymmetrically Grounded Networks RFI filter must be disconnected Ground at the mid point of a Ground at the corner of the leg delta IMSPD027 209 APPENDIX E EMC Standards and applicable Standards SILCOPAC D 15 SPDM COMPLIANCE WITH IEC 61800 3 CE MARK A CE mark is attached on each drive in order to certificate the compliance of the SPDM converters to the provisions of the European Low Voltage and EMC Directives Directive 73 23 EEC and 89 336 EEC and as amended by Directives 91 263 EEC 92 31 EEC 93 68 and 93 97 EEC The SPDM is almost exclusively used the second enviroment categories C3 and C4 To limit the emitted interference SPDM is equipped with EMC filter installed outside the chassis according the limits defined in Category C3 Optional EMC filters are available on request for use in the first ambient SPDM complies with noise immunity requirements defined in EN 61 800 3 for the second enviroment and thus also with the lower noise i
273. in of the tension regulator with load cell when itis calculated 470B i 0 200 as speed function parameter OFF Group L WINDER REG Note this group includes the parameters for the setting of the open loop tension regulator Winder Selection of the open loop tension regulator type Axial winder 4748 Tangential winder CL2 20 0 255 Cutoff frequency of the filter at the Winder regulator 475B 5 rad s output To disable CL2 0 1 ili ul Selection of the Winder operating mode Wind Winder w wa Unwinder Selection of the material passage mode Normal Material passage in the normal setting Rev Material passage in the alternate setting COM6 The material passage is given by the status of COM6 logic command available with SP DIO OFF normal setting ON alternate setting CL5 Recalibration of the armature current wanted at max tension and max diameter of rated 478W 0 200 armature current Group M INERTIA COMP COME nus 0 m ON OFF Inertia Compensation function enable Selection of the inertia compensation type wm wm Constant compensation Variable inertia compensation Winder Selection of the material density signal source From CM4 parameter From Ean2 analog input terminals XM1 30 31 From If analog input terminals XM1 28 31 Selection of the material width signal source mus mE c From CM5 parameter From Ean2 analog input
274. inals 1 37 38 10V Analog output PWM2 terminals XM1 39 41 10V Analog output PWM3 terminals XM1 40 41 10V Signal of the XTAL oscillator of the SPDS1 board RS 485 Trimmer for la Monitor setting IMSPD027 SILCOPAC D C Setting up C2 16 P Board terminals and trimmers X x2 3 x4 5 12 x6 7 13 x52 X54 X56 x58 x60 X62 A B C D A C P24 P15 155 P5 GND N15 N15s N24 N24F 53 55 57 59 61 63 P board c Terminal Block XM2 Fastons for the connection of the armature voltage feedback Va on snubber board Armature feedback signal test point Reserved jumper ventilation loss for parallel converters Reserved fastons ventilation loss for parallel converters Reserved fastons armature current for parallel converters R176 Resistor for the magnetizing current compensation of 1 R177 Resistor for the magnetizing current compensation of TA2 R193 CT load resistor par 2 3 R194 CT load resistor par 2 3 J umper reserved J umper reserved Reversible converter connection Reversible converter connection Uni directional converter connection 24 V supply voltage test point 15 V supply voltage test point adjusted by trimmer P 1 15 V held supply voltage test point 5 V supply voltage test point adjusted by trimmer P3 Control circuit OV test point 15 V supply voltage test point adjusted by trimmer 2
275. ing a lifting operation At the start the current rises to the limit value 1 in a time that is a function of the current regulator tuning When the value is reached the digital output OUT1 set to proof goes high and opens the brake After the delay set by CF2 the current limits go back to the values set by the parameters TA3 and 4 and if the brake is unlocked the motor starts At the Stop the motor decelerates till zero speed at this moment the digital output OUT1 goes back to low status and close the brake 182 IMSPDO027I SILCOPAC D D Auxiliary functions D5 Load weighing SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Lifting Com3 Parameters CFC ON Load weighing aux function enabled CF3 Plan with friction torque compensation during the lowering CF6 Plan with time required to carry out load weighing each unit corresponds to 2 software cycles equal to 20 ms if CD3 2 10ms Commands Com3 terminal XM 1 19 not active function enabled Function description The function used in lifting applications cranes etc which operate with de fluxed motors allows to always obtain maximum motor speed according to the required torque This is done by recalibrating the speed reference value on coefficient K so as to avoid the motor current exceeding the nominal value in steady state conditions At the beginning before weighing motor speed is zero the recalibration coefficient is
276. ions reducing investigation to the mere interpretation of the intervention cause Every time a failure condition occurs it is then necessary to verify that Silcopac D internal protections are all enabled or check for the cause that otherwise would have produced the intervention Some protections can be set as alarm avoiding that their intervention locks the converter in this case Silcopac D shows the alarms status that be decoded referring to the PROTE amp ALARMS function par C1 3 11 or to the DRIVE TRACE printout par C 1 3 9 C3 1 Protection intervention decoding The occurred protection decoding is done through the user interface selecting the STATUS function see 1 1 1 3 1 1 3 11 or through the DRIVE TRACE printout par C 1 3 9 C3 1 0 P Q Line loss protection intervention selecting the STATUS function par C1 3 1 the display shows PROTECTION This protection is made by a voltage supervisor hardware circuit P15 N15 and P5 The protection intervention due to a P5 value higher than 5 25V or lower than 4 75 causes the converter reset sequence FAIL HYPOTHESIS CHECKS ACTIONS Supply line voltage drop at terminals Check the supply line voltage and the synchronisms Restore the supply line XM2 U V W or loss of one phase or presenza di buchi di rete di breve durata notch Power supply failure The supply voltages are beyond tolerance Measure the values If the supply voltage values
277. ipment 3 The motor and control cables are selected as specified in the Hardware Manual 4 The drive is installed according to the instructions given in the Hardware Manual 260 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D APPENDIX E EMC Standards and applicable Standards EMC COMPLIANT INSTALLATION filters are series wired on the supply line of the drive therefore they have to be sized according to the load current of the device It is compulsory wiring the filter with the sequence in the following figure MAINS SUPPLY FILTER REACTOR DC DRIVE The choke should be connected between filter and drive Wiring the filter in the wrong sequence can damage the converter In case a Separation transformer is applied its screen and iron core must be grounded in order utilise the filtering effect If no static screen 15 present an appropriate filter must be used Table 1 1 DRIVE RFI FILTER 500V 10 50 60Hz 4 S MM NUN uM 3 3 xs E SPDMO30 F 30 30 2 29 50 420 26 asa SPDMO0 F 80 76 EC40351 50 90 170 151 90 SPDMOB0 F 80 80 ELC407250 65 5590 170 151 90 SPDMIG0 F 0 10 40732504 150 2 280 151 SPDM200 F 200 20 F SPDM260 F
278. ir blow or a vacuum cleaner can be used for cleaning avoiding damage to the components Check that all posts on the terminal blocks are well tight and that there are no loose components Check that all press on connectors fastons and the terminal blocks are firmly seated into their receptacles It is important especially in case of long operation cycles to check the status of the contactor replace periodically both the main and the auxiliary contacts The malfunctions of the run contactor may compromise the proper converter operation Check the motor brushes collector and bearings according to the manufacturer instructions C4 2 Thyristors replacement C4 2 1 Sizes 1 Ill IIL and IILL For these sizes insulated base thyristors are used to replace these thyristors operate according to the following sequence refer to Fig 1 and to the bridges layout in the appendix Remove the converter power supply Remove the closure front panel four fasteners Disconnectthe two connectors from XM1 terminal block pulling them down Disconnect the two flat cable connectors X8 and X9 from C board Remove C board acting on the four attachment nuts if RS485 options is installed remove the protection cover forcing on the pressure fixing points and remove the board unscrewing the three nuts Disconnect XM2 connector special bayonet cap f SPAE1 exciter is installed disconnect X11 connector from P board Disconnect X10 co
279. its U NET Speederorbeforeramp EMF Evaluated motor e m f Ud RI Motop Reference from the software motopotentiometer Period Supply line period given in ms Le 20 0 means 200 ms 0 1 1 Duty C Duty Cycle discontinuity rate of the armature current 0 0 continuos current 70 0 null current Free T Free residual time of the uC as of the cycle time see parameter The free time expressed as ms is given by the following formula Auxl CD3 100000 ms Power Power sourced by the motor given by Ud e la as of the nominal value Udy e lay Ud armature voltage as of the nominal voltage la armature current as of the lay current To Ref T Comp Diam lao To Iner M Loss N Prop N Int N Der dNo dt Line N M Temp Motor to ambient temperature delta 100 00 0 C Temp _ Converter to ambient temperature delta 100 UI UnfPer N Torque RotPos _ MecPow Motor shaft power in of the rated power Profib Variable sent by a Master Profibus 105 B List of parameters SILCOPAC D Name Default Values Description Selection of the meaning assigned to the Aux2 aux variable In example selecting Tach as DG6 value then DG6 Tach the following self assignment is generated Aux2 Tach Selection of the meaning assigned to the Aux3 aux variable In example selecting Err as 613B 2n edi 1 DG7 value the DG7 N
280. lace the exciter Execute the field current adjustment par C2 8 It is possible that due to a too short ramp time the E M F regulator force a field current reference change faster than the possible time as function of the motor field time constant increase the ramp time If the anomaly persist replace the exciter 163 C Troubles shooting SILCOPAC D C3 1 6 P 6 Tacho generator loss protection intervention selecting the STATUS function par C1 3 1 the display shows PROTECTION TachF FAIL HYPOTHESIS CHECKS ACTIONS Encoder feedback The data recorded on the DRIVE TRACE par C1 3 9 show that Check the encoder wires integrity Encoder signal loss the speed is zero while the armature voltage has a value higher and the proper connection to than the value of the parameter 002 Setting an angle reference terminals 1 6 7 8 9 Replace through the Set up Reference function par C1 3 7 gives a zero the encoder speed and connecting a scope to the test point TP 10 TP 11 TP12 and TP 13 par C2 15 don t show the encoder pulses Encoder feedback The data recorded on the DRIVETRACE par C1 3 9 show that Replace C board Encoder interface circuit the speed is zero while the armature voltage has a value higher failure than the value of the parameter DD2 Setting an angle reference the Set up Reference function par C1 3 7 gives a zero speed and connecting a scope to the test point TP 10 TP 11 TP12 and T
281. lates are the best solution in case of coated surfaces remove the coat in the connection area or 15 use abrasive washers Grounding must be carried out M using short high frequency cables flat plaited wires with sch ov sch ov great section These must be connected to collector ground bars which are grounded to a single point Y connection board XM1 22 9 GROUND BAR Connections to the cabinet carpentry Size connect the proper little bolt on the heatsink to the cabinet carpentry by a wire having 6 mm2 section minimun The path must be the shortest one size Il lll HIL HILL the connection is made by one of the fastening brackes duly marked the connection must guarantee a good contact size IV V the connection is made by the fastening screws of the cabinet the connection must guarantee a good contact Shields bar it must be connected to the cabinet ground bar by wire having 6 mm2 section minimum The path must be the shortest one All signals must be properly shielded The wire shields must be connected to the shields bar at the other end of the wire the shields must never be connected 1 1 Terminal board C BOARD O Shieds bar 6mm To panel ground bar Terminal 0 V it must be connected to the ground bar by a wire having 6 mm2 section minimum As an example valid in most cases this terminal may be connected to
282. lation Axial winder CM7 CM6 by dy where CM7 ACCT1 max reel acceleration time CM6 AccTo empty reel acceleration time acceleration time measured with a convenient coll DM max width to convenient coil width ratio lt 1 dy max density to material density of the convenient coil ratio x1 function of the diameter f d u where 4 90 min diameter as percentage of the max diameter lt 1 Dc convenient coil diameter as percentage of the max diameter lt 1 E5 9 4 Maximum acceleration time calculation Tangential reel 4 2 4 1 95 2 CM8 6 7 6 d 1 T Tc CM6 d br 04 44 d br 04 44 where CM8 AccT2 max reel acceleration time CM7 AccT1 empty reel and supported core acceleration time CM6 AccTO empty reel and without core acceleration time Tc acceleration time measured with a convenient coil Dr material width of the convenient coil related to the max width lt 1 d material density of the coil related to the max density x1 Dc convenient coil diameter as percentage of the max diameter x1 dg min diameter as percentage of the max diameter lt 1 220 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D E Optional functions E5 10 Tension Max Range Winder function In the usual conditions the max tension 100 is that the drive can supply in all working conditions and is the tension that the motor can supply with the nominal current an
283. laves can be connected in one segment The bus is terminated by an active bus terminator at the beginning and end of each segment To ensure error free operation both bus terminations must always be powered When more than 32 stations are used repeaters line amplifiers must be used to connect the individual bus segments The maximum cable length depends on the transmission speed and cable type The specified cable length can be increased using the repeaters The use of more than 3 repeaters in series 15 not recommended Table A9 5 1 Line parameters Impedance 135 165 3 to 20 Mhz 100 130 1 gt 100 2 Capacity lt 30 lt 60 pF m Resistance lt 110 Wire gauge gt 0 64 mm gt 0 53 mm Conductor area gt 0 34 mm2 gt 0 22 mm2 PROFIBUS Cable and connector TYPE SAP CODE YE Q sMCOE 1 CONNECTOR 9P ELC226056 CABLE ELC226058 0 229306 E g following cables can be used Belden Profibus Data Cable 3079A Siemens SINEC L2 LAN cable for Profibus 6XV1 830 0AH10 WARNING Use strictly the connector shown in the upper table see also figure on the next page A9 4 2 Profibus fieldbus connections Bus connector signals Profibus Fieldbus Board is connected to the Connector X1 pin fieldbus through a 9 pin female sub D Shield Cable shield connector Al ____ Supply voltage plus 5V ROMP 3 Receie Transmit data plus B takes place through the standard GT3000
284. lay controlled signals be run as twisted pairs Never mix 24 VDC and 115 230 VAC signals in the same cable Maximum section of the control cables 1 5mm2 AWG 16 e Control signal cables must be kept at a distance greater than 0 3m 1 foot from power cables Keep both power cables and signal cables in separate raceways If itis necessary to cross power and signal cables cross at a 90 right angle Crossing possible at 90 Power cable Figure 1 2 Cable Routing Control cables 262 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D APPENDIX E EMC Standards and applicable Standards POWER CABLES WITH SCREENS Power cables with screens are necessary if they run over long distances greater than 20 m where they are susceptible to environmental conditions The transfer impedence ZT of the power cable must be less 0 1 in the frequency range up to 100 2 in order to ensure an effective reduction of emission and a significant increase of immunity The screen must be pressed by a well conducting metal clamp directly against the mounting plate of the PE bar of converter cubicle If itis not possible to use the shielded cables use a pipeline metallic raceway with a minimum covering of 80 and without interruptions by connecting the side adjacent to the starting device to the earth bar of the panel RFI FILTER CONNECTION LINE LOAD ture Du a u Figure E1 3 Drive connection
285. ld current feedback Uvo line voltage Alfa thyristor firing delay angle A generic thyristor trace record Is build as follow Field n 0 n 1 2 lao 155 _ Protections _ 268 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D APPENDIX E Parallel of Bridges The meanings of the above mentionated flelds are the follow lao armature current reference la armature current reference Alfa thyristor firing delay angle they re the thiristor number and the drive status These information are coded as follow the thyristor number on the least significant byte and the drive status on the most significant byte e Protections protections status in case they should intervened F2 2 1 1 Commands coding The coding layout is the follow word PKE 015 bit 14 bit7 06 bits 04 bit 00 Drive trace parameter request 2 gt 0 0 0 1 Thyristor Trace parameter request gt 0 0 1 0 These two commands can request a parameter inside definite record of one of the two chosen Traces The choice of the parameter is done by giving the information of the e field related to the parameter inside the record e record number These two further information should be written in the IND word as follow word IND bit 15 bit 8 bit 7 bit 1 bit 0 record number gt X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X M Campo parametro On the PKW part of the chosen protocol reading are stored the result
286. ld for the signalling on logic output See parameters from DO1 to DO6 S 0 100 96 Speed threshold for the signalling on logic output See parameters from DO1 to DO6 IMSPD027I 97 Gruppo E AUX FUNCT 1 B List of parameters SILCOPAC D Code Name Default Values Description Group F AUX FUNCT 2 CFA 400 0 NUS ON OFF Torque proof aux function enable See function description Load Weighting aux function enable See function description CFD 400 3 Flux_R ON OFF Recalibration of the speed regulator gain as function of the motor flux Selection of the base speed value and of the speed feedback origin depending on logic input CFF FUd C3 OFF ONOFF status terminal XM1 19 ah 4 400 5 If par and is neither active nor programmed on Par see par speed feedback origin is defined by parameter CB3 whereas base speed 15 defined by par DB7 If par ON is both active and programmed on PAR see par DN3 speed feedback origin is drawn from aramature current base speed is set to 100 and the flux takes the value set by parameter CC4 CF1 Reduction factor of the current limit during the brake opening transient See Torque proof aux 402W 0 100 function description 100 9 955 Time period expressed in software cycles see par CD3 during which the CF1 parameter is 404B acting See Torque proof aux functi
287. lect groups and features and to select and change parameters SELECT FUNCTION INSTRUMENT MODE SILCOPAC D C User Interface Liquid crystal Display Key to access to the upper level menu mode lt Key to confirm the choice or to access to the lower level menu Through the interface several functions can be performed as the determination of the converter setup the adjustment of proper parameters the verification of the converter operation the diagnostics of the failures in other words the interface is the communication media between the user and the converter NOTE The seven segments LED 7 shows by a letter or by a letter and a digit that blink alternately the basic diagnostic information described in the paragraph C 1 1 If the interface is connected the seven segment LED placed on the C board is disabled The SPDI2 interface includes a CENTRONICS connector for the connection to a parallel printer par C1 3 9 The SPDII interface do not includes this connector The required functions and parameters are arranged in a menu structure on several hierarchical levels so to have an easy and tidy communication with the user The figure C1 3 shows the structure and for the first level menu the list of all the functions provided 1st level FUNCTIONS STATUS CONF PARAMETERS TUN PARAMETERS DRV PARAMETERS INSTRUMENT MODE HARDWARE STATUS SETUP REFERENCE THYRISTOR TR
288. ling of Profibus protocol DEB S Com OFF ON OFF Enabling of logic commands via P rofibus these commands are in and with the corresponding physical commands terminals XM 1 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 DEC S OFF ON OFF Disabling of logic commands via serial link if DEC is on the system in case of serial failure disables automatically the DEB parameter keeping active only the physical commands In this way it s allows to use the manual emergency commands The disabling of par DEB is stored in eeprom DE1 Ptcol PP01 PP01PP02 Types of protocols PP03PP04 5 2 StAdd 3 3 32 Range of choice of station number it starts with 3 because the slaves in case of a PLC Siemens Simatic are seen beginning with station n 3 The following group manages the setup of the enabling of process data which can be exchanged between a master and the slaves Group F Serial Data The following group of process data 15 considered in reading for a Master DFA D1RnSt OFF ON OFF Registration No Status DFB DIRPro OFF ON OFF Protections DFC D1RAbi OFF ON OFF Logic 1 0 DFD DIRAul OFF ON OFF Auxiliary variable AUX1 DFE D1RAu2 OFF ON OFF Auxiliary variable AUX2 DFF DIRAu3 OFF ON OFF Auxiliary variable AUX3 DFG 01 OFF ON OFF Speed reference No DFH D1R N OFF ON OFF Speed reaction No DF D2Rlao OFF ON OFF Armature current reference DFJ D2R la OFF ON OFF Armature current reaction DFK D2R Ud OFF ON OFF Armature voltage DFL D2R f
289. linkage the frictions and or the inertia haven t increased Check for the proper gear box lubrication Incorrect setting Check the proper setting of the parameters 083 and DB6 C319 0 Converter over temperature protection intervention selecting the STATUS function par 1 3 1 the display FAIL HYPOTHESIS CHECKS ACTIONS Excessive converter Check that in the machine linkage the frictions and or the inertia overload haven t increased Check for the proper gear box lubrication Incorrect setting Check the proper setting of the parameters DA3 and DB3 FAIL HYPOTHESIS CHECKS ACTIONS Noise on the serial link Check for the proper ground connections Check that the wire isn t near Connect properly the ground wires to noise sources Check the efficiency of the filters placed on the Modify the serial link wire path devices installed in the cabinet placing it far away from possible noise sources Insert some HF filters on the cabinet devices Serial link wire broken Check the connections and the serial link wire integrity RS485 Check for the proper settings of the jumpers P3 and J P6 par A9 3 1 jumpers J and J P6 RS 485 board failure F Serial interface circuit failure i L Serial interface circuit failure C3 1 11 Max motor s protection intervention selecting the STATUS function par 1 3 1 the display shows 2o PROTECTION NMax Current l
290. logic outputs OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 see LOGIC 1 0 and LEGENDA No speed reference N speed feedback lao armature current reference as of la armature current feedback as of Ud armature voltage Flu motor flux Ifo field current reference If field current feedback Uvo line voltage alfa thyristors firing angle electr degrees Note the above mentioned data from Aux 1 to alfa are the same before described in par C 1 3 1 Status in list b at the item REGUL of list a The group of the stored data listed in the DRIVE TRACE is said diagnostics DATABASE and it can be transmitted on the serial communication line STOP PRINT THYR STOP PRINT DRIVE LEGENDA AUTOPRINT 128 The THYRISTOR TRACE of this list a will be printed also if the Trace isn t stop mode in 5 the message PRINTER STOP will be printed to announce that the Trace printout was started by the user The record N 0 corresponds to the instant during which the user pressed ENTER This function is useful to freeze the system behaviour when the automatic lock is not provided This command can be transmitted to the system via the serial link the DRIVE TRACE of this list a will be printed also if the Trace isn t in stop mode in 5 the Message PRINTER STOP will be printed to announce that the Trace printout was started by the user The record N 0 corresponds to the instant during which the user pressed ENTER This function is use
291. loop and if this test shows some unstable areas decrease the value of TC1 and TC2 parameters repeat the procedure until a stable response will be achieved over the whole range 0 to 10096 slow response increase the TC1 and or TC2 parameter value ean overshoot response decrease the TC1 and or TC2 parameter value repeat the procedure until a good and sufficiently fast response is achieved 150 IMSPDO27I SILCOPAC D C Setting up 2 11 Parameters block Once the set up has been completed in order to prevent parameters from being casually or intentionally changed or from being lost owing to interferences it is necessary to block the EEPROM writing programmable memory in which parameters values are stored Proceed in the following manner a Supply the converter control on terminals XM2 U V W b make sure the converter is not in protection 1 through the lt mode gt key on the panel disable the STATUS function through the A V keys select the CONF PARAMETER item press lt enter gt and insert the password by using the keys A V press lt enter gt to confirm through the A V keys select the group D MISCELLANEA and press lt enter gt to confirm through the A V keys select the CDA parameter and press enter through the A V keys set the CDA OFF parameter and press enter to confirm press lt mode gt twice to leave the function group 2 Disconnect the converter
292. loseF The parameter CN5 takes the function of the parameter CN6 so CN5 DiamS Selection of the operating diameter source The parameter CN6 has been removed The parameters 01 02 03 are replaced by the parameters CHA CH1 CH2 CH3 Field reversing for Multi motor Configuration has been removed The firmware 2 6 is available on request Firmware 2 7 INDEX li lt E u LI Rr 1 2 TECHNICAL FEATURES YE u 5 LE STATO CNC WO I m 5 1 25 amaka aa aki manan aqha 6 19 DA 6 1 3 6 2 Mounting 9 2 4 dimensions 5 eg Rad aaah RD E 9 22 WelghiSalid SA SEDEM 18 TUTTI 19 21 4l denii ion Code aa a non EIS E ha 21 ASintemaltonhec b uuu _ ___ _ ________________ _ ______ 23 JA Oololam D
293. lu OFF ON OFF Motor current flux DFM D2R Ifo OFF ON OFF Motor current flux reference DFN D2R If OFF ON OFF Motor current flux reaction DFO D2RUvo OFF ON OFF Line voltage DFP D2R_alfa OFF ON OFF Thyristor firing delay The following group of process data 15 considered in writing for a Master DIWEn1 OFF ON OFF Analog input Ean1 from P rofibus DFb DIWEn2 OFF ON OFF Analog input Ean2 from Profibus DFc D1WAul OFF ON OFF Variable Aux1 from P rofibus The second word of the PDZ part of message chosen in writing for the master speed reference or current reference depends on the setup of the configuration parameter CB1 for the speed reference automatically set upon enabling of the P rofibus protocol in serial item and for the current reference which if set in serial item automatically disables the CB1 parameter only if the P rofibus is enabled 2 4 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D APPENDIX E Parallel of Bridges F3 3 Description of field parameters See section B The user can both read and edit a parameter All the parameter accessibles from the profibus except the parameters used by the communication These are in the Profibus protocol the parameters DEO DE2 DFO which addresses on the table 582 583 584 594 595 They can be changed only by the keypad as explained on the paragraph F 3 2 In case of modify via Profibus the error no 7 will be reported Diagnostic F4 1 Serial failure
294. m f digital regulation is enabled through the CCA parameter see the description of the e m f regulator aux function 3 motor excitation current reference step applied fixed or square wave mode pressing ENTER to the current analog regulator of the exciter which can be internal or external to the converter The motor armature must be disconnected Through the DB2 parameter fs can be selected The function will be active only if the e m f digital regulation is enabled through the CCA parameter see the description of the e m f regulator aux function 4 motor armature current reference step applied fixed or square wave mode pressing ENTER to the armature current regulator at locked rotor The motor field must be disconnected Through the DB3 parameter fs can be selected 5 continuous speed reference so the motor speed follows instant by instant the value setin b through buttons U D fs is selected through the DB5 parameter 6 direct step firing pressing ENTER ofthe FWD bridge thyristors at the fixed firing angle the control is open loops type so without current and speed regulation Caution must then be taken to avoid the protections intervention setting angles near to 90 degrees starting from values greater than 90 and decreasing slowly e g 115 113 111 etc until the desired response will be obtained 7 direct step firing pressing ENTER ofthe REV bridge thyristors at the fixed firing angle proceed as in 6 8
295. m zinc plated steel for example The filter the inputs reactors and the drive must be pressed directly to the mounting plate by at least four fixing bolts and the seating Surfaces of the housings must be free from non conducting coating The PE bar must be connected with the mounting plate by many bolts which are distributed along whole length with equal distances All devices are connected with the PE bar by the mounting plate and also by the PE conductors and the PE bar is earthed via the PE conductor of the 3 phase power cable External earth connections The drive shall be earthed only by the earth conductor of the line cable an additional local earthing especially at the motor raises the level of the RF noise on the line cable Earth connection between motor and driven machine The earth of a grounded driven machine must be connected to the earth of the driving motor in order to avoid floating potential Attention The example shows the principle structure of a DC drive and its connections It is not binding recommendation and it cannot respect all conditions of a plant Therefore each drive must be considered separately and with respect to the special application Additionally the general installation and safety rules must be taken in account 265 APPENDIX E EMC Standards and applicable Standards SILCOPAC D SECOND CONNECTION EXAMPLE INACCORDANCE WITH PE L1 L2 L3 Earth earthing for sa
296. ment residential and commercial areas Environment that includes domestic premises It also includes establishments directly connected without intermediate transformers to a low voltage power supply network which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes Second environment industrial area Environment that includes all establishments other than those directly connected to a low voltage power supply network which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes NOTE ForPDS s the second environment the user shall ensure that excessive disturbances are not induced into low voltage network even if propagation is through a medium voltage network Private network The private network is characterised by being supplied by a dedicated medium voltage network and not supplying residential areas Typically the private main supplies commercial premises offices in a residential building shopping centres etc The operator can decide whether he realises the network according to the first or second environment as defined by the standard A private low voltage network can be regarded as a plant in compliance with the EMC law The EMC is assessed according to the physical limits of the plant emission and immunity to radiated RF fields are assessed according to the space limits and conducted phenomena are assessed according to the input to the supplying network 12 EN 61 800 3 Categories Category C1 Drive systems for rated voltages less
297. meters consistency error The using of some enhanced functions implies a proper configuration of the converter hardware applications of some options and or specific machine equipment that will be discussed in the setting up procedure description of the function itself El ANGULAR POSITION REGULATOR The function is used to perform the angular positioning of the motor shaft in respect to a position reference set by a parameter two distinct references as function of the motor rotation direction E1 1 Required hardware The motor must be equipped with an Encoder The zero pulse be generated by the encoder itself three channels Encoder or it can be independently generated E12 Parameters setting Encod Speed feedback from Encoder Ramp command bypass enable CGA ON Function enable CGB Set to ON if the converter suppression status 15 required after the positioning Set to OFF if the continuous converter regulation is required even after the positioning CG2 Set to the absolute value of the approaching speed percent value of the speed full scale DB5 parameter CG3 Set to forward angular position reference value indicated as Encoder pulses number CG4 Set to reverse angular position reference value indicated as Encoder pulses number CGl It is a multiplying coefficient of parameters CG3 and CG4 If the set value is not zero then the position reference is calibrated according to the foll
298. mit saturating the speed regulator by a term to be summed to the reference Correction limit Tension feedback 5 2 Open loop regulation In this case no comparison is performed between the reference value and its feedback and then it is needed to calculate all terms establishing the total torque supplied to the system e g the mechanical losses and the inertia effects The regulator generates a term used as current limit the speed regulator is saturated by a term summed to the reference Current limit Compensation The Tension reference block defines starting from To signal the current needed to generate the desired tension on the material E5 3 Tension regulators setting The two regulators can be both separately or contemporary used in this last case the closed loop regulator corrects the inaccuracies of the tension generated by the open loop regulator and can be enabled or disabled in bumpless mode par The following settings can be identified 1 Tension loop with load cell speed reference correction 2 Tension loop with load cell control of the current limit 3 Axial winder control of the current limit 4 Tangential winder control of the current limit 5 Axial winder tension loop with load cell control of the current limit 6 Tangential winder tension loop with load cell control of the current limit IMSPD027 203 E Optional functions SILCOPAC D 5 3 1 Setting 1
299. mmunity requirements in the first enviroment The warning and installation information of this manual must be observed Note a The drive must not be equipped with the EMC filter when installed to IT unearthed systems The mains becomes connected to earth potential through the EMC filter capacitors In IT systems this may cause danger or damage the unit b Referto Figure E1 3 4 for filter connection to the drive c RFIfilter codes are in Table E1 1 and E12 WARNING The drive may cause radio interference if used in a residential or domestic environment The user is required to take measures to prevent interference in addition to the requirements for CE compliance listed above if necessary Note If the above listed provisions cannot be met e g the drive cannot be equipped with EMC filter when installed to an IT unearthed network the requirements of the EMC Directive can be met as follows for restricted distribution 1 Itis ensured that no excessive emission is propagated to neighbouring low voltage networks In some cases the natural suppression in transformers and cables is sufficient If in doubt a supply transformer with static screening between the primary and secondary windings can be used Medium voltage Network e Supply transformer s ee an Static screen Point of measurement Low voltage Equipment victim 2 An EMC plan for preventing disturbances is drawn up for the installation Equ
300. modifying the DJ 8 parameter value you must costumize the parameters DB3 and DB6 again using the new correct values When possible it is better to setlaM changing the load resistors and to use DJ 8 parameter for small adjustement only If you change the calibration of either changing the load resistors or the value of DJ 8 parameter it is necessary to set again DB3 and 086 parameters with the new values The following three examples are useful to clarify the problem We consider three possible applications 1 Motor and converter without overload 2 motor with overload and converter without overload 3 motored and converter with overload 136 IMSPD027 SILCOPAC D C Setting up Example 1 motor overload converter overload The rated current la of the motor is lar 300 According the table on chapter we select the converter SP DM350 rated current of the converter 350 In order to do not overload the motor it is necessary to limitlaM at 300 A First solution Load resistors change The table C2 3 shows the CT turns ratio Ns 2000 by the formula 1 it is possible the calculate the load resistors value la 300 this ohmic value can be obtained by connecting in parallel one resistor 56 57 22 with a second resistor Ry58 59 33 Second solution Parameter DJ 8 change Instead off changing the load resistors it is possible to adjust the parameter DJ 8 according the
301. n suffix 51 With loose current transducer and collector bars AC DC not installed Fan The fan is delivered loose not installed on the SP DM The standard mounting plate ELC 209037 of the fan is designed for rear side standard or front side air outlet A fan mounting plate ELC209037 with air outlet on the right side is available as option Frame V SPDM2K2 2K5 3K 1 3K 6 4K 0 FAN The fan is delivered loose installed on the SP DM Up to 09 16 2005 two versions was available Version 1 standard 2 Version 2 optional indicated with suffix 50 on the identification code After this date the version two is available only The identification code for every SPDM will have the suffix 50 NOTE the remarks above mentioned are valid also for the RTT frame V VERSION 1 VERSION 2 IMSPDO027I 17 A Technical features SILCOPAC D A2 2 Weights and dimensions mm m Kg Two quadrants uni directionals SPDM0x 1 20 J 318 j SPDMO80Ux 1 230 320 2 27 SPDMMOUX 5 1 20 3 20 M SPDM160 2000x 20 490 B sPom260ux J 230 40 B SPDMBSQUX 20 40 22 SPDMSOQeQUx m 230 50 1 230 2 SPDMIMOIMIUX 288
302. n a fault EEPROM is replaced with another blank one If needed the user at this point can set the proper values at the end enter the chosen serial number and press RESET button Converter type selection DA3 Thyr 30 517B For proper operation of the converter i thermal protection itis mandatory that the DA3 parameter is configured according the real SPDM size indipendently of the current that the converter will supply in operation Itis also necessary to select the armature current full scale par 083 Rated converter current 1100 A This selection is correct for new size 1M1 too Rated converter current 4000 pe Gp BRE m 380V 0 9999 Line full scale selection rms value of the converter supply voltage vid 0 999 9 A Motor Motor field curentfullscale value 000000000000 current full scale value DB3 Converter current full scale value The value of this parameter must correspond to the 528W 5 0 9999 A value as shown in ee 3 3 section of this manual CT load resistors 400V 0 9999 V Armature Armature voltage full scale ae 000000000000 full scale value en 2000 us Motor angular speed full scale value 54 100 0 100 Motor nominal current as of lay DB7 Motor basic speed as of the max speed It is the speed beyond which the e m f regulator 22 100 EE saram the motor field current Er 500 V m 9999 Pulserev ratio ofthe used encoder
303. n applications where two motors are used cranes the first motor speed feedback comes from a tachometer or from an encoder the second motor speed feedback is calculated from the armature voltage The switch from one speed feedback source to the other one must be carried out only when motors are still The armature voltage feedback motor must always work in the constant torque range full flux In addition the armature voltage feedback motor flux can be set through CC4 parameter MAIN MOTOR SECOND MOTOR with ENCODER or with ARMATURE VOLTAGE TACHOMETER FEEDBACK PARAMETERS CFF FUd Function enable DN3 35 Must be programmed with the value Par 4 FLXmn Motor flow when it reacts in armature voltage TUNING PAR Groups A B C D E F parameters in the alternative sets must be correctly programmed because the function activates parameter switching too DESCRIPTION When COM3 input is OFF the speed feedback is acquired from the source selected by parameter A E groups of TUNING PAR are active the motor can word also in the weakened field range and base speed percentage of max speed is acquired from par DB7 When COM3 input is ON the speed feedback is calculated from the armature voltage as is if par CB3 F Ud B D F groups of TUNING PAR are active the motor must work in the constant torque range full flux and the par 087 is automatically set to 10096 COM3 Speed feedback TUNING PARAMET
304. n by a logic output OUT1 OUT6 parameters 001 006 set as proof When start command is given transition the the regulation status STATUS REGUL the brake is locked till the system reaches the current limit set by parameter CF1 The current limits set by parameters TA3 and TA4 do not care The status system in current limits can be carried out to a digital output see the parameters 001 006 or displaied on the keypad see NOTA 3 paragraph C1 3 The brake opening is commanded when the current reaches the set limits and at the same time a timer is set time setting by the parameter CF2 in software cycles at the time end the current limits go back to the values set by the parameters and The delay required to go back to the previous limits balances the delay for opening the brake and then avoids that the motor generates the maximum torque with the brake still closed brake opening transient BRAKE CLOSING The brake will be closed when the motor reaches the zero speed after the stop Parameters CFB ON Torque Proof aux function enable SS See description 2 71 See description CA2 Limitcurrent source selection Program the value Fixed Dx Digita output OUTx for brake opening closing operations Set to proof Commands Function COM3 terminal XM1 19 not active function enabled Exemple The picture shows the typical trend of the motor current and speed dur
305. n description Before enabling this function check that DA2 Unid and 2 P s ON OFF Field current reference zeroing when the converter is in the Protection Status ra 3 FldSyn OF ON OFF Enable of the motor field reversing synchronisation function CCL FEcon 100 0 100 Filed saving in other words decrease of the motor excitation current in respect to the 324W value I CC1 100 The decrease occurs when the status is not Regulation and after delay which can be set through parameter starting from zero speed signalling see param 5 To disable CC1 100 Delay time of the enable the end of the field reversing expressed in software cycles see parameter CD3 The time can be calculated using following formula T 2 a 1000 1 9999 Delay time of the field save function expressed parameter CD3 The time can be calculated using the following formula Sao mtr MP 0400 on tre lgie ouput See param DOLDO6 Group D MISCELLANEA Non volatile EEPROM write enable parameters ee W_Eepr ON OFF If CDA OFF the write occurs to volatile RAM memory this storage will be valid until a Reset IS nae ri or the supply is removed ON OFF Quick motorrestartenable function EE EEEEEEEEEEE motor restart enable function CDC Diesel ON OFF Enable this parameter when the converter is powered by a motor generator unit This 346
306. nabled From 1 input for both upper and lower limits The 1 sign is irrelevant the absolute value is used If terminal XM 1 19 is disabled CA2 laoLm Fixed 259B Upper limit fixed by TA3 parameter _ Lower limit fixed by TA4 parameter From Ean1 input for both FWD and REV limits If terminal XM1 19 is enabled The rh is irrelevant the absolute value is used AuxRic From aux function see description of the relevant function 1 From 1 input for the upper limit From Ean2 input for the lower limit EanlTL From 1 input for the upper limit From TA4 parameter for the lower limit Ean2BL From TA3 parameter for the upper limit From Ean2 input for the lower limit Selection of an additional term origin term to be added to the armature current reference Disabled selection From 1 analog input with sign From Ean2 analog input with sign If terminal XM 1 19 is disabled If terminal XM 1 19 is enabled From TA5 param 1st set or from TB5 param 2nd set the switching between 1st and 2nd set occurs enabling terminal XM1 19 if param DN3 otherwise the 1st set is always enabled From aux function see description of the relevant function laoAd Off 260B Of Eanl Ean2 Ean2C3 laoOfs AuxAdd 4 Cutoff frequency of the filter on the current reference from the speed regulator 2618 fo 0 255 rad s To disable the filter CA4 0 5 R
307. nc_P 500 W Dog Fan UvoMn 80 0 UdMax 120 0 T 20 0 Off 5 S PLC Off DIHP ro Off D1Haul Off D1HAu3 Off Off la Off D1Hflu Off D1H If Off Off TrcNr 25 Aux1S AuxDgn TimeP 1 0 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D Appendix C Configuration Parameters DRIVE PARAMETERS H ANALOG INP OFS DFA Din Off DFB 0156 Off DFC DILPro Off DFD DIHPro Off DH1 TacOf 0 0 DH2 0 0 DH3 0 0 DH4 206 0 0 DH5 Udofs 0 0 DH6 1 0 0 e J ANALOG INP GN DJI TachG 100 0 D2 IG 100 0 100 0 DJ4 Ean2G 100 0 DJ5 46 100 0 D6 Ri G 100 0 DJ7 Uvo_G 100 0 D8 laG 100 0 K ANALOG INP FLT DK1 0 DK2 20 EanlF 0 4 Ean2F 0 DK5 Ud FI 0 DK6 0 L ANALOG INP ABS DLA TacAb Off DLB IfAbs 0ff DLC ElAbs 0ff DLD E2Abs 0ff DLE RifAbs Off M ANALOG OUTPUTS PwlAb 0ff DMB Pw2Ab 0ff DMC Pw3Ab 0ff DM1 151 Ud DM2 Pw2S1 Ifo 351 N DM4 Pwl0f 0 0 DM5 20 0 0 DM6 Pw30f 00 DM7 1000 DM8 Pw2 G 100 0 DM9 Pw3 6G t 100 0 N DIGITAL INPUTS 0ff DNB Com2L 0ff DNC Com3L Off DND Com4L Off DNE Com5L Off DNF Off DNG 7 Off DN1 ComlS Off DN2 25 Off DN3 35 Off DN4 Com4S Off DN5 55 Off DN6 5 Off 047 Com7S Off O DIGITAL OUTPUT DOA Off DOB 0 01 Off DOC Out3L Off OuuL Off DOE OutSL Off DOF OQut6L
308. nds through an analog output P WM the current reference either to the Master Drive or to the Slave Drive The signals are acquired from one analog input Ean previously configured Components The following components are required for constructing a 12 pulse system a transformer with two identical secondary windings offset by 30 degrees same voltage and current For suppressing capacitive cross talk at switching operations on the primary side the transformer should have an earthed shielding winding between the primary and secondary windings However to avoid over voltages is advisable to provide the secondary sides with a voltage clamp In addition the shielding winding also suppresses conducted interference EMC to the mains two identical 6 pulse power converters SPDM standard selected for half the motor s rated current same voltage and current a current balancing reactor interphase reactor The 12 pulse interphase reactor limits the cross current between the two power sections of the 6 pulse power converters a field supply unit for supplying the field of the DC machine Connections Both drives must be installed according to the modalities described in chapter 7A and each must be connected to its secondary of the power transformer it is necessary to follow the correct phase sequence so that the two drives are synchronized according to the same cyclic direction The TA charge resistors and the recalibration of the armature
309. nductors are adequately sized as required by safety regulations n multiple drive installations do not connect drive terminals in series The panel must have a properly sized ground bus to which all system grounds are connected The bus bar shall be connected to plant ground e Ground connections must be as short as possible The drive ground connection should not be shared with other devices High frequency RFI requires large areas of ground bus due to skin effect SPDM SPDM PE PE PE PE PE a Preferred connection b Accettable connection Floating Networks IT ungrounded systems For floating networks also known as IT ungrounded or impedance resistance greater than 300 grounded networks if the drive is equipped with EMC filter Disconnect the filter before connecting the drive to an ungrounded system Where EMC requirements exist check for excessive emission propagated to neighboring low voltage networks In some cases the natural Suppression in transformers and cables is sufficient If in doubt use a supply transformer with static screening between the primary and secondary windings The filter shall be grounded before applying power CAUTION The filter can only used with balanced supply mains Do not attempt to install or remove RFI filter connections while power is applied to the drive s input terminals If a drive with EMC filter is installed on an IT system the system w
310. nnector from P board Disconnect CN1 CN2 CN3 and CN4 connectors from P board Remove P board acting on the four screwing turrets Disconnectthe contacts from the power bars Remove the power bars fastened to the thyristors Unstring the four small wires two yellow and two red connected to the gates and to the cathodes Remove the screws fastening the thyristor to the heat sink this operation must be executed unscrewing the screws alternatively Clean with a swab of cotton and next apply on the new component surface a thin layer of silicon grease Fasten the thyristor this operation must be executed tightening the screws alternatively THYRISTOR TO HEATSINK FASTENING TORQUE SIZE TORQUE 30 to 260A 5 Nm 350 to 450A 2 5 Nm 500 to 1100A 5 Nm Re connect the power bars BARS TO THYRISTOR FASTENING TORQUE SIZE TORQUE 30 to 200A 3Nm 260 to 450 5 Nm 500 to 1100 9 Nm Connect the four small wires two yellow and two red to the gates and to the cathodes taking attention to the proper sequence par 3 2 Reinstall P board and connect the proper connectors Reinstall C board and connect the proper connectors Reinstall the closure front panel IMSPD027 170 SILCOPAC D C Maintenance COVer RS485 and C board mounting Pressure fixing turret if RS485 is not disabled there is a nut RS485 lt C board mounting nuts nuts XM1 terminal board mounting t
311. node of the tension regulator with load cell it is enabled only if Com3 ON Derivative gain of the tension regulator Set the parameters related to the enable and setting of the Taper function par 8 7 Set the parameters related to the enable of the zero speed tension function par 8 8 IMSPDO027I 205 E Optional functions SILCOPAC D 5 3 2 Setting 2 Tension loop with load cell control of the current limit lt LL LL Load cell Dandy roll itis a closed loop tension regulator the tension feedback signal is provided by a transducer e g load or dandy roll the regulator output is used to control the current limit while the speed regulator is saturated by a term summed to the reference Load cell e CURRENT FEEDBACK DIAMETER CALC LOAD CELL FEEDBACK Blocks description SPEED REG Speed regulator it is saturated by a term summed to the speed reference NoRic CURRENT REG Armature current regulator CURRENT FEEDBACK Armature current feedback la TAPER Used when in the winder unwinder applications the tension reference To has to be re calibrated as function of the coil diameter the re calibration can be linear or hyperbolic type When the function is disabled the tension reference is directly passed to the comparison node DIAMETER CALC The diameter is acquired as analog signal provided by a proper external transducer LOAD CELL FEEDBACK Transducer of the t
312. nsion feedback origin selection parameter C 2 Starting diameter origin selection parameter CN2 Material densty origin selection parameter CM 2 Material width origin selection parameter CM3 Analog input If terminals XM1 28 31 Field current feedback jumper J P25 par 7 1 sect A par 2 6 1 sect C e Funzione di inversione del campo vedere funzione e Selezione della provenienza del segnale densit del materiale parameter CM2 Material width value origin selection parameter 3 Analog input Tach terminals XM1 26 27 Speed feedback origin selection parameter CB3 Tension feedback origin selection parameter 2 Material width origin selection parameter C M3 1 027 87 A Catalogo delle caratteristiche tecniche SILCOPAC D A10 5 2 SUMMARY OF LOGIC INPUT USE Logic input Com1 terminal XM1 17 Motopotentiometer function Increase of the speed reference parameter CB1 Motopotentiometer function Increase of the speed reference with polarity imposed by logic input COM3 parameter CB1 Motopotentiometer function Increase of the speed reference with commutation of the analog input Rif imposed by logic input COM4 parameter CB1 Speed reference polarity if that comes from analog input Rif with digital input COM2 parameter CA1 Helper function Increase the parameter DJ 3 value to do the load sharing Pope function Increase the memorized current reference value to increase
313. nts operating mode the bridge has 12 anti parallel connected thyristors without recirculation current the motor torque has 2 rotation direction A single control circuit assembly is provided for all the sizes from 30 to 4000 A and 1 15 isolated from the power circuits The software 15 available in the following releases for standard and complex applications enhanced standard Version With Profibus DP protocol code C1C27N00F27 Release 2 7F For the availability of the Profibus field bus the user must install the SPPB2 Kit dedicated for special applications S Accurate Speed Ratio Spindle Control L Ward Leonard Version 2 7 requires that on the control board the programmed components PALS are installed as indicated by the following table It is not interchangeable with the previous version 2 6 the replacement needs the parameters programming PL _ L4C20N06L00 n EPROM 25 Control Board DL1 DL2 DL3 PR2 TERMINAL BOARD 1 Hardware options for motors excitation both with stationary and weakened field are avallable IMSPD027I 5 A Technical features SILCOPAC D A1 2 Documentation The full documentation of the Silcopac D product consists of the following documents along with this manual NASPD003A00 Parallel of bridges NAPRFB001 Profibus IMSPD0025A Ward Leonard and digital Exciters IMSPD007A
314. nts to modify the value of a parameter in ENTER PASSWORD 2 the password value is 12 en press ENTER to access to the 2nd level 2nd level through buttons U D select an item of the list a SELECT GROUP U D press ENTER to access to the 3rd level 3rd level using buttons U D select a parameter of the list b press ENTER to confirm the selected parameter 3 through buttons U D enter the desired value in 2 SELECT VALUE param 2 U D press ENTER to confirm the value and to return to 3rd level the new M value will be stored in the EEPROM 4 if the password entered 1 is not correct pressing ENTER in 3 the display shows INVALID PASSWORD PRESS ENTER press ENTER to return to 3rd level if the system is regulating and the parameter is protected pressing SISTEM RUNNING ENTER in 3 the display shows PRESS ENTER press ENTER to return to 3rd level c if the system cannot accept the value entered in 2 pressing ENTER in 4 the display shows CONSISTENCY ERROR PRESS ENTER press ENTER to return to 3rd level List list b CURRENT REG parameters of the armature current regulator B SPEED REG parameters of the speed regulator C parameters of the motor E M force regulator D MISCELLANEOUS various parameters E AUX FUNCT 1 Ist aux functions group F AUX FUNCT 2 2nd aux functions 118 IMSPDO27I SILCOPAC D C User Interface 1 3 3 T
315. o 100 reference 1 active command increases the reference absolute value Com2 active command decreases the reference absolute value Com3 command is acquired only at zero speed See relay K1 and if active assigns the sign to the reference if itis not active it assigns the sign to the reference O 0 0 sign fo 1 0 0 O 1 Of from 0 toward 200 1 s o 1 i feni wed Co It is possible to set the ramp time in seconds of the motopotentiometer by the parameter CBE parameter set to ON enables the storage of the last reference set on CB9 parameter In this way the last set reference is held after a reset sequence and with the converter not powered also To use this function J P4 jumper must be in 1 2 position If the quick restart function is enabled in the event of power loss the motopotentiometer reference is automatically stored to CB9 parameter CBF parameter setto ON performs the zeroing of the last set reference when speed reaches zero IMSPD027I 185 D Auxiliary functions SILCOPAC D D8 Internal references og SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Com3 XM1 19 DN3 C_Par From speed reference switch par CB1 No speed ref IntRf1 XM1 15 IntRf2 Thyristor XM1 16 r Start XM1 13 It is possible to control the internal speed r
316. o voltage Vt 60 UE 90V 1000 jumper to be inserted P8 JP13 open JP14 open Seela monitor description par C2 4 1 15 16 17 insert related to the armature external voltage transducer Va as described Manual IMSPD011A par C2 7 3 terminal XM1 32 JP18 open See N monitor description par C2 4 2 JP19 open J P20 open JP21 open JP 22 open J P23 closed JP25 jumper pins 2 3 C2 4 1 la monitor The armature current la can be indicated by a meter A connected to terminals XM 1 35 36 the meter is a d c milliammeter 5 f s or a d c voltmeter 10 V f s If a milllammeter is used jumper If a voltmeter is used jumper P14 must be closed E g R sxs R voltmeter is used full scale 10 14 mustbe closed on 2 3 poston a With 4 quadrant SP DM the meter must be a centre zero type Set J P 22 on 2 3 Optionally if the armature current direction doesn t care it is possible to read the absolute M only in this case the meter may be a lateral zero type set P22 on 1 2 Hx56 x57 Hx58 x59 By trimmer P R2 adjust the full scale meter reading corresponding to the maximum current DJ 8 The trimmer PR2 is located on the right corner of the control board C Scheda C XM1 IMSPDO027I 139 C Setting up SILCOPAC D 2 42 N monitor The motor speed can be read by a meter N connected to terminals XM1 40 41 programmable analog ou
317. odified in absolute value through the NOTE CD2 parameter in the list b fs full scale value equivalent to 100 beside to the items in list a can appear A alarm 15 active if the converter is in current limit conditions the threshold to signal current limit conditions can be programmed through par CD9 IMSPD027 115 C User Interface SILCOPAC D NOTE The hexadecimal code related to the list b is avallable on the serial communication interface to be transmitted to eventual supervisor control system in this case the serial interface must be enabled Each intervention can be defined by the Drive Parameters as follows NOTE protection if the intervention is reported and the converter is stopped parameter of group alarm if the intervention is reported without the stop of the converter DDy parameter of group DD X y identify the active protection or alarm e g line loss DCX __ dh 3t ON JOFF th WARNING status 3rd is allowable for intervention 0 1 2 3 10 only status 2nd and status 4th are not allowable for interventions 4 5 11 12 14 NOTE 7 The displayed item must be previously selected through the DG4 parameter 0 The system forces the converter to the max delay followed by a pulses suppression condition This hardware protection cannot be disabled 1 An external protection is active opening the terminal XM1 20
318. oment of the unlock of the current regulator In the moment of the unlock the function equalizes the operating reference of speed NO to the feedback of speed N and sets to zero the integrator internal to the speed regulator Subsequently the operating reference of speed NO is changed linearly through the ramp function from the value N up to a speed reference value existing upstream the ramp In this way the request of current la0Nrg made by the speed regulator does not undergo a sudden increase but gets a gradual evolution determined by the slope of the ramp Ramp enabling N Q reference Y Speed laoNrg O regul s VY lao N Q BCA gt SPDM U lio 1 d Heversible 210 SPDME If Figure D10 2 Adjustment diagram for the configuration with single motor Upon startup the motor starts immediately to turn in the direction required if the field has the correct direction however if the field has nota correct direction the speed regulator control the inversion and maintains the system in a status of wait until the procedure of inversion 15 achieved The waiting time of the completion of the inversion may represent a problem especially in the repeated startup and stop maneuvers in the two directions of run maneuvers of jog for example This waiting time is shortened if after the stop of the motor the field is lowered to a minimum value through he function field s
319. on board P and the X11 connector of the exciter allows the delivery of the current reference and the acquisition of the current feedback see If F protection at par 1 2 1 from board C through board P to the exciter IMSPDO027I 141 C Setting up C2 6 Setting parameters SILCOPAC D After the customization of C P and 5 board is necessary to set same parameters regarding the specifications of the motor the converter and the plant Apply power to the control circuits only terminal block XM2 on board P the micro controller begins the Power up sequence described at par C1 3 1 STATUS atthe end the user can set the proper parameters using the pushbuttons U D select CONF PARAMETERS if the parameter code e g CA1 begins with C select the parameter the display of SPDI 1 user Interface the function assign the value as described at par 1 3 2 TUN PARAMETERS if the parameter code e g TB2 begins with T select the arate and assign the value as described at par C1 3 3 AAA eeAAA A AA The applicable parameters are the following see basic reference diagram par 7 6 and simplified block diagram par BLOCK 21 supply line 22 SILCOPAC D Silcopac D serial number 24 motor
320. on coefficient of the position references n 0 1 100 Approaching speed in the positioning phase PRefF m 0 9999 Forward angular position reference M P RefB a 0 9999 Reverse angular position reference Group TENSION REG Note this group includes the parameters for the selection of the required tension regulator and for the setting of the references and of _ the tension feedback Or ON OFF Enable of the tension regulator with load cell ON OFF Enable of the open loop tension regulator Winder o Taper ON OFF X Taper function enable Selection of the tension reference source Tension reference from software motopotentiometer 451B Tension reference from Rif analog input terminals 1 33 34 Tension reference from Ean1 analog input terminals XM1 29 31 Tension reference from CJ 4 parameter C2 T Sel Serial Selection of the tension feedback source J we ne Tension feedback from serial link 452B Tension feedback from Ean2 analog input terminals XM1 30 31 Tension feedback from Tach analog input terminals XM1 26 27 Enable selection of the zero speed tension reference acquisition the zero speed tension TONOS serial reference is set by CJ 5 parameter 453B ToNOOf Disabled acquisition ToN0On The acquisition of the zero speed tension reference occurs at zero speed COMO The acquisition of the zero speed tension reference occurs atthe rising edge of COM
321. on description CF3 Compensation parameter for the lowering friction torque See Load Weighting aux function Tm 50 ME jm 98 IMSPD027 SILCOPAC D B List of parameters B1 2 Tuning parameters Code Default Values Description Group CURRENT REG The parameters group A 1st set is an alternate set of the parameters group B 2nd set the switching from 1st to 2nd set occurs enabling the terminal 1 19 if parameter DN3 Par otherwise the 1st set will always enabled en 0 9999 First proportional gain of the current regulator ba 0 255 First derivative gain of the current regulator laTL1 100 100 First upper current limit as of laBL1 100 100 First lower current limit as of 5 1004 Additional term to be added to the armature current reference it is selected by the o10w parameter It is also used by several aux functions nie po 0 10 Dead zone the bridges changing value assigned to TA6 is delay calculated according 012B the fomula Dead zone time TA6 T 6 with T power supply period We suggest to set TA6 0 Group B ALT CURRENT Note parameters group 2nd set is an alternate set of the parameters group 1st set the switching from 1st to 2nd set occurs enabling the terminal XM1 19 if parameter DN3 Par otherwise t
322. onnectors 14 pins connected to X8A connectors and fitted the PPRCRC and PPRCRD I H boards the flat cable shield must be connected to the relevant bar of the shields the SP DM module flat cable must follow dedicated route which should as short as possible eH H max 2 meters in metal channelling connected to earth cable 220881 13 14 13 14 2m lt gt lOC PROTECTION The RTT module does not have the C board on board The connection between the X6 and X7 terminals of the P board must be closed The armature current transducer TA load resistors of the RTT module acquire nevertheless a signal proportional to it so that it can be monitored by the IOC instantaneous over current protection circuit The control on board of the SPDM module receives this signal through the flat cable Code 2208881 VENTILATION FAILURE PROTECTION The status of a lack in ventilation is monitored for each of the two modules RTT and SPDM by the respective thermal sensors The thermal pins offer a normally closed contact It is therefore necessary to make a series circuit between the contacts of the thermal pins so that the control can sense either of them being triggered All the connections necessary to create the series circuit are automatically created by flat cable between the two connectors X8A of the PPRCRC and PPRCRD boards the CV1 jumper on the PPRCRD board must be closed
323. ontrol circuit to the OV of the exciter e The shield must be connected to OV of the exciter only 144 5 027 SILCOPAC D 5 Power up the SPDM and the exciter and disable the protections DCF and DCN DRIVE PARAMETERS group C PROTECTIONS 6 Read ammeter the field current amps C Setting up If 7 parameter DM8 according the formula DM8 where IfA field current red by ammeter rated field current of the motor DM8p value of the parameter DM8 DM8 value must be negative ForSPAM and SPATE exciters DM8 value must be negative 8 Through the Hardware Status function par C1 3 6 read the If value ratio value at the ANALOG INPUT adjust the parameter DJ 2 until you read the correct value If at 100 9 Power off the and the SPAE1 and restore the field circuit removing the ammeter and enabling the protections Le figura seguenti mostrano i collegamenti con SPAM SPDME SPATE SPDM PR2 C Board XM1 Terminal board Figure C3 7 1 SPDM SPDME Connections SPDM PR2 C Board XM1 Terminal hoard Figure C3 7 2 SPDM SPATE Connections SPDM C Board XM1 Terminal board Figure C3 7 3 NOTA set the parameter ooi i a 2341 1 Terminal SPDM SPAM Connections SPAM Exciter XM1 Terminal board E 5 S i0 S
324. oop instability Check the current loop response par C2 10 4 Execute the automatic adjustment Execute the automatic adjustment CURRENT SELFTUN function par C2 10 1 Speed loop instability Check the speed loop response 2 10 4 Execute the automatic adjustment of the speed loop through the SPEED SELFTUNING function par C2 10 2 Motor is de fluxed E M F Execute the automatic adjustment of loop instability the E M F SELFTUNING function par C2 10 3 The data recorded on the DRIVE TRACE para 1 3 9 show that Execute the SPAE 1 exciter field current value isn t congruent with the value requested by the customizing par C2 8 motor characteristics The field current value read through the Hardware Status function par C1 3 6 the item Analog Inputs isn t coherent with the value requested by the motor characteristics Dragged motor The data recorded on the DRIVE TRACE par C1 3 9 show that the speed feedback value is different from the reference and greater than the threshold set by the parameter DC4 Motor is de fluxed exciter The data recorded on the DRIVE TRACE par 1 3 9 show thatthe Replace the exciter failure field current value isn t congruent with Its reference The field current value read through the Hardware Status par Motor is de fluxed unadjusted exciter C1 3 6 function item Analog Input isn t coherent with the set reference from C board jumper INT SPD
325. ope function enable Coml terminal XM1 17 current limit recalibration increase Com2 terminal XM1 18 current limit recalibration decrease Function description Com3 input not active the function is disabled the converter is speed regulated and the active current limits are those set by TA3 and TA4 parameters Com3 input active the function is enabled the speed regulator is forced to saturate enabling the summing term to the speed reference defined by CE1 parameter invitation speed Set TC4 and TC5 parameters according to the following formula 4 TC4p CE1 where TC4p TC4 previous value TC5 TC5p where TC5p TC5 previous value to allow the speed regulation saturation at the max reference value too The current reference value that is active at the Com3 rising edge will be stored and substituted to the upper current limit Commands Com1 and 2 act on the stored current reference Coml increase Com2 decrease increasing or decreasing thus the applied tension the slope can be programmed by the CB4 parameter At the Com3 falling edge the speed reference summing term will be immediately zeroed and the current upper limit will be acquired again by TA3 the Speed Regulator is immediately desaturated zeroing the integral term and the speed error If the slope is enabled TE1 and TE2 parameters the bumpless disconnection of the Pope function is thus obtained it allows the passage from current regulation to s
326. opriate Use unpainted installation plates bonded to common earth point ensuring all separate metal items are firmly bonded to achieve a single path to earth Use conductive gaskets doors and covers Covers should be secured at not more than 100 mm intervals where radiation could escape Separate radiative i e dirty side from the clean side by metal covers and design Holes in enclosure should be minimised Use materials with good attenuation e g plastic with conductive coating if a metal enclosure cannot be used Cabling amp Wiring Use special HF cable entries for high frequency earthing of power cable shields Use conductive gaskets for HF earthing of control cable shield Use shielded power and control cables Route power and control cables separately Use twisted pairs to avoid common mode disturbances Use ferrite rings for common mode disturbances if necessary Select and route internal wires correctly Installation Auxiliaries used with CDM s should be CE marked products to both EMC amp Low Voltage Directives not only to LV directive unless they are not concerned e g being with a component without a direct function Selection and installation of accessories in accordance with manufacturers instructions 360 earthing at motor end Correct internal wiring methods Special attention must be given to earthing E14 RFIFILTER The EMC emission limits for PDS depend on the installa
327. or is desired at the OFF to ON transition of Com3 command the tension reference is equalled to the tension feedback allowing the regulator enable with null error Set to OFF if the integral gain of the tension regulator 1 has to be calculated as function of the speed Set to the integral gain of the tension regulator is desired to take a constant value set by TK2 parameter Set to a value which re calibrates the integral gain of the tension regulator when this is calculated as function of the speed OFF Setto a value which re calibrates the tension regulator output The tension regulator output is divided by the value set by this parameter lower the value greater will be the tension regulator effect in the correction of the speed reference Setto Winder value the tension regulator acts on the current limit speed regulator saturated by a summing term Setto Axial value axial winder Setto the cutoff frequency value of the double slope digital filter at the regulator output to disable set CL2 0 Setto Wind value for winder reel Setto Unwind value for unwinder reel Set to Normal if the passage of the material on the winder unwinder is that defined for the normal operation Set to Rev if the passage of the material on the winder unwinder is opposite to that defined for the normal operation 0 Normal material top winded Rev material bottom winded or vice versa to Como if the operating condi
328. ording to the following sequence Remove the converter power supply Remove the closure front panel In front view the drive can be divided into three sections upper section in which there are the fuses central section B in which there are the thyristor stacks lower section C in which there are the control electronic boards SECTION A SECTION B SECTION C In section B are placed six stacks each stack can contain one or two disk thyristors according to the type unidirectional or reversible each stack is a single unit so that the front stacks can be immediately removed the internal stacks can be removed after having removed the front ones In section A connected on the upper edge of central power bars there are the terminals that connect the pulses cables coming from P board section C and the cables connected to the thyristors gate cathode disconnect the cables coming from the P board from their terminals write note of the connections IN UPPER VIEW Separating baffles for energized sizes gt K In section A the leg fuses are placed the fuses are connected to the stacks bars by proper bolts unscrew and remove the fastening bolts from the stacks bars that have to be taken out IMSPD027I 173 C Maintenance SILCOPAC D section C at the centre the stack bars are connected to the AC power bars each one by four bolts two opposite couple
329. ording to the proper tension reference source Rif tension reference from Rif analog input 0 100 terminals 1 33 34 Eanl tension reference from Ean1 analog input 0 100 terminals 1 29 31 P CJ4 tension reference from 4 parameter 0 100906 Set to the tension reference value if CJ 1 P Setto Axial value axial winder Setto the cutoff frequency value of the double slope digital filter at the regulator output to disable set CL2 0 Setto Wind value for winder reel Setto Unwind value for unwinder reel Setto Normal if the passage of the material on the winder unwinder is that defined for the normal operation Set to Rev if the passage of the material on the winder unwinder is opposite to that defined for the normal operation 0 Normal material top winded Rev material bottom winded or vice versa Set to if the operating condition Normal R ev is defined by the Como analog input status available on the SP DIO optional board Com6 not active Normal operation active Rev operation Set to the current value expressed in percentages depending on the motor rated current needed to apply the desired tension to maximum diameter see E5 11 parameter Set to AuxAdd value the speed reference summing term has the value set by CE1 parameter Set to the value needed by the speed reference summing term to maintain proper saturated the speed regulator offset speed Setto AuxRic
330. otation or from O to reverse rotation Verify the wanted direction of rotation and check Ud and N polarities which since the forward bridge is enabled must be positive Should the N value be negative invert tacho generator polarities and go back to point 3 Decrease the starting angle by steps no greater than 5 degrees until to read on the voltmeter a value equal to half armature rated voltage Ud 50 90 50 SetDJ5 as follows DJ5 DJ5c Ud 26 a DJ5C of the currently set up parameter b UdL value of armature voltage in shown on the display Connect the voltmeter to the ends of the tacho generator and verify that the voltage displayed corresponds depending on its V RPM characteristic to the speed shown on the display Should it be not corresponding act on the angle reference until the voltmeter reading gives a voltage that is 50 of the tacho 50 N 96 generator voltage at the motor rated speed and then set DJ 1 as follows DJ1 a D lc value of the currently set up parameter b NL value in shown on the display Once you have completed these operations increase the angle until the limit value of 165 degrees and press enter to switch off the motor When the motor has stopped disable the START command angle 0 natural starting moment IMSPDO27I SILCOPAC D C Setting up C2 6 4 Regulator The E M F regulator must be enabled in all applications wher
331. output 1 M39 Pwm2 programmable analog output 2 M40 Pwm3 programmable analog output 3 NOTES list b 1 ON or OFF terminal 1 is listed as at each analog input a voltage signal in the range 10 V can be applied the signal is displayed as percent value 10 V correspond to 100 Warning All analog inputs with the exception of M32 are programmable inputs so they can be put in relationship to variables other than those shown in list b for some aux functions only the variables in this list are those more habitually used 122 IMSPD027 SILCOPAC D C User Interface C1 3 7 Setup reference This function allows to set some internal programmable references used by the regulation loops and to verify the consequence on the other system variables the function is useful during the setting up sequence and during the diagnostics 1st level through buttons U D SELECT FUNCTION select the Setup Reference function SETUP REFERENCE j p press ENTER to access to the 2 level u using buttons U D in disabled converter conditions select from list a 1st or 2nd subset the desired 2nd level reference type if the selected type from list a is an item of the 2nd subset press ENTER to access to the 3rd level enable the converter using buttons U D setin b the desired value to apply to reference before selected 4 pressing ENTER the selected reference will be step activated wi
332. oved Speed regulator bandwidth recalibration when calculated by speed self tuning The parameter C D8 takes the function of the parameter CD9 that is removed Step function The parameters CEC and CE2 have a new function see item 5 Kramer function The parameters CEE and CE7 have been removed Motor thermal protection recalibration depending on speed The parameter CE9 has been removed Speed gain recalibration as function of the diameter The parameter CFA has a new function CFA NoAdVR The parameter CF5 takes on the function of the parameter CF 7 CF5 ErNAR The parameters TH5 6 7 8 have been removed The parameters TH1 2 3 4 take on a new function takes on the function of the parameter TH7 TcFGp TH2 takes on the function of the parameter TH8 TcFGI TH3 TacRF New function Emergency ramp XM1 14 OFF e CBD OFF TH4 TdcRF New function Emergency ramp XM1 14 OFF e CBD OFF Fixed time ramp The parameter CFD takes on the function of the parameter CFG that has been removed so CFD SWCom4 The parameter CF 4 takes on the function of the parameter CF 6 weighing time Load weighing function CF4 LW_Tm The parameter CF6 takes on the function of the parameter CF8 that is removed so CF6 T The parameter CF7 is removed Logic handling of the switchboard P L C The parameters CHA CHB CHC CHD CHE CH1 have been removed It is no more possible to set the logic outputs OUT1 6 paramaeters DO1 6 as CloseP and C
333. owing formula RifP CG1 where RifP position reference CG3 for positive rotation direction CG4 for negative rotation direction CG5 Set to the maximum allowable position error value Encoder pulses number If the position error is lower than the value set by this parameter the system will go in State Positioning completed see CGB parameter Setto the proportional gain value of the position regulator TJ 2 Set to the value which the speed regulator proportional gain must assume after the positioning only if CGB TJ 3 Set to the value which the speed regulator integral gain must assume after the positioning only if CGB OFF TJ4 Setto the value which the speed regulator derivative gain must assume after the positioning only if CGB 2 OFF 001 006 It is possible to program each one of parameters 001 to 006 with the value ErrP 0 the relevant logic output 0011 OUT6 will be active when the position error will be lower than the value set by CG5 parameter after the positioning IMSPD027 197 E Optional functions SILCOPAC D E1 3 Logic commands COM2 Terminal 1 18 If enabled the positioning will be reached If disabled the motor is speed regulated 1 4 Function description When C0M2 command is disabled the angular position regulator is excluded and the motor will be speed regulated When C0M2 command become enabled the converter will reach the approaching speed which sign d
334. ows the message TRACE RUNNING see par C1 3 8 note A Trace example is shown in appendix B The data in each record so for every printout lines are the following STATUS an item of list a of par C1 3 1 STATUS PROTECTION 16 bits data each bit showing if the associated protection is active bit 1 or not bit 2 0 the meaning of each bit is shown atthe point LEGENDA of this list a LOGIC I 0 16 bits data each bit showing the logic inputs and outputs status ON bit 1 or OFF bit 0 the meaning of each bit is shown atthe point LEGENDA this list a and in the appendix C Particularly the bit 15 the first on the right side shows the cumulate status of the alarms no alarm active bit15 21 at least an alarm active In addition if bit 15 1 the print end message will be completed by the message ALARMS 8 8 8 bits see ALARM LEGENDA appendix C Note the above mentioned data are the same before described in par C1 3 6 HARDWARE STATUS in list b at the items LOGIC INPUT and LOGIC OUTPUT of list a with the exception of the last four data OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 see 1 Aux2 Aux3 Auxl value of the variable selected by the DG5 parameter Aux2 value of the variable selected by the DG6 parameter Aux3 value of the variable selected by the DG7 parameter Note of the variables selected through 065 066 067 parameters is the AuxDgn variable composed by four bits showing the ON or OFF status of the
335. peed regulation without discontinuities in the current reference 180 IMSPDO027I SILCOPAC D D Auxiliary functions D3 Mechanical friction compensation SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SPEED REG 2 laoAdd MECHANIC LOSS No CURRENT FEEDBACK Parameters CED ON Mechanical friction compensation aux function enabled CE3 See description CE4 See description CA3 Program with the value AuxAdd when not used with the optional function Winder Function description The function compensates the mechanical friction losses according to the following formula Comp CE4 K where Comp current reference summing term needed to compensate the mechanical friction losses CE3 mechanical friction rate not depending on the speed CE4 coefficient depending on the mechanical friction rate as linear function of the speed Practical procedure for the experimental evaluation of CE3 and CE4 parameters 1 Through the Setup Reference function section C par 1 2 7 seta speed reference equal to 1 of the nominal speed 2 Read value section C par 1 2 7 point current needed to compensate the mechanical friction at this speed Set parameter with lag p value constant rate of the mechanical friction 3 Through the Setup Reference function section C par 1 2 7 set a speed reference equal to 100 of the nominal speed 4 Read la s value section C par 1 2 7 point
336. peed the current read through the Restore the proper mechanical conditions Instrument Mode function par C 1 3 5 oscillates in a synchronized way with the load mechanical change MS SSO loss in the gear box proper mechanical lubrication Current regulator instability Execute the adjustments of the current loop according the par 2 10 1 FAIL HYPOTHESIS CHECKS ACTIONS Supply line drop when the Restore the supply line motor is in recovery condition 4 4 quadrant converters only installation ground Current loop instability Check the current loop response 2 10 4 Execute the automatic adjustment of the current regulator through the CURRENT SELFTUN function par C2 10 1 Supply over voltages Check the supply transients particularly at the Restore the proper supply line conditions opening ofthe power transformer primary circuits or during the connection of power factor correction capacitors 168 5 027 SILCOPAC D C Troubles shooting FAIL HYPOTHESIS CHECKS ACTIONS Excessive overloads The armature current la read through the Instrument Decrease the work load cycles of the motor Mode function par C 1 3 5 is higher than the rated motor current see par C2 3 For cyclic overload evaluate the RMS current Under excited motor but the The field current value If read through the Check and if fault replace the exciter Customize conditions for the
337. placement is needed only if trouble on the above mentioned circuits happens see chapter 3 Trouble Shooting Sequence all sizes Remove the converter power supply Remove the closure front panel unlocking the special fasteners Disconnect the two connectors from XM1 terminal block pulling them down Disconnectthe two flat cable connectors X8 and X9 from C board Remove C board acting on the four attachment nuts if SPDS1 option is installed remove the protection cover forcing on the pressure fixing points and remove the board unscrewing the three nuts see par 4 2 1 figure 1 Remove the SPDS1 option support turrets if installed and reassemble them on the new spare C board nuts on the back of the board Ifthe SPDI1 option is installed on board remove it unlocking the four bayonet coupling supports Remove the SPDI1 option support turrets if it is installed and reassemble them on the new spare C board nuts on the back of the board Using the special tool or delicately by a little blade screwdriver lift and pull the component E2PROM U25 out of its base pay attention not to damage the component pins and check that they are completely inserted into their slots Assemble the component pulled out from the faulty board on the new board respecting its position and direction pay attention not to damage the component pins and check that they are completely inserted into their slots top of the EPROM
338. power and the exciter Select SELFTUNING function then select EMF SELFTUNING and press enter Enable the START command and wait for the calibration execution following the instructions shown on the display During the procedure the motor runs at base speed appointed by parameters DB5 and DB7 C2 10 4 Adjustment check The adjustment check of the regulation loops consists of two steps the first step is static stability verification the second step is system step response verification The two check steps must be executed according to the following sequence An oscilloscope is needed to display the typical waveforms CURRENT LOOP Static stability verification e Open the motor field disable the If F protection parameter DCF OFF and the stall protection parameter DCN OFF if needed mechanically lock the motor rotor e Connect the scope to tests points TP 17 signal and TP8 ground of board C par C2 15 set the scope time base to 5 ms div and the vertical scale factor to 500 mV div e Through the SETUP REFERENCE function par C1 3 7 set a current reference FIXED starting from a value equal to 10 and step by step increase the value up to 10096 At each step verify the waveform displayed on the scope as shown in the following figure 148 IMSPDO27I SILCOPAC D C Setting up STABLE CURRENT N UNSTABLE CURRENT la la ANA Y Y Y Y Y t la la CURR
339. que Load cell after converter E5 6 Taper function Taper function is interposed between the tension reference source and the operating tension reference performs a programmed reduction of the tension reference as function of the diameter calculated acquired Parameters CJC Set to ON to enable the function CJ6 Setto Lin value to obtain a linear shape of the tension reduction as function of the diameter Setto Hyp value to obtain a hyperbolic shape of the tension reduction as function of the diameter CJ7 Setto the diameter value 96 starting from which the Taper function begins 219 Setto the value that the tension reference will have to reach when being the Taper function enabled the diameter will be at its maximum value 100 Description In a orthogonal axes system points A 7 ToRef and B 100 CJ 8 are connected by a continuous function with a linear shape CJ 6 Lin or with a hyperbolic shape CJ 6 2 Hyp 216 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D E Optional functions 5 7 Zero speed tension Parameter CJ 3 allows to enable the acquisition of a tension reference set by parameter CJ 4 that replaces the selected tension reference through parameter CJ 1 according to the following principles CJ 3 001 The acquisition of the zero speed tension reference is disabled the tension reference selected by CJ 1 parameter is always active CJ3 ToN0On When the system reaches the zero speed see CB5
340. r Group B SPEED REG auge mo ON OFF 5 peed regulator enabled Enc F ON OFF Filter enable on sign of the speed feedback from encoder The filter rejects a sign reversing if 288 1 the reversal isn t permanent during at least 3 consecutive readings The filter isn t enabled if the system is in zero speed conditions displayed by a 0 on the 7 segment LED CBC Int 0 ON OFF Zeroing of the integral term when the speed reference 0 Enable this function to avoid the 2882 I turn back the motor stop and braking setting the speed reference 0 Don t enable this function in lifting applications CBD Rmp B ON OFF 288 3 ON OFF EEPROM NEN of the last reference set EEPROM storage ofthe last reference set by motopotentiometer motopotentiometer pts or ON OFF Reset of the last reference set Reset ofthe last reference set by motopotentiometer when speed is equalto 0 motopotentiometer when speed is equal to 0 Switching from speed feedback to armature voltage feedback when the tacho loss protection CBG 1 ON OFF occurs The converter is not locked but the tacho loss alarm is enabled in this case the 288 6 alarm cannot be silenced The following updating automatically will occur the proportional and integral gain of the speed loop are replaced by the gains fixed respectively by the TH7 and TH8 parameters the parameter selection of the speed feedback origin takes the value Ud the DDA
341. r DDA o 7 Fr ON ON OFF 7 Ventilation loss Converter heat sink thermostat intervention See also par DDB 8 Motor over temperature For proper operation of this protection the DB6 parameter must DCI ON OFF be programmed as follow DB6 100 lay 551 0 rated armature current max armature current See DC8 and DDC parameters too 9 Converter over temperature For proper operation of this protection the following E 1 ConOh ON OFF parameters must be programmed DA3 Converter size 083 lt See DDD parameter too DCK Ser F ON OFF 10 Serial link loss DE Ple serial communication is broken BET The protection is active only if the serial link is enabled See note par C2 1 If the converter receives current or speed references from the serial line serial link loss disabling must WARNING be carried out with utmost care In this condition when serial link loss occurs the converter uses the last received reference the user can therefore select the next action using the signal coming from either digital outputs configured as Alarm see the description of parameters DDE DEF and D01 D06 Jon 11 speed The intervention threshold be adjusted DC4 parameter ON OFF 12 Supply line beyond tolerance The minimum intervention threshold can be adjusted by Y ache I DC1 ine maximum one can be adjusted by D
342. r Interface SILCOPAC D List c List d AUX isn lst aux variable FIXED constant reference Aux2 2nd aux variable SQUARE WAVE square wave refer Aux3 3rd aux variable No 96 fs speed reference rpm N fs speed feedback rpm lao fs armature current refer fs armature current feedback Ud muss Fs V armature voltage Flu motor flux fs field current refer f fs A field current feedback UVO 65 V line voltage alfa thyristors firing angle electr degrees Notes the value of list a with the exception of Aux1 Aux2 Aux3 Flu may be modified in real values through the CD2 parameter fs full scale value corresponding to 100 1 Speed reference step applied fixed or square wave mode before the ramp to the motor speed regulator pressing ENTER Through the DB5 parameter fs can be selected 2 armature voltage reference step applied fixed or square wave mode to the e m f digital regulator of the motor The motor must be previously set in speed regulation conditions at a constant value higher than the basic speed the step should change the armature voltage from a value lower than the nominal voltage e g 7096 and the nominal voltage itself Through the DB4 parameter fs can be selected The function will be active only if the e
343. r pack par identify the pair of the fault thyristor according to the following 4 2 procedure column T of the THYRI STOR TRACE at the protection intervention instant par C1 3 8 e C1 3 9 shows the number assigned to the pulsed thyristor pair See table at par C1 3 8 The bridge that was enabled in that moment depends on the current reference sign lao Referring to Appendix D power circuits layout the physical thyristor pair can be identified Pulses amplifier circuit failure The connection from connector X8 on C board to connector X8 on P board was left open the connection is made by the proper flat cable Close the connection by the proper flat cable The connections between the connectors CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4 for the 2 quadrant SPDM CN3 and CN4 only and the gate cathode connectors notin the proper sequence Close properly the connection see Appendix D power circuits layout One of the connections from Close properly the connection see connectors CN1 CN2 CN3 Appendix D power circuits layout CN4 of P board for the 2 quadrant SPDM CN3 and CN4 only to the gate cathode connectors 166 5 027 SILCOPAC D C Troubles shooting C3 2 THE MOTOR DOESN T RUN FAIL HYPOTHESIS CHECKS ACTIONS Start command is missing If the start command Is missing Check the enabling chain If the voltage at terminal XM1 13 the voltage between terminals XM1 13 22 is than 20 t
344. r to program proper current parameters it is necessary to introduce the following definitions y rated current of the converter i max working current of the motor motor current name plate current value to be delivered in permanent conditions by Silcopac D This value is the same indicated on the nameplate of the SP DM This value is settled by ohmic value of CT the load resistors corrente di fondo scala del convertitore max current to be absorbed in permanent conditions by the motor The lam current can be higher than the In provided that is in accordance with the load cycles provided in the paragraph A8 NOTE The current must lower of the maximum overload current of the motor Knowing the maximum motor working current the ohmic value of the load resistor may be calculated with the following relationship Ns Rx56 57 Rx58 x59 where Rx56 x57 Rx58 x59 1 0 and Ns CT turns ratio The table shows the Rx56 57 Rx58 59 resistor values mounted in the factory together with the values obtained by applying the ratio 2 in which it is supposed that the maximum current output is equal to the IN nominal current of the converter Table C2 3 Silcopac D Frame Type SPDM030 SPDM060 SPDM080 SPDM110 SPDM160 SPDM200 SPDM260 SPDM350 SPDM450 SPDM500
345. rameters available with the new release NOTE Below the name of every parameter there is is serial number and his image in memory W 2word B byte For the boolean parameters ON OFF is indicated the bit inside his byte exemple CBB 288 1 means that the parameter CBB is associated to the bit 1 of the byte with address 288 The bit numeration begins from 0 least significative bit LSB till to 7 more significative bit MSB For the parameters expressed in please note that the normalization factor is 13107 3333 hex so the value 10096 meets to 13107 and 100 meets to 54429 hex The enumerative parameters that is these that have a selector function for example CA1 takes values from 0 to N 1 where N is the selector position number B1 1 Configuration parameters Code Name Default Values Description Group CURRENT REG Selection of the armature current reference origin Die 205 IN Reg X From the speed regulator From the serial link From the differential analog input terminals XM1 33 34 From the Eanl analog input terminals XM1 29 From the Ean2 analog input terminals 1 30 Selection of the armature current limits Upper limit fixed by the 1st set and TB3 2nd set parameters Lower limit fixed by the 1st set and 2nd set parameters The switching between 1st and 2nd set occurs enabling terminal XM1 19 if param DN3 Par otherwise the Ist set is always e
346. ration acting on CB8 parameter if Encod or acting on DJ 1 parameter if CB3 Tach until the proper linear speed value will be reached IMSPDO027I 201 E Optional functions SILCOPAC D E4 3 Parameters setting CN6 Set 1 value the diameter transducer was connected to terminals XM1 29 31 Set to Ean2 value if the diameter transducer was connected to terminals XM1 30 31 CN1 Setto minimum diameter value as percent of the maximum diameter CN2 Set to CN3 value if the initial diameter is acquired from CN3 parameter Set to 1 value if the initial diameter is acquired from an analog signal 0 10V connected to terminals XM1 29 31 Set to Ean2 value if the initial diameter is acquired from an analog signal 0 10V connected to terminals XM1 30 31 CN3 Set to initial diameter value as percent of the maximum diameter only if parameter CN2 _ CN5 Set to the time value as seconds taken by the diameter signal to change from the minimum to the maximum value 100 if the line speed assumes the maximum value 100 CL3 Set to Wind value if the diameter assumes increasing value winder reel Set to Unwind value if the diameter assumes decreasing value un winder reel CBH Set ON to enable the function E4 4 Diameter acquisition logic The signal provided by the diameter transducer is acquired reading the voltage value at the proper analog input CN6 parameter At 0V value the diameter has the
347. relating to the current reaction through its transduction circuit TA Load resistors the circuit of the TA installed on board of the RTT module monitors the current signal of its own bridge for the instantaneous over current protection of that branch of the parallel 280 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D APPENDIX E Parallel of Bridges The connection P board ofthe module SPDM and of the module RTT mustbe closed between the terminals X6 and 7 X14 and the J P1 jumper must be open as shown in the illustration below o 6 7 m 9 is Closed connection X10 On PPRCRC board fitted on the RTT module the jumpers must be personalized as shown in the following table JUMPER POSITION DESCRIPTION OPEN p cu CLOSED va NT USED On PPRCRD board fitted on the SP DM module the jumpers must be personalized as shown in the following table JUMPER POSITION DESCRIPTION CV1 CLOSED CV2 Open if Ist monitor output in absolute value is required otherwise it must be closed CV3 OPEN The command impulses of the bridge generated the SP DM converter are also sent to the RTT module through a shielded 2 1 2 flat cable fitted with 2 female c
348. rence is calculated from the line speed as function of the calculated acquired diameter CURRENT REG Armature current regulator CURRENT FEEDBACK Armature current feedback TAPER Used when in the winder unwinder applications the tension reference To has to be re calibrated as function of the coil diameter the re calibration can be linear or hyperbolic type When the function is disabled the tension reference is directly passed to the comparison node DIAMETER CALC The diameter is calculated as line speed angular speed ratio or it is acquired as analog signal provided by a proper external transducer 214 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D E Optional functions INERTIA It evaluates the term related to the inertia compensation that is function of speed variation diameter machine acceleration times material density and tape width MECHANIC LOSS It evaluates the term related to the mechanical loss compensation a constant term and a speed related term LOAD CELL Transducer of the tension feedback T e g load cell or dandy roll The value is acquired as analog signal LOAD CELL Tension regulator it receives the tension error from the node of comparison between the tension reference and feedback and generates a term that control the current limit TENSION REF It evaluates the term related to the tension reference Parameters setting Setting 6 Tangential winder tension loop with load cell control of the curr
349. ring by logic command 2 606 3 C25top S The traces are frozen at low high of COM2 changing DGE Autopr FF 25 1 Traces AUTOPRINT enabled by external protection intervention ON OFF OFF The auto print is not done 606 4 ON The auto print is done dus mar 5 55 Number of record stored in the DRIVE TRACE after the lock instant DG2 TrcNc 608B 1 255 Software cycles number between two successive DRIVE TRACE records The corresponding time interval is given by the following formula T CD3 DG2 ms IMSPDO 7I SILCOPAC D Code Name Default DG3 DG4 StatV 610B B List of parameters Values Description THYRISTOR TRACE records number after the lock instant _______ Displayed variable inthe STATUS REGUL No speedreference rpm N speed feedback rpm 2 lao armature currentreference la Selection of the meaning assigned to the Aux1 aux variable In example selecting Ean1 as DG5 value then DG5 1 the following self assignment 15 generated Aux1 DG5 15 AuxDgn 611B IMSPD027I Eanl reference input terminals XM1 33 34 Tach Tacho gen input Tach ____ terminals 1 26 27 5 Programmable input Eanl terminals 1 29 31 Ean Programmable input Ean2 terminals 1 30 31 s laoNrg Armature current reference generated by the speed regulator upstream current lim
350. rked by an asterisk in column T of the Trace 5 see par C1 3 1 STATUS an item of list b in association with the items PROTE or SUPPR of list a in printed If the Trace isn t in stop mode the printout is disabled the display shows the message TRACE RUNNING see par C1 3 8 note A Trace example is shown in appendix A if the Trace is in stop mode 50 sequential records of significant data numbered from 24 to 25 will be printed the record numbered as 0 corresponds to the converter lock instant the records numbered as not valid Through the DG1 parameter the records number can be set in the range 5 to 45 after the lock instant Through the DG2 parameter the time period between each record can be set The printout will be terminated by a message 6 ERRORS TRACING CAUSE 7 RECORDING TIME 8 1 9 Aux2 10 Aux3 11 6 number of not valid events marked by an asterisk in the first Trace column see par C1 3 1 STATUS an item of list b in association with the items PROTE or SUPPR of list a is printed 8 time period between each record and the other 9 meaning of the Aux variable selected through the 065 parameter 127 C User Interface bit 15 0 SILCOPAC D 10 meaning of the Aux2 variable selected through the DG6 parameter 11 meaning of the Aux3 variable selected through the DG 7 parameter If the Trace isn t in stop mode the printout is disabled the display sh
351. rly fastened Then be sure to verify the power supply voltage to be applied to terminals AK1 AK3 AK5 line breaker closure the power supply voltage and the synchronism to be applied to terminal block XM2 on board the power supply voltage applied to terminal block XM4 of the motor field exciter or of the rectifier bridge the power supply voltage of the blower applied to terminal block XM3 2 2 Board P customizing Before applying power to the Silcopac D verify the following connections see par 2 10 J 8 PR board PU board EE SPDM 4 quadrant converter SPDM 2 quadrant converter jumprA B ____________ closed OPEN 2 0 jimperA C 00 jumperB D OSOd 00 62 0 closed S S deed deed connected to faston VA snubber board connected to faston VA onthesnubberboard jumperJ PI S s deed X52 X53 Resistor 176 2 _ __ 54 X55 resistor R177 22k Eieik Rap eERERERERERR RES RR GG GAB BURG GA GU D GU RA GUN NU GU NU GN NN NU NU GN NR R GU GN N GENE RN GT RRRERERET RE REGE SIRAEIEIRIREIEIEIRI4EIEZRIEINIRISIIRIRIRIS I RIS IR UIS SIS UR 4I IS UZ 4E SIR IZ
352. rminal from XM 1 5 to XM1 12 are available all the terminals required to connect the Encoder channels with or without zero signal differential or non differential The number of pulses per revolution p p r must be choosen considering the maximum speed the frequence must be in the range from 7 Hz to 50 KHz x where F hz pulse frequency lt 50 Khz NMAX maximum r p m Example NMax 3000 rpm Pulse per revolution 1000 F 21000 x 3000 60 50kHz When the frequence is lower than 7 Hz the converter shows speed 0 When the frequence is higher than 50 KHz then converter is not able to acquire the correct speed feedback information In the applications using the Positioning function the resolution minimum measurable error is calculated starting from the pulses revolution 360 NMAXmotor Resolution expressed in degrees if for exemple the speed reducer has a ratio 1 2 the resolution after the speed reducer is double than that on the motor shaft Itis possible to use Encoders that have a max number of pulse per revolution equal to 9999 CONNECTIONS Line driver three channel Encoder SPDM umper J P26 on 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 External power Supply unit 5 24V LINE DRIVER 44 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D Non differential two channel Encoder SPDM Jumper J P26 24v U1 U2 PUSH PULL Encod
353. rofile is defined through GSD file Device Database File supplied by device manufacturer 82 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D A Technical features A95 PPRCRC BOARD A9 5 1 Description of the PPRCRA board The PPRCRC board 15 installed inside the master converter in the parallel bridges application The board compares the IAM current delivered from the MASTER SPDM with the current delivered by the SLAVE RTT If the difference between the two currents exceeds the permitted tolerance the relay RL drops out The protection will be disabled until the current of a bridge reaches its rated value The board is fitted onto the P board by means of the relevant connectors and spacers The C board of the SPDM will no longer be connected to the P board but to the PPRCRC board through the connectors which keep the same codes as before On the board the circuit of the la monitor of the RTT module is present with outlet at the Faston terminals XM 11 3 4 A milliammeter may be connected to these terminals in d c current with 5 mA limit or a d c voltmeter with 10 V limit The output can be set with the T1 trimmer Should a voltmeter be used the CV4 jumper must be closed The output from the la monitor can be at a relative value CV2 jumper closed instrument at central zero or at absolute value CV2 open instrument at side zero adi CV a 5 ser BBB e BBB EIE
354. ror from the node of comparison between the tension reference and feedback and generates a term that control the current limit 212 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D E Optional functions Parameters setting Setting 5 Axial winder tension loop with load cell control of the current limit CJB 1 2 2 CL1 CL2 CL3 CL4 CL5 2 2 1 TK2 TK3 TK4 IMSPD027 Set to ON to enable the tension regulator with load cell Set to ON to enable the winder Set to the value according to the proper tension reference source Rif tension reference from Rif analog input 0 100 terminals XM1 33 34 Eanl tension reference from Ean1 analog input 0 100 terminals XM1 29 31 P CJ4 tension reference from CJ 4 parameter 0 100 Setto the value according to the proper tension feedback source Serial tension feedback from hidden parameter Addr 242 default 0 limits 200 20090 Ean2 tension feedback from Ean2 analog input 0 100 terminals XM 1 30 31 Tach tension feedback from Tach analog input 0 100 terminals 1 26 27 jumpers 8 9 10 11 12 Set to the tension reference value if CJ 1 CJ 4 Setto OFF ifthe tension transducer load cell dandy roll etc precedes the converter Setto ON if the tension transducer follows the converter See par 8 6 Set to ON if the bumpless insertion of the tension regulat
355. rotections This protections are very important for the drivew and are stored on the control board hardware So to reset this protections it is necessary to reset the board Setting the parameter DEE ON the reset made by the bit 7 of the command word will become an hard reset i e it resets the hardware protections of the board WARNING The HW reset takes place if the commands from Profibus are enabled DEB ON only The digital output can be forced if its corresponding parameter is set to P rofib only For the output OUTI itis necessary to set DO1 Profib For the output OUT2 itis necessary to set DO2 P rofib And so on 1 027 273 APPENDIX F Profibus DP SILCOPAC D F3 Use modes 231 Hardware components The Profibus protocol requires a Profibus interface board a SP DM drive with EPROM suitable for the protocol management Serial cables equipped with connector compatible with SINEC L2 DP Siemens connector baud rate up to 1500Kbaud or anyway connectors compatible with the Profibus DP Standard DIN 19245 standard part 3 F3 User interface To enable and set up the data related to the Profibus protocol the user needs of the SPDM keypad user interface For the reception from the Profibus interface board of the following set up parameters it is necessary an hardware reset of the drive The data group involved to set the set up data is the Drive Parameters E group Group E Serial Link DEA P rofib OFF ON OFF Enab
356. rrent reference parameter CA1 Speed reference parameter CB1 Speed reference with polarity imposed by logic input Com3 parameter CB1 Speed reference with polarity imposed by logic inputs 1 e Com2 scheme parameter 1 Speed reference commutated with motopotentiometer function by logic input COM4 parameter CB1 Tension reference parameter CJ 1 Analog input Ean1 terminals XM1 29 31 Armature current reference parameter 1 Armature current upper limit Ean1 and lower limit Ean1 parameter CA2 Armature current upper limit 1 and lower limit Ean1 imposed by logic input Com3 parameter 2 Armature current upper limit 2 Adding term to armature current reference parameter Helper function Armature current reference for load sharing parameter CEA Diameter origin selection parameter Tension reference parameter CJ 1 Starting diameter origin selection parameter CN2 Analog input Ean2 terminals 1 30 31 Armature current reference parameter CA1 Armature current lower limit CA2 Adding term to the armature current reference parameter Adding term to the armature current reference imposed by logic input Com3 parameter CA3 Adding term to the speed reference parameter CB2 Adding term to the speed reference imposed by logic input Com3 parameter CB2 Diameter origin selection parameter CN6 Te
357. rt command COM3 10 Double set of parameters there is a new parameter CDG to enable disable the switch of the parameters sets 1l Profibus DP digital outputs 00 1 00 6 be driven directly writing bits 8 13 of the command word parameters 001 006 must be P rofib Also reset command is performed writing bit 7 of the command word Firmware 2 7 NOTE To implementthese new functionalities we have removed some functions rarely used in our applications 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 NOTE Follow the list of these functions Selection of the armature current reference from the Rif differential analog input CA1 RifC12 Itis no more possible to set the armature current reference origin 1 RifC 12 from the analog input RIF terminals XM1 33 34 with sign coming of the logic inputs state COM1 e COM2 Current limit linear recalibration as function of the speed The recalibration tooks place from the speed set by the parameter DB7 to the maximum speed No more from the parameter CE8 that is removed Maximum speed limited to the base speed value If itis enabled the switching from speed feedback to armature voltage feedback when the tacho loss protection occurs CBG 2 the maximum speed with armature voltage feedback in the weakening applications is limited to the base speed value The parameter CC4 takes on the function of the parameter CC5 that is rem
358. rt from zero up to Nominal Speed when it is applied the Nominal Torque Motor Nominal Current In those conditions if the motor machine coupling is not rigid i e belt transmissions the motor shaft torque is not fully applied to the machine belt skidding the S elf tuning algorithm is not able to measure the correct acceleration time and can calculate wrong values for gains and filter bandwidth In these conditions Speed Self tuning procedure can also be applied decreasing proportionally the nominal current and the base speed values In this way a reduced torque step is applied to the system and it will reach a speed lower than base speed See the following table example Nominal current 70 Base speed 8090 D _ 70 80 They are the normal working conditions during the Self tuning the motor reaches the base speed with a current step that is equal to the nominal current During elf tuning motor reaches half base speed and half nominal torque is applied to System 3 During Self tuning motor reaches one fourth of base speed and one fourth of nominal torque is applied to System Note After self tuning set parameters DB6 and DB7 to their correct value in the example DB7 70 DB8 80 IMSPDO027I 159 C Setting up SILCOPAC D 160 IMSPD027I C3TROUBLE SHOOTING Most failure conditions that may occur to Silcopac D converter are continuously monitored by the fifteen if enabled internal protect
359. ry C1 1 environment 2 environmen Classification of categories according to environments C E Yeu low voltage network industrial network 1 industrial network 2 cal CC aum H 98 REELS category 3 04 category 2324 IMSPD0271 257 APPENDIX E EMC Standards and applicable Standards SILCOPAC D Solutions to fulfil conducted emission requirements The emissions can be divided into two parts the conducted emission and the radiated emission The disturbances can be emitted in various ways Conducted disturbances can propagate to other equipment via all conductive parts including cabling earthing and the metal frame of an enclosure Conducted emission Can be reduced in the following way By RFI filtering for HF disturbances Using sparking suppressors in relays contactors valves etc to attenuate switching sparks Using ferrite rings in power connection points Radiated emission be able to avoid disturbance through air all parts of the PDS should form a Faraday Cage against radiated emissions The PDS includes cabinets auxiliary boxes cabling motors etc Some methods for ensuring the continuity of the Faraday Cage are listed as follows Enclosure enclosure must have an unpainted non corroding surface finish at every point that other plates doors etc make contact Unpainted metal to metal contacts shall be used throughout with conductive gaskets where appr
360. s enabled terminal XM1 15 InR21 First internal reference no 2 Its value will be replaced to the speed reference when the INTRF2 064W LE 5 enabled terminal XM 1 16 If both inputs INTRF1 and INTRF2 are enabled the priority will be given to INTRF1 9 05104 Drooping This parameter causes motor speed decrease as function of the sink current 6 arranging the speed error according to the following formula Error N Ref Feedback Ref TC9 E ror N lt error 3 Ref N speedreference Feedback speedfeedback 96 where Refl present current reference from speed regulator 96 IMSPD027I 99 B List of parameters SILCOPAC D Code Name Default Values Description ii Group D ALT SPEED The parameters group D 2nd set is an alternate set of the parameters group 1st set the switching from 1st to 2nd set occurs enabling the terminal XM1 19 if parameter DN3 2C Par otherwise the 1st set will be always enabled en N Gp2 029999 Second proportional gain of the speed regulator m nee J 0 8000 Second integral gain of the speed regulator N Ga 0 255 Second lead lag network derivative section of speed regulator it is implemented as filter with zero and pole delay on the feedback 086W The characteristic frequencies of the filter have the following values filter pole Wp TD3 20 48 rad s filter zero Wz TD3 102 4 rad s To dis
361. s exchange Switching of speed feedback from tacho generator encoder to armature voltage Tension loop function enabling Logic input COM4 terminals XM6 1 e XM6 2 SPDIO expansion board Commutation from analog input Rif to motopotentiometer parameter CB1 Logic input COMB terminals XM6 3 e XM6 4 SPDIO expansion board Logic input COM6 terminals 6 5 e XM6 6 SPDIO expansion board Zero speed tension acquisition Field inversion function Logic input COM7 terminals XM6 7 e XM6 8 SPDIO expansion board 88 Zero speed tension acquisition Field inversion function IMSPDO027I 11 SPARES To minimize the converter down time required for repair it is suggested to stock a suitable amount of spare parts especially concerning those components not directly available from supply stores The following tables show a suggested spare parts list and their relevant part number for a Silcopac D converter A11 1 Control electronic circuits necessary to change the new EPROM with the old one mounted in the broken broad POWER CARD ELC260580 PU 50A QUADRANT 380V 500V 0 6 1 1000073024 PU 66A QUADRANT 600 690 H K 1 ELC260561 50A IV QUADRANT 380V 500V D G 1 ELC260562 66A IV QUADRANT 600V 690V 1 1000002327 85A II QUADRANT 150 850V 1 ELC452445 85A IV QUADRANT 150 850V 1 ELC452567 PUIKA II QUADRANT 950 1 452463 PRIKA IV QUADRANT 950V N 1 A11 2 Snubbers 1000000453
362. s of installation repairing or replacement without damaging the inverter It indicates operations in whose field electrostatic discharges must be avoided Generic WARNING symbol It is used to explain an instruction an operation of repairing or other Generic REMARK symbol Make sure you fully read and understand this MANUAL before performing any intervention on the SPDM Preface SILCOPAC D SAFETY PRECAUTIONS This section contains information about safety necessary and useful for the personnel operating with the SPDM The information is general and concerns the risks for operators or for maintenance personnel related to the operation and maintenance of the converter The lack of observance of these rules may cause an hazard to the safety of people with risk of death and of damaging the converter motor or operating machine Before operating with the unit read the safety instructions All the operations of electric maintenance and installation on the SPDM must be performed by qualified CAUTION technicians All the standard electric safety procedures must be respected Never touch inside the converter only after making sure there is not a high temperature and or in voltage Always wear protection shoes insulated in rubber and protection glasses Never work alone Never connect to the system any grounded device of measurement or oscilloscope Never remove safety screens Always pay maximum attention when han
363. s of the request done the contents of the requested parameter is stored in the third PWE word e As copy of the IND word previously requested is reported in the IND word e 5 eco back copy of the word previously requested is reported in the word with the possible bit 2 setted to 1 in case of error in the request record number out of range fthe record number is out of range an error code is reported in the third PWE word 2 2 1 2 Using of the record number The relative record number exist only for the Drive Trace The record number which appears in the field 0 has a temporaly meaning Infact the record no 0 is the record of the instant when the protection 15 intervened while the records with a positive number are the records stored in subsequent instans The maximum number of these record is defined on the parameter 061 The remaining records are sorted according a negatives numbers decreasing order and they meaning the different storing instants little by little more older since the protection has been intervened When the record number is requested in the IND word it means the offset compared with the oldest record therefore an 0 offset means the oldest record stored while a 49 offset means the latest record recorded and it depends from the DG1 parameter Because of the Thyristor Trace the same method is used the records number recorded in subsequent instants when the pro
364. s related to the enable of the mechanical losses compensation function Set the parameters related to the enable of the diameter calculation acquisition function par 8 9 E5 3 5 Setting 5 Axial winder tension loop with load cell control of the current limit Diameter Diameter Line Load cell Line Line speed speed lt Dandy roll Angular Load cell speed line speed angular speed angular speed line speed Diameter Diameter In this case both regulators are active this setting is used for winder or unwinder systems The axial winder function evaluates the terms related to the tension reference to the inertia compensation and to mechanical losses compensation the tension loop function with load cell compares the reference to the tension feedback and generates through a proportional integral regulator a term which corrects the tension inaccuracies the terms calculated by the axial winder and tension loop functions are summed by a summing node whose output controls the current limit the speed regulator is saturated by a term summed to the reference The information related to the diameter value can be acquired by an external transducer or it can be calculated as line speed angular speed ratio IMSPD027I 211 E Optional functions SILCOPAC D NoRic Current Limits No Y SPEED N N i FEEDBACK DIAMETER N MECHANIC LossK LOSS LK_N N AccTo INERTIA
365. scrolled stopping on the desired option e g 601 6 pushing ENTER button the selected parameter is confirmed The SPDII interface has four DIP SWITCHES arranged the rear of the unit that must be configured as following 1 2 3 4 N LEN III CM lt BE The SPDI2 interface has four DIP SWITCHES arranged on the rear of the unit that must configured as following B 1 OFF 2 OFF 3 ON 4 ON BE Near to the dip switch there is a trimmer for the contrast control of the liquid crystal display The following pages report the full description of all the existing functions C1 3 1 Status This function shows information about the Power up or the Reset test about the protections and about the operating status of the converter At Power up or at Reset the display shows the date and the software release for 5 seconds y E ENHANCED release ASI GG MMIAA y lt gt B or E CUSTOM release Release Y Pushing the MODE button the delay and the following view are skipped and the first level will be immediately entered 2nd level after 5 seconds the display shows the displayed variable is selected through the DG4 parameter push MODE to go back to the first level 151 level the display shows SELECT FUNCTION Push the U D buttons to scroll the other functions U D 1st level Normal operation SELECT FUNCTION select
366. sing technical information or errors in this manual nor for accidental damages due to the use of the information contained in this manual IMSPD0271 Preface SILCOPAC D 4 IMSPD027I A1 GENERAL A1 1 Introduction Silcopac D is a family of Graetz three phase bridge compact converters for driving DC motors up to 4000 A with enhanced features of accuracy and dynamic response These are fully digital converters because all control and regulation functions including the thyristors firing are performed by a 16 bit microcontroller The use of the digital technique gives new important features the converter can be set by software in several ways So as to match the system requirements a powerful converter diagnostics is provided the user can interact with the SPDM by means of a communication interface which allows to exchange data commands and other information the current the speed and e m f loop adjustment can be automatically performed self tuning procedure the converter can be included in a centralized digital control system by means of a serial communication line which allows large amounts of data to be exchanged Sophisticated control algorithms can be easily implemented The AC line frequency and the phase cyclic rotation do not affect the SP DM s they can operate at both 2 and 4 quadrants In the 2 quadrants operating mode the Graetz bridge has 6 thyristors the motor torque has an unique fixed rotation direction In the 4 quadra
367. ssary to connect the Faston terminal XT5 of the PPRCRC D boards by cable to the Faston terminal X5 of the P board The lack of a connection between the PPRCRC and PPRCRD boards through flat cable X8A prevents the operation of the converter Fan_F thermal protection Onthe PPRCRC board the jumper CV3 must be closed whereas on the PPRCRD board the jumper CV1 must be closed BOARD LAYOUT X10 BOARD PPRCRC D X8 X9 X8A X8 9 X11 BOARD P BOARD P BOARD PPRCRC D FIXING THE BOARD In order to fix the PPRCRC D board to the P board and subsequently where required the C board to the PPRCRD board nylon threaded spacers are used as shown in the following drawing BOARD C BOARD PPRCRC D 3 nylon washer 0 5 mm nylon washer 0 5 mm BOARD P 2 8 1 027 SILCOPAC D APPENDIX E Parallel of Bridges SERIGRAPH PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD I X56 ici 14 65 Gs 6038 3608 E az T 757818 edel e EE bs e TEY Ir sited fra 3 EB ILI gt BE e oon 1 ERPE 19 aa ic PPRCRA
368. ssing CONSISTENCY ERROR ENTER in 4 the display shows PRESS ENTER press ENTER to return to 3rd level List a List b CURRENT REG 15 parameters set of the armature current regulator 5 B ALT CURRENT 2nd parameters set of the armature current regulator 6 C SPEED REG Ist parameters set of the motor speed regulator 5 D ALT SPEED 2nd parameters set of the motor speed regulator 6 1st parameters set of the in serles to the speed ref 5 F ALT RAMP 2nd parameters set of the ramp in series to the speed ref 6 REG parameters of the motor E M force regulator 5 the parameters of the 1st set are always active with the exception of the following case 6 when they are replaced by the parameters of the 2nd set 6 the parameters of the 2nd set are arranged to replace those of the 1st set assigning to the DN3 parameter the value C Par the replacement happens when the terminal XM1 19 COM3 becomes active disabling XM1 19 the 1st set will be enabled again IMSPDO027I 119 C User Interface SILCOPAC D 1 3 4 Drive parameters This function sets up the system sets the choices made to match the converter performances to the installation features e g when a certain alarm or protection is required when a serial communication has to be provided which inputs or outputs are to be used etc 1st level using buttons U D SELECT FUNCTION select the Drive Parameters function DRV
369. ster it s to be meant as an integer signed word and due to the decimal a data between 13107 and 13107 will be written The meaning of these two words is fixed for all the five messages The other words can be chosen by the user by enabling the proper masks from the SPDM keypad Currently a maximum of 8 words can be chosen for process data both for PPO in writing or PPO in reading For PPO in reading the data exchanged by reading for the master the same described in the group F of the paragraph 3 2 For PPO in writing the data exchanged in writing for the master are only replacement of analog input Ean1 with reference coming from Profibus Once this reference is enabled the real replacement of the analog input 1 is determined by the choice of Eanl1 for those parameters which include this term as a choice in am mutually exclusive way The reference Ean1 via Profibus finds no useful destination but it s exchanged anyway even if though enabled it has not been chosen by any of the parameters which foresaw it as a possible choice The data is an integer signed word included in the range between 3333H that is from 13107 to 13107 due to the decimal replacement of analog input Ean2 with reference coming from Profibus See the above point Display of variable Aux1 written by a Profibus Master This variable is useful for debugging since it allows to display through the SP DM keypa
370. supply 3 Set the jumper J P 4 on the 2 3 position BOARD 2 ___ JP4 1 2 3 To enable the writing of parameters on EEPROM follow the steps above in the opposite sequence N B If you use the motopotentiometer with storage of the last set value CBE ON then P4 must be left on position 1 2 C2 12 Resetof the converter There are three possible way to reset the occurred protections 1 to press the button RESET showed in the figure above 2 to power on the terminal XM 1 21with external 24V 3 to keep pressed simultaneously for three seconds the keys Up Down V and MODE The reset acts if the converter is in PROTECTION status P flashing on the display or in TEST status only r flashing IMSPD027I 151 C Setting up SILCOPAC D C2 7 Block diagram This diagram shows the blocks included in the converter and the main configuration parameters CA1 CA3 CB1 CB2 CB3 21 22 e additional SILCOPACD on quA s speed additional current feedback reference speed reference 9 curent L iL regulator 9929 regulator Thyristor o firing gt N gt bridges x 427 reversing E x CA6 9999 8 With inputs 8 feedback outputs po 7 alarms 8 i I 19 USER INTERFACE p
371. supply voltage returns to normal value the system executes bumpless restart of the machine lf the line loss or the line drop have a duration less than 100ms the control circuits of the converter remain properly powered and synchronized with the supply line allowing an instant restart if the line loss or the line drop have a duration greater than 100ms during the restart phase true system power on some tests on the circuits and the line re synchronization is executed adding about a 500ms delay D12 Speed error This function is used in hoisting applications where is necessary to keep under control the speed regulator A logic output OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 0014 005 and OUT6 is activated when the absolute value of speed error Speed ref Speed feedback is higher than a programmable value and this condition lasts for a programmable interval PARAMETERS CF7 Max permissible value of speed error Time tenth of milliseconds in which speed error must be higher than CF 7 to seta logical output 001 006 Set one of parameters from 001 to 006 to to have the relative logic output enabled if the condition described above CF 8 Is true Speed error is calculated after ramp If the absolute value of speed error becomes again lower than par the corresponding logic output is disabled 190 IMSPDO027I SILCOPAC D D Auxiliary functions D13 speed feedback switching The function is normally used i
372. t D Iv Inom 0 4 and from D to point E where Ip 1 43 can be read Then lp 1 43 x 1 43 600 2858 A Ip Iv 2858 240 3 575 or Ip Iv 1 43 0 4 2 3 575 Ts infinite ELS gt Figure 3 1 027 53 A Technical features 54 2 4 Ipo SILCOPAC D Ip 7927 PDM6O 5 L 4 ON Pare et at SSN lt EE Z 180 4 300 ss _ AM oi l he SS mm Z Figure 5 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D A Technical features 0 5 oi PAN A A _ 1 111111 1 Ts 14
373. t of 001 is 12 132 IMSPD027 C2 SETTING UP The Silcopac D set up described here refers to the basic diagram shown in the paragraph 7 6A for a IV quadrant converter and to the related simplified block diagram The following steps are also applicable to for other complex applications that use one more auxiliary functions provided by the software basic or enhanced the additional steps to be executed according to the complete block diagram are described in the auxiliary user s manual 22 regulator regulator Thyristors firing Bridges reversing Current Speed feedback Current VL T Current limits Speed E M F p regulator feedback If an alarm or a protection occurs during the converter set up the SPDI1 user interface displays a message that identifies the intervention cause section 2 USER INTERFACE describes these messages The following functions provide additional help to the setting up Setup reference paragraph 1 3 7 Thyristor trace paragrafo C1 3 8 Printing menu Drive trace paragrafo C1 3 9 Protes amp Alarms paragrafo C1 3 11 IMSPDO027I C Setting up SILCOPAC D C2 1 Preliminary operations Before applying power to the Silcopac D verify the converter and the motor plate data verify that the power connections and all the terminals wiring are executed as shown by the diagram and that all the connections and the terminal screws are prope
374. tain the parameter value chosen since the SPDM drive values are all 16 bit values the fourth word will never be used most significant word The parameter reading operation is a procedure similar to parameter writing After a reading or writing command the PKW part of the message concerning the PPO at Master input will contain the information related to the successful or not execution of the sent message 1 027 267 APPENDIX F Profibus DP SILCOPAC D The information will be grouped as follows The first word will contain the code of the requested operation with bit 2 if any set to one if the previously requested operation is not allowed because a not existing parameter has been requested or because the user tried to set a value out of range bit15 5814 bit2 bitl Successful operation gt 0 X X Failed operation gt 1 In case of a parameter reading command the above mentioned word will contain further information about the type of parameter negated data or not and the number of digits after comma 015 014 058 bit7 bit1 0 Code identifying the conversion coefficient The parameter data is multiplied by the conversion coefficient or divided according to the value of bit 15 1 The conversion coefficient must be divided by the parameter value 0 The conversion coefficient must be multiplied by the parameter value The current conversion codes implemented are
375. tection has been intervened and it s defined on the DG3 parameter of the IND word It means the offset compared with the oldest record offset 0 The offset 15 means the latest record and it depends from the DG3 parameters The word Protections which correspond to the field 1 of a generic Drive Trace record has to be interpreted as follow IMSPD027 269 APPENDIX F Profibus DP SILCOPAC D F2 2 1 3 Meanings of Protections Logic 1 0 Drive Trace amp Status fields Protections bit 15 bit8 07 bitl 00 MainF I0C W_Dog UdF 2 Fan F Mot0h UvOut Stale Arm_F The I O Logic word which coincide to the field 2 of a generic Drive Trace record has to be interpreted as follow Logic 1 0 bit 15 bit8 bit7 bitl 00 Stat Ramp Comi Com4 7 KM Q Outl Out2 Alarm The N amp Status word which coincide with the field no 0 of a gener
376. term has the value set by CE 1 parameter GET Set to the value needed by the speed reference summing term to maintain proper saturated the speed regulator offset speed CA2 Set to AuxRic value the current limits are controlled by the tension regulator The tension regulator calibration is performed assigning the values of the proportional gain and if CKC ON the values of the integral gain of the regulator Its elf TK1 Setto the proportional gain value of the tension regulator TK2 Set to the integral gain value of the tension regulator if CKC ON The tension regulator output will be limited by parameters TK3 positive limit and TK4 negative limit TK3 Setto the positive limit value of the tension regulator output 4 Setto the negative limit value of the tension regulator output Setthe parameters related to the enable and setting of the Taper function par E5 7 Setthe parameters related to the enable of the zero speed tension function par E5 8 Set the parameters related to the enable of the inertia compensation function par E 5 10 Set the parameters related to the enable of the mechanical losses compensation function Set the parameters related to the enable of the diameter calculation acquisition function par E5 9 TK7 Setto the derivative gain value of the tension regulator IMSPDO027I 215 E Optional functions SILCOPAC D E5 4 Commands All the tension regulators are enabled by Com3 command terminal
377. terminals XM 1 30 31 From Tach analog input terminals XM 1 26 27 From If analog input terminals XM 1 28 31 224 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D E Optional functions _ Code Default Values Description ou 100 Material density red 0 1 100 Material width pud AccT1 1005 0 999 95 Second machine acceleration time 5900 Group N DIAMETER CALC pie DIAMETER 0 1 100 Minimum diameter Selection of the starting diameter source FDims EE From CN3 parameter From 1 analog input terminals XM 1 29 31 mere Ean2 analog input terminals XM1 30 31 i 10 1510090 Starting diameter CN4 Angular speed threshold before which the diameter calculation is disabled parameter sow 0 105 _ cCN6 Calc CNS Selection of the operating diameter source 506B Diameter calculation disabled the diameter value is assumed equal to 1 From 1 analog input terminals 1 29 31 From Ean2 analog input terminals 1 30 31 Calculated diameter From serial link com o 0 250 Disabling time of the diameter calculation function after the Start command E6 2 Tuning Parameters Group J POSITION REG Note this group includes the parameters of the Angular Position Regulator aux function aw Jo 0 9999 Proportional gain of the motor shaft position regulator Proportional gain of motor speed regulator after the positioning
378. ternal protection is active opening the terminal XM1 20 DCB Ext P ON OFF disabling the converter the relay K2 converter ready is not de energized The intervention 220 1 5 not internally stored so the converter will be enabled again if the protection loss causes the closing of terminal XM1 20 This hardware protection cannot be disabled DCC ON OFF 2 Max instantaneous current The intervention of this protection occurs when the voltage 5502 I drop on the CT load resistor rises beyond 6 3 V see par 3 3 of manual C Section This hardware protection cannot be disabled d ON OFF 3 Watchdog 4 Max armature voltage The intervention threshold can be set through the DC5 DCE ON OFF parameter The intervention may be also caused by the voltage transducer failure in this 2504 case the protection will be active if the motor speed rises beyond the basic speed DB7 parameter while the transducer reports a voltage value lower than 50 of the rated value DCF ON OFF 5 Motor field loss The intervention may be also caused by the exciter failure The 550 5 I minimum intervention threshold can be adjusted by the DC3 parameter 6 Tacho signal loss The protection is active when the armature voltage rises beyond the s Tach_F ON OFF threshold value set by the parameter 002 at null speed feedback tacho generator or encoder broken This protection is also active when the tacho voltage is applied with reversed polarity See also pa
379. th E the b pre set value contemporary the display shows in A two variables of list c to verify the step consequence the same time the THYRISTOR TRACE and the DRIVE TRACE see par 1 3 3 A will be stored if DGB parameter is ON to be successively printed INSTRUMENT MODE see par 6 2 5 initialized in A pressing MODE Ist level will be entered and the two TRACE are restarted if the selected type from list a is an item of the 1st subset pressing ENTER in B the display shows using buttons U D select from list d the application mode fixed or Square wave mode of the already selected reference in a See NOTE 8 D press ENTER to access to the 3rd level if the converter is enabled in regulation mode pressing ENTER the display shows SYSTEM RUNNING PRESS MODE if this is CONT SPEED REF the value displayed in b using buttons U D will be immediately activated rather than after the confirmation by ENTER button as for all the other references of the list b List a List b Ist subset SPEED REFERENCE 90 45 rpm 1 VOLTAGE REFER unas Ga M 2 FIELD CURR REF c 90 45 3 ARM CURR REF LE 96 fS 4 2nd subset CONT SPEED REF NOC 90 45 rpm 5 ANGLE REF FRW alla electr degrees 6 ANGLE REF REV alla electr degrees 7 IMSPD027I 123 C Use
380. than 1000 V for unlimited use in the first environment Category C2 Stationary drive systems for rated voltages less than 1000 V for use in the second environment It is possible the use in the first environment which fulfil all the following criteria m Rated voltage lt 1000 V plug in device movable device m Installation and commissioning only by a professional a person organisation having necessary skills in installing and or commissioning power drive systems including their EMC aspects m Warning required Warning in the instructions for use This is a product of category C2 according to IEC 61800 3 In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case supplementary mitigation measures may be required Category C3 Drive systems with rated voltage lt 1000 V intended for use in the second environment and not intended for use in the first environment Warning in the instructions for use This type of PDS is not intended to be used on a low voltage public network which supplies domestic premises Radio frequency interference is expected if used on such a network Category 4 foruse in the second environment which fulfil at least one of the following criteria m Rated voltage 21000 V m Rated current 2400 connected to IT networks required dynamic performances will be limited as a result of filtering An EMC plan is to be established public medium voltage network catego
381. the 2nd level is resumed pressing MODE the 15 level is resumed SYSTEM NUMBER 1 ASL 2 Release 3 1 identification number of the converter 2 data day month year 3 software release number followed by a letter to identify the version B BASIC VERSION E ENHANCED VERSION lt gt B E CUSTOM ifthis is THYRISTOR TRACE or DRIVE TRACE the Trace must be in stop mode see par DGA and DGB the display shows PRESS MODE List a CONF PARAMETERS TUN PARAMETERS DRV PARAMETERS THYRISTOR TRACE DRIVE TRACE IMSPD027 configuration parameters the present values will be printed the present values that differ from the default values are marked by an asterisk A print example is shown in appendix D regulation parameters the present values will be printed the present values that differ from the default values are marked by an asterisk A print example is shown in appendix E converter parameters the present values will be printed the present values that differ from the default values are marked by an asterisk A print example is shown in appendix F if the Trace is in stop mode the 16 sequential records of the 5 variables of the current regulator described in par 1 3 8 are printed numbered from 8 to 7 in column N The record numbered as 0 corresponds to the converter lock instant The print will be terminated by a message 4 ERRORS TRACING CAUSE 5 4 number of not valid events ma
382. the armature voltage decreases below the value equivalent to the threshold value the regenerative braking is enabled D21 Toggling of the references and commands The selection of the origin of reference of speed parameter CB1 foresees two new possibilities MPoRif and SerRif The first one allows to toggle the speed reference from Motopotentiometer to terminal board input Ref XM 1 33 XM1 34 and the contrary the second one commutes the reference from serial line to input Rif In both cases the commutation is performed through the logic input COMA terminal 6 1 XM6 2 expansion card 1 0 SPDIO MPoRif New The speed reference comes from the motopotentiometer when the input is OFF If is brought to ON the speed reference is read by the analog input Rif 1 SerRif New The speed reference comes from the serial line when the input COM4 is OFF If COMA is brought to ON the speed reference is read by the analog input Rif in this case the protection of serial loss is automatically masked CFG ON New This parameter enables the function of exchange of the commands Start Ramp IntRefl IntRef2 Com1 Com2 Com3 from serial to terminal board through the logic input This function is activated only if CB1 is programmed as SerRif in this way the commands and the references be simultaneously toggled from serial to terminal board through the only command COM4 OFF
383. the calculated acquired diameter CURRENT REG Armature current regulator CURRENT FEEDBACK Armature current feedback la TAPER Used when in the winder unwinder applications the tension reference To has to be re calibrated as function of the coil diameter the re calibration can be linear or hyperbolic type When the function is disabled the tension reference is directly passed to the comparison node DIAMETER CALC The diameter is acquired as analog signal provided by a proper external transducer INERTIA COMP It evaluates the term related to the inertia compensation that is function of speed variation diameter machine acceleration times material density and tape width MECHANIC LOSS It evaluates the term related to the mechanical loss compensation a constant term and a speed related term TENSION REF It evaluates the term related to the tension reference 210 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D Parameters setting Setting 4 Tangential winder control of the current limit CJB Setto ON to enable the function CJ1 Setto the value according to the proper tension reference source Rif tension reference from Rif analog input 0 100 terminals 1 33 34 Eanl tension reference from Ean1 analog input 0 100 terminals 1 29 31 P CJ4 tension reference from CJ 4 parameter 0 100906 4 Set to the tension reference value if CJ I P 4 Setto Tang value tangential winder CL2 Setto the cutoff freq
384. the rating power CE4 Parameter which contains the value of the power lost due to the variable frictions with the speed as of the rating power N Speed of the motor expressed as of the maximum speed To display the power provided to the axis schedule the parameter 065 DG6 067 as MecPow 192 IMSPDO027I SILCOPAC D D Auxiliary functions D17 Double set complete of parameters Itis possible with this function to store in memory two complete set of parameters the function it enabled by setting the parameter CDG ON The double set of parameters can be useful for example to have two different configurations of the adjusters as in the typical case of a winder whose configuration must be changed according to the material wound up Tension regulation with control of the current limit configuration 3 of the manual SPDM Tension regulation with control of the speed reference and calculation of angular speed configuration 1 of the manual SPDM The passage from the first to the second set is made during the reset of the converter and the set of parameters is established by input During the reset if COM1 OFF gt first set 1 0 5 second set The eventual function assigned to COM1 e g the motopotentiometer is suspended during the procedure of change The sequence of commands to obtain the change of the set graphically illustrated in figure 5 1 is as follows disable the converter opening the terminal
385. the shield bar by a wire having 2 mm2 section minimum Terminal XM1 22 common of the 24 V external power supply it must be connected to the shield bar by wire having 2 mm2 section minimum P board Carpentry 2 6 mm i Ground catie Shields bar ED IMSPD027I 41 A Technical features A7 3 Recommended fuses type AC Fuses 690V 3 Pieces ELC20653301 SPDM600UG ELC20653302 SPDM080UG ELC20653303 ELC20653304 _ 40V ELC20653306 ELC21242801 40V ELC21242802 _ ELC21242803 IV ELC21242804 ELC21242805 SPDM Im ELC21242806 B Mains Voltage 2 Quadrant SPDM110UG SPDM110UG SPDM110UH SPDM200UH _5 0 35096 400 NEU SPDM350UH u s Note Sizes IIIL HILL IV and V have 6 fuses placed inside the converter 4 Quadrant SPDM060RG SPDM060RG SPDMO6ORH SPDMIIORG SPDM110RH SPDM200RG SPDM200RG SPDM200RH SPDM350RG SPDM350RG _ Mains Voltage Note The fuses fail signalling microinterruptor type depends the fuses type used OE MANFACIURR __ 0 00 AC Fuses 3 Pieces ELC20653301 ELC20653401 ELC20653401 ELC20653302 ELC20653402 ELC20653402 ELC20653303 ELC20653403 ELC20653304 ELC20653404 ELC20653404 ELC20653306 ELC20653406 ELC20653406 ELC21242801
386. the square wave will be calibrated as shown in the following figure amplitude V1 average value fixed in b in the SET UP REFERENCE n SQUARE WAVE V2 amplitude fixed through the DG8 parameter T period fixed through the 069 parameter 124 IMSPDO27I SILCOPAC D C User Interface C1 3 8 Thyristor trace This function analyses the current regulator behaviour before and after the occurrence that locked the converter During normal operation five significant variables of the current regulator are logged in memory on each firing of a thyristors pair every 3 3ms about The memory stores the last 16 consecutive records that can be displayed step by step when the converter is locked in a protection or in a suppression status but in this case only if the DGA parameter was set to ON Through the DG3 parameter the record number be set in the range 2 to 14 after the lock instant in Trace stop mode conditions using U D buttons select the Thyristor Trace 1st level function SELECT FUNCTION THYRISTOR TRACE press ENTER to access to the 2nd level 2nd level lao la alla T S the display shows the five variables at the lock instant Using D button the previous instants can be explored the cursor moves left Using U button the 1 2 3 4 5 following instants explored the cursor moves right cursor gt pressing ENTER the lock origin is displayed see par C1 3 1 STATUS the display s
387. the user interface Optocoupled input 8mA current consumption COMI COM2 COM3 programmable logic inputs when connected to terminal 23 the function selected through U I will be enabled Optocoupled inputs 8mA current consumption KP logic input normally connected to terminal 23 removing this connection the converter will be disabled but the relay K2 will not be de energized It is used to disable the converter at the intervention of an external protection Optocoupled 8 mA current consumption REMOTE RESET logic input when connected to terminal 23 the microcontroller will be reset It is parallel connected to the reset local pushbutton on C board Optocoupled 8 mA current consumption These terminals must be connected to an external power source 24V 500 mA needed to supply the encoder P ush P ull circuits and the logic input and output circuits with galvanic isolation from the control circuits Terminal 22 2 common Terminal 23 24 V m 1 24V 50 mA logic output It is programmable through the parameter 001 Optocoupled close the load path to terminal 22 OUT2 24V 50 mA logic output It is programmable through the parameter 002 Optocoupled close the load path to terminal 22 TACH tacho generator input if encoder is not jumper 12 If OV lt Vt lt Rin 10KQ used Resolution 10 bit sign 11 11V lt Vt lt Rin 20KO Insert appropriate jumper according to the max tacho 10 20V lt Vt lt Rin 38KQ voltage value 9
388. til the master user sends the correct values F24 Process parameters The process parameters which are the P DZ part of the PPO message chosen are always exchanged between Master and slaves The firsttwo words have the following meaning for PPO at Master input word n 1 drive status Bits status 1 X X A B C D E Test status Bits A B C D E define the failed test 0 1 X A B C D E Protection status Bits A B C D E define the protection intervened 0 0 1 A B C D E Suppr Status Bits A B C D E define the suppression cause 0 0 0 1 0 0 Zero speed adjust status 0 0 0 0 1 0 Speed forward adjust status O O 0 0 0 1 Speed backward adjust status If bit A is high the Drive has an active alarm If bit B is high the Drive is in limit of current Decoding of Test status 0 0 0 0 1 Lack of synchronism 0 0 0 1 0 Phase detecting circuit broken 0 0 0 1 1 Network out of tolerance 0 0 1 0 0 Network frequency out of tolerance 0 0 1 0 1 Drive identification number 5 zero par DA1 O O 1 1 O broken 0 0 1 1 1 Armature current not null 1 027 271 APPENDIX F Profibus DP SILCOPAC D Decoding of Protection status 0 0 0 0 1 Lack of network 0 0 0 1 0 External protection O 0 0 1 1 instant current O 0 1 0 0 Watchdog intervention 0 0 1 0 1 armature voltage O 0 1 1 0 Lack of motor field 0 0 1 1 1 Tachym Fallure O 1 O O 0 Lack of ventilation O 1 0 0 1 Motor
389. time that limits the applications of this function to the only cases in which it is not necessary a high dynamics of the torque inversions 010 1 Parameters The following list includes all parameters concerning the SPDM U mentioned in the description of the function field inversion function field inversion cannot be enabled if the converter is reversible Therefore before enabling the function it 5 necessary to configure the parameter as The function field inversion cannot be enabled if before the analog output P WM2 terminal XM1 39 has not been configured to provide the reference of current of field Therefore before enabling the function you must configure the parameter DM2 as Ifo value of default Enabling of the regulator of the electromotive force Enabling of the function field inversion Threshold of intervention of the function field inversion The procedure of field inversion starts as soon as the current reference la0 coming from the speed regulator or from another source which can be established with the parameter 1 changes the sign and in absolute value exceeds the threshold which was set with the parameter CA8 Field saving The field current of the motor is reduced at the value programmed in 1 The reduction of the field Current occurs only if the status of the converter is SUPPRESSION or PROTECTION Furthermore the start of the reduction of current occurs after a programmable del
390. ting the initial diameter e g potentiometer must have 0 to 10V swing where OV corresponds to the value set by CN1 parameter minimum diameter and 10V corresponds to 100 maximum diameter E45 Function description The linear speed reference is changed as function of the diameter value to an angular speed reference that will be sent to the speed regulator The evaluated angular speed reference value can be displayed through the Instrument Mode function at the No item The acquired line speed value can be displayed by an auxiliary variable setting one of DG5 066 and 067 parameters to Line N value set the displaying of the Selected aux variable through the Instrument Mode function The acquired diameter value can be displayed by an auxiliary variable setting one of DG5 DG6 and DG7 parameters to Diam value 202 IMSPD027 SILCOPAC D E Optional functions E5 TENSION REGULATORS These regulators are used in those applications where a constant tension on the material is required DYNAMOMETER Newton The tension can be regulated by closed loop presence of the tension feedback signal or by open loop calculation of the current needed to generate the torque resulting in the desired tension E5 1 Closed loop regulation The tension reference is compared to the tension feedback the resulting error is processed by a proportional integral module generating a term that corrects the speed reference or that can be used as current li
391. tion Normal R ev is defined by the analog input status available on the SPDIO optional board Com6 not active Normal operation Como active Rev Operation Set to the current value expressed in percentages depending on the motor rated current needed to apply the desired tension to maximum diameter Setto AuxAdd value the speed reference summing term has the value set by CE1 parameter Set to the value needed by the speed reference summing term to maintain proper saturated the speed regulator offset speed Set to AuxRic value the current limits are controlled by the tension regulator The tension regulator calibration is performed assigning the values of the proportional gain and if CKC 2 ON the values of the integral gain of the regulator Its elf Setto the proportional gain value of the tension regulator Set to the integral gain value of the tension regulator if CKC ON The tension regulator output will be limited by parameters TK3 positive limit and TK4 negative limit Setto the positive limit value of the tension regulator output Setto the negative limit value of the tension regulator output Setthe parameters related to the enable and setting of the Taper function par 8 7 the parameters related to the enable of the zero speed tension function par 8 8 Setthe parameters related to the enable of the inertia compensation function par 8 10 Setthe parameters related to the enable of the mechanical
392. tion environment type of power supply network and power of the drive Limits for certain conditions can be selected by using the flow chart on Figure 3A 4 RFI filters are used to attenuate conducted disturbances in a line connecting point where the filter leads the disturbances to earth RFI filters are needed when a PDS is connected to the public low voltage network First Environment It is also recommended to use filters in industrial situations Second Environment if there are potential victims in the neighbourhood and thus possible EMC problems Installation of the RFI filter Reliable HF low impedance connections are essential to ensure proper functioning of the filter therefore the following instructions shall be followed Filter shall be assembled on a metal plate with unpainted connection points all in accordance with filter manufacturer s instructions frames of the filter cubicle if separate and the drive cubicle shall be bolted together at several points Paint shall be removed from connection points The input and output cables of the filter shall not run in parallel and must be separated from each other The maximum length of the cable between the filter and the drive must be shorter than 0 3m do not obstruct the drive cooling intake For longer connections use a shielded cable only e The filter must be earthed using the designated filter ground terminal only Note that the cable type and size are criti
393. to the 2nd level or press MODE to return to the 1st level List a List b motor START speed ref ramp insertion Ist internal speed ref insertion M16 IntRef2 1 2nd internal speed ref insertion M17 Coml 1 programmable logic command 1 LOGIC INPUT M13 Start Eu s M18 Com programmable logic command 2 M14 Ramp 1 15 1 19 Com3 1 programmable logic command 3 1 11 Com4 l programmable logic command 4 1 12 Com5 1 programmable logic command 5 1 13 _ 1 programmable logic command 6 114 Com 1 programmable logic command 7 M20 external protection intervention LOGIC OUTPUT M1 2 K1 as Lise zero speed K1 relay M3 4 K2 1 ready converter K2 relay M24 OUTI uds programmable logic output 1 M25 programmable logic output 2 1 1 QUIS xoa programmable logic output 3 1 2 0174 1 programmable logic output 4 X1 3 OUTS programmable logic output 5 1 4 OUTO la programmable logic output 6 ANALOG INPUT M26 T motor speed 4 M28 y wa motor excitation current M29 Eanl 1st programmable input Ean1 M30 Ean2 2nd programmable input Ean2 M32 Ud armature voltage M33 motor speed reference line voltage iar armature current feedback ANALOG OUTPUT M37 Pwml programmable analog
394. to the Publication 61800 3 edition 2005 and to the Standard 22 10 provided that they are installed according to the instructions contained in the use and installation manual in the machine diagrams and in the documents eventually drawn concerning electromagnetic compatibility In determining the acceptation limits the installation environment as well as the distribution and circulation modes of the products have to be taken into consideration Moreover it is herewith declared that the products have been manufactured workmanlike according to the instructions warnings communicated by the suppliers of the components ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To allow their installation on a machine the products are coordinated with the applicable requirements of the harmonized Technical Standard CENELEC EN 60204 1 corresponding to the Publication IEC 60204 1 edition 1997 and to the Standard 44 5 Answer Drives S r l The Director q 5 aut Montebello Vicentino 2007 September 30 Ambrogio Boselli The Quality System of Answer Drives S r l is certified ISO 9001 2000 Certificate issued on 05 October 1994 by RINA QA187 Rev 02 Wawa DRIVES MONTEBELLO VICENTINO ITALY DECLARATION OF INCORPORATION According to Machinery Directive 98 37 EC Declaration drawn according to Enclosure B of Directive 98 37 EC former 89 392 EEC Manufacturer Answer Drives S r l Head Office Viale Sarca 336 2012
395. tput P WM3 to enable this output as speed signal set the parameter N AAA ebeRMeMRoo h hoE0E AAAAAAAAR mB e AAAAAAAAA f a voltmeter is used full scale 10V P18 must be closed on 2 3 position Wi 2quadrentSPOM_ ihe meler may be a ater zero ype eee or centre zero pe Setparameler ON _ With 4 quadrant SP DM i the meter must be a centre zero type Set parameter DMC OFF Optionally if the revolution direction doesn t care it is possible to read the absolute value only in this case the meter may be a lateral zero type set parameter DMC ON C2 5 Exciter customizing SPAE1A The internal exciter SPAE1 is mounted in the Silcopac D fixing it down at the drive top cover using an angle iron that is a part of the radiant heat surface At the end of the mounting operations the board is in front view WARNING For the proper operations of the internal exciter SPAE1 the terminals U and W of the SPAE1 terminal board XM4 and the terminals U and W of the P board terminal board 2 respectively must be in phase C2 5 1 Field current transducer configuration 5
396. ue allowed by the machine P 4 density from CM4 parameter Ean2 density from Ean2 analog input terminals XM 1 30 31 If density from If analog input terminal XM 1 28 31 CM3 Setthis parameter to select the source of the information related to the coil width as percentage of the max value allowed by the machine _ 5 width from CM5 parameter Ean2 width from Ean2 analog input terminals XM1 30 31 Tach width from Tach analog input terminals XM1 26 27 J umpers 8 9 10 11 12 If width from If analog input terminal XM 1 28 31 CM4 Setto the density value when 2 4 CM5 Set to the coil width value when 3 5 CM6 Set to the machine acceleration time value s measured in empty reel conditions CM7 Set to the machine acceleration time value s measured in max reel conditions E5 9 2 Tangential winder For proper calibration of the coil inertia compensation it is needed to set three machine acceleration times the acceleration time can be measured according to the sequence described at par 5 2 1 motorized cylinder acceleration time 2 empty reel acceleration time with the core cylinder supported to the motorized cylinder without material 3 max reel acceleration time max diameter max coil width max material density Diameter motorized cylinder When because of practical reasons the machine acceleration time measurement at max reel cannot be made the acceleration time with a
397. uency value of the double slope digital filter at the regulator output to disable set CL2 0 CL3 Set to Wind value for winder reel Set to Unwind value for unwinder reel CL4 Set to Normal if the passage of the material on the winder unwinder is that defined for the normal operation Set to Rev if the passage of the material on the winder unwinder is opposite to that defined for the normal operation 0 Normal material top winded Rev material bottom winded or vice versa Set to if the operating condition Normal Rev 15 defined by the analog input status available the SPDIO optional board not active Normal operation Com6 active Rev operation CL5 Set to the current value expressed in percentages depending on the motor rated current needed to apply the desired tension to maximum diameter see E5 11 parameter CB2 Set to AuxAdd value the speed reference summing term has the value set by CE1 parameter CE1 Set to the value needed by the speed reference summing term to maintain proper saturated the speed regulator offset speed 2 Set to AuxRic value the current limits are controlled by the tension regulator Set the parameters related to the enable and setting of the Taper function par 8 7 Set the parameters related to the enable of the zero speed tension function par 8 8 Set the parameters related to the enable of the inertia compensation function par 8 10 Set the parameter
398. uested external Output VOUT wa MES phase SPAEO lt s E 98 ViN HEN tuning field resistor e rectifier n Voors Iy P RIZ W 2 fuses 3 transformator auto if Viy2415 VouT V N 0 98 Constant Single phase half SPAE1 10A SPAM lt 415V 0 82 1 line reactor Torque P ower controlled bridge 16 454 2 fuses and fuse holders Voltage forcing 3 thermal relay during acceleration 4 auto transformer and rc not possible filter if Vin gt 415v VO UT Vr gt 2 gt 1 8 Three phase fully SPATE U 380 500V 115 See SPAT controlled bridge SPDME U See SPDM SPDME R 380 500V 1 05 Vin See 1 Discharge resistor Actual field voltage IF Rated field current IMSPD027 51 A Technical features SILCOPAC D GENERAL DATA EN61800 3 4 EN 50178 Low voltage 3804001 15 10 GOVA 140 C decrease rated current by Operating temperature 25 Ctoamaximumosssrc Relative humidity 95 no condensation allowed 0 01 with encoder transducer Altitude above above 1000 decrease rated current Speed accuracy 0 196 with tacho transducer level by 196 for every 100m up to 3000m 2 with armature voltage transducer P20 protection against accidental contacts Dead zone on bridge reversing 3 3ms max Acceleration deceleration time 0 1 30005 Two auxliliary programmable analog inputs Ean1 2 0 9bit sign Two auxliliary
399. uning parameters This function tunes the system sets the tuning parameters values of each regulator included in the converter so to meet the specifications requested by the actual application e g tuning of the current regulator ofthe speed regulator etc 1st level using buttons U D select the Tuning Parameters function TUN 5 U D press ENTER before accessing to the 2nd level the password is requested at step 1 this is mandatory only if one wants to modify the value of a parameter in ENTER PASSWORD 2 password value is 12 Password 1 U D press ENTER to access to the 2nd level 2nd level through buttons U D select an item of the list a SELECT GROUP U D press ENTER to access to the 3rd level 3rd level using buttons U D select a parameter of the list b press ENTER to confirm the selected parameter 3 through buttons U D enter the desired value in 2 SELECT VALUE 2 U D press ENTER to confirm the value and to return to 3rd level the new 4 value will be stored in the EEPROM ifthe password entered in 1 is not correct pressing ENTER INVALID PASSWORD in 3 the display shows PRESS ENTER press ENTER to return to 3rd level if the system is regulating and the parameter is protected pressing SISTEM RUNNING ENTER 3 the display shows PRESS ENTER press ENTER to return to 3rd level Le if the system cannot accept the value entered in 2 pre
400. unlock of the control tongue located into the central adjustment dynamometer spring bolt Allow to the tongue a free but clutched rotation the pad must be in the proper holder of the heat sink Reinstall the stack Connect all press on connectors fastons in the proper position Reinstall the fuse Screw the bolts of the lateral small bars connecting the stack Reinstall the boards holder and connect all connectors IMSPD027 171 C Maintenance SILCOPAC D Plexiglass Front panel protection Fuse mounting bolt position 1 EN 26 mon a o P I 2 C H P T position 1 mounting olts Fasteners Grove fasrening Lateral bar mounting bolt Faston connectors Heatsink Fig 2 Thyristor Tongue Y Clamp adjustment bolt do not unscrew Thyristor centering pivots Fig 3 172 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D C Maintenance C4 2 3 Size V For this size disk thyristor are used to replace these thyristors operate acc
401. urrets Fig 1 XM2 terminal block C4 2 2 Size IV For this size disk thyristors are used to replace these thyristors operate according to the following sequence refer to Fig 2 and Fig 3 and to the bridges layout in the appendix Remove the converter power supply Remove the closure front panel fasteners Remove the Plexiglas protection panel fasteners Free the boards holder acting on the proper groove fastenings and place it in position 1 to access to the central stacks or in position 2 to access to the upper stacks The lower stacks are directly accessible Unscrew the fastening nuts of the two lateral small bars connecting the fault stack Unscrew the fastening nut of the fuse connected to the faulty stack and remove it Disconnect all press on connectors fastons connecting the faulty stack to the other circuits Unscrew the four bolts fastening the cover to the carpentry and remove the stack pulling it toward the converter front side Bench work unscrew alternatively the two closure clamp screws and replace the thyristor disk cell take attention to the two small centring pivots located between the cell and the heat sink Remove the grease and dirt from the touching surface apply on the heat sink a new layer of conductive grease EJ C2 or similar types and place the cell on the heat sink itself by the two small centring pivots Close the clamp screwing alternatively the two screws up to the
402. us The modify involve the follows parameters the DOA DOB DOC DOD DOE DOF parameters can be changed during the drive regulation status F6 Profibus interface board The eprom code for the SP DM profibus interface is DO05X9F X 1 027 275 APPENDIX F Profibus DP SILCOPAC D 276 1 027 APPENDIXG PARALLEL OF BRIDGES In order to increase the output current of the SPDM converters it is possible to parallel one SPDM suitably arranged with a module called RTT The SPDM suitable for parallel connection is identified by suffix 20 and 5 PPRCRD board installed inside The RTT is a SPDM without the control board and with the PPRCRC board installed inside The parallel connection between the SPDM and the RTT is made in the following way a connecting the SPDM terminal KM to the RTT terminal KM and the SPDM terminal AM to the RTTterminal AM For the connections it is necessary to use as a Support a terminal block located on the board itself The layout of the connections between the converters and the supporting terminal block must be as symmetrical as possible and cables must be of the same type b both SPDM and RTT must have the input reactor The reactance value must have a voltage drop at the rated phase current 0 821 between 2 to 4 of the phase voltage The maximum distance between SP DM and RTT imposed by the flat cable length used to connect the PPRCRC and PPRCRD 5 about 2 m The parallel connection must be mad
403. ut connecting these two terminals to 24V power supply terminal 4 0 the input will be enabled 1 2 3 4 5 6 COM6 logic input connecting these two terminals to 24V power supply terminal 6 0v the input will be enabled 7 8 7 logic input connecting these two terminals to 24V power supply terminal 8 Ov the input will be enabled OUT3 relay contacts 220V 2A terminal 9 common terminal 10 N A contact terminal 11 N C contact OUT4 relay contacts 220V 2A terminal 12 common terminal 13 N A contact terminal 14 N C contact OUT5 relay contacts 220V 2A terminal 15 common terminal 16 N A contact terminal 17 N C contact 21 18 19 20 OUT6 relay contacts 220V 2A terminal 18 common terminal 19 N A contact terminal 20 N C contact External 0V On SPDIO board four leds 1 E2 E4 show the status of the four output OUT3 OUT4 5 ed OUT6 they ON when the related output is energized C Board 80 IMSPDO027I SILCOPAC D A Technical features 9 4 SUPRB Profibus board The Profibus board SUPRB is supplied with the mounting kit Profibus SPPB2 The kit in addition to the board contains the mounting accessories Profibus DP option board technical data Profibus DP connections Communications Environment Vibration Safety __ Standard A9 4 1 Profibus cable Profibus devices are connected in a bus structure Up to 32 stations master or s
404. value the current limits are controlled by the tension regulator Setthe parameters related to the enable and setting of the Taper function par 8 7 Setthe parameters related to the enable of the zero speed tension function par 8 8 Setthe parameters related to the enable of the inertia compensation function par 8 10 Setthe parameters related to the enable of the mechanical losses compensation function Setthe parameters related to the enable of the diameter calculation acquisition function par 8 9 Winder 209 E Optional functions SILCOPAC D E5 3 4 Setting 4 Tangential winder control of the current limit Diameter it is an open loop tension regulator it used for winder or unwinder systems the motorized cylinder transmits the rotation to the winder cylinder the terms related to the tension reference to the inertia compensation and to mechanical losses compensation are calculated and Summed by a Summing node whose output controls the current limit the speed regulator is saturated by a term summed to the reference The diameter value is acquired by an external transducer NOMIC Current Limits SPEED N 2 DIAMETER CALC INERTIA To TAPER COMP Blocks description TENSION REF SPEED REG Speed regulator it is saturated by a term summed to the speed reference ic OMEGA CALC The angular speed reference 15 calculated from the line speed as function of
405. value of the parameter DD2 Setting an angle reference the Setup Reference function par C1 3 7 gives a zero speed but the voltage atterminals XM1 26 27 have its proper value Tacho feedback The data recorded on the DRIVE TRACE par C1 3 9 show that Reverse the connections at the Reversed tacho wires the the speed feedback has opposite sign in respectto the tacho generator terminals Terminal reference Setting an angle reference on the forward bridge the 26 on 27 and terminal Set up Reference function par C1 3 7 gives a negative sign of XM1 27 on 1 26 the speed Armature voltage feedback Check the proper tuning of armature voltage transducer par C2 7 3 Check that CB3 Ud C3 1 7 1 Ventilation loss protection intervention selecting the STATUS function par 1 3 1 the display shows PROTECTION Fan F FAIL HYPOTHESIS CHECKS ACTIONS ae intervention due to Check the ventilation ae 23 Check the ventilation KA SSES a Heat ae overheat Broken thermostat connection chapter A6 for the thermostat connection in the respective Restore kus s converter sizes Close jumper J P 1 of the P board Check the jumper J P1 on P board par C2 10 converter sizes Check thatthe cold thermostat contact is normally closed 164 5 027 SILCOPAC D C Troubles shooting FAIL HYPOTHESIS CHECKS ACTIONS Excessive motor overload Check that in the machine
406. ve the mechanical lock of the motor rotor 2 re enable the excitation circuit verify that the motor excitation current value be the nominal one re enable the field loss protection setting the CDF ON 3 verify the proper set up of the DB6 DB7 parameters 4 verify the proper sign of the speed feedback verify that the display shows a value equal to 100 measured speed full scale speed J connect the motor to the real load the self tuning executed in motor load less conditions is not generally valid in real load conditions EMF SELFTUNING self tuning of the motor e m f regulator during the procedure the motor speed goes to its basic value The magnetizing characteristic will be detected OFFSET SELFTUN Note disconnect terminals XM1 26 28 29 30 32 33 34 analog inputs connect this terminals again atthe end of the procedure 130 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D C1 3 11 Protes amp alarms C User Interface This function displays the status of all the protections and alarms the function resets the active alarms Remember that each intervention through the Drive Parameters may be defined as protection if the intervention is reported and the converter is stopped DCx parameter of group alarm if the intervention is reported without the stop of the converter DDy parameter of group DD X y identify the active protection or alarm e g DCA line loss DCx DDy lst OFF OFF 2nd OFF ON 3rd ON OFF 4th ON ON
407. version The field has negative direction Table 010 1 Status of the two logic outputs according to the status of the converter In the table the indexes x and y refer to one of the six logic outputs of which the output OUT1 and the output 0072 are available on the terminal board of the SP DM and the remaining outputs OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 and OUT6 are available on the expansion SPDIOT The reference of current on the output of the speed regulator laoNrg indicated in the diagram of figure 6 2 can be displayed on the display of the keypad or converted in analog form by suitably configuring the parameters DG5 DG6 or DG7 and the parameters DM1 DM2 and DM3 Example 065 laoNrg The auxiliary variable AUX1 assumes the meaning of Reference of current generated by the speed regulator DM1 Auxl The auxiliary variable 1 is converted in analog form at the output PWM1 terminal XM1 37 IMSPDO27I 189 D Auxiliary functions SILCOPAC D D11 Quick restart The quick restart function handles the intervention conditions of the Line Loss and Line beyond tolerance protections avoiding the storage of the lock status In this way the system restart is allowed at the return of the normal operating conditions without the intervention of the user and avoiding the machine stop If the speed reference is obtained by means of the motor potentiometer if there is no supply mains it is automatically stored in the CB9 parameter so as to
408. volage I p SLE E ESSI SI IE 8 4 quadrants only 2 quadrants only See Parallel Bridges Manual NASPD003A00 Available for frames IV and V only it consists of six micro switch installed on the fuses The NC contacts are connected in series and the two terminal are free itis at user charge the connection to a cabinet terminal board Example 200A drive 4 quadrants power supply 400V standard software SPDM200RGE IMSPDO027I 21 A Technical features SILCOPAC D 22 IMSPD027I 5 INTERNAL CONNECTIONS A5 1 Board locations SILCOPAC Size Il SILCOPAC SILCOPAC oize IV Size III L II LL ITI SILCOPAC Size V IMSPD027I 23 A Technical features SILCOPAC D A5 2 Internal connections A5 2 1 Two quadrant Silcopac D C board ELC45244601 P board 260580 main lt 500 V 260581 BPU 66 main 600 690 V 1000002327 85 main 700 850 V 2 452567 BPU 1K A AC main 950 V CA Charge resistor Serial o or a a D Expansion X1 C Board XM1 24 IMSPD027I SILCOPAC D A5 2 2 Four quadrant Silcopac D C board ELC45244601 P board 260561 260562 ELC452445 ELC452463 IMSPD027I CONDB 50 66 85 IKA A Technical features main lt 500 V AC m
409. wait for the calibration execution following the instructions shown on the display Ifthe CURRENT SELFTUNING fails check if the motor runs throughout the calibration execution C2 10 2 Speed loop automatic calibration The speed loop automatic calibration must be done with the load applied to the motor Enable the field lack protection DCF ON Supply the exciter Disable the field loss protection With the START command enabled supply control and power Select the SELFTUNING function then select SPEED SELFTUNING and press lt enter gt Enable the START command and wait for the calibration execution following the instructions shown on the display WARNING During the speed loop automatic calibration the motors accelerates from zero speed till to base speed with rated _ WARNING torque In same application this cannot be allowed by the load so it is better the speed loop manual calibration See paragraph C2 17 the additional instructions for the use of the speed Self tuning function C2 10 3 loop automatic calibration Before to do the E M F loop automatic calibration it is necessary the calibration of the voltage transducer according the instruction of the paragraph C2 7 2 C2 7 3 C2 9 The E M F loop automatic calibration detects the magnetization characteristic of the motor so can be done with the field weakening motors only constant power With the START command disabled supply control
410. ws WATCHD0G ACTIONS If the protection occurs in systematic way and it 5 not related to possible causes due to the supply line replace C board Modify the synchronism wires path placing them far away of the possible noise sources Insert a EMC filter on the synchronism If the protection occurs in a systematic way and itis not related to possible causes due to noise on the synchronism replace C board Close jumper J P4 on pins 1 2 If the protection occurs at any parameter change replace the EEprom device If the EEprom replacement doesn t solve the problem replace C board If the failure persists replace P board HwWdog microntroller supervisor Replace board Reset the microcontroller was reset by a disturbance Check for the proper ground connections par A7 2 Check the efficiency of the filters placed on the devices installed in the cabinet Ifthe protection occurs in a systematic way replace C board ParD 8 the protection is active during the Check for the proper CT load resistor Decrease the DJ 8 parameter value par C2 3 CURRENT SELFTUN sequence only adjustment par C2 3 Eep SP Eeprom device auto protection a too large ac cess frequency to the device may be a failure cause It occurs only if a parameter change is requested through the serial link with a time period less than 40 ms exceed 0 78 The value In these cases it is sufficient that the modified parameters value abnorm
411. ws in the motor itself and the rotor 5 locked Vn Vr Ta armature time constant seconds the typical value is in the range 0 0055 to 0 045 Veff bridge supply RMS voltage typical value 400V CURRENT LOOP Step response verification Verify the static stability verification of the current loop if this test shows some unstable areas decrease the value of TA1 and TA2 parameters repeat the procedure until a stable response will be achieved on the whole range 0 to 10096 slow response increase the TA1 parameter value and or decrease the TA2 parameter value ean overshoot response increase the TA2 parameter value and or decrease the TA1 parameter value repeatthe procedure until a good and sufficiently fast response will be achieved SPEED LOOP Set TC1 TC2 and 4 parameters according to the following formulas 9V 64 DBS Too _ 5 Ir 10 where my speed regulator bandwidth in rad sec typical value 5 rad sec lt wy lt 10 rad sec Tacc acceleration time seconds needed by the system to increase the speed from 0 to the base speed with the armature current equal to lay par 2 3 The acceleration time must be measured with load connected Ir ratio between the motor max operating current lay and the motor operating current lay par 2 3 NBase motor base speed in rpm SPEED LOOP Step response verification Verify the static stability of the speed
412. zation characteristic detection with very high precision avoiding the need to set the TG1 and TG2 parameters to other than the default values If the Ud_F protection occurs par 1 3 11 the E M F regulator zeroes the field current reference When the CCC parameter is set to ON every time the system goes in the PROTECTION status the field current reference Ifo is set to zero It is possible to display the E M F value by setting one of the parameters 065 066 and DG 7 to the EMF value 29 2 Field saving The field saving function occurs after the zero speed signal See parameters CB5 and CB6 if the converter status is different than the regulation The intervention time of the field saving function expressed in millisecond is established by the CC3 parameter with the following formula T CC3 CD3 where the value can be 3 3 5 10 ms The field current reference takes the value set on the CC1 parameter The function is enabled only if P1 SPAE1 is closed on SPD or in the case of external exciter if the current reference on C board is used see paragraph C2 8 C2 9 3 Speed feedback from armature voltage When the speed feedback is the armature voltage CB3 parameter F Ud the motor field current value is represented by the CC4 parameter In case of non field weakening motors the CC4 shall remain unchanged at 100 default value in case of field weakening motors the CC4 can be reduced in order to reach sp

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

QUESTIONNAIRE DN4 : un outil simple pour rechercher  Preface - Spectrum Controls, Inc.  Electrolux CH 950 User's Manual  1002799 - manual mac corte série co  POLYCENTER Software Installation Utility User`s Guide  Typhoon Traveller Kit Professional    

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file